# What's New in BigBlueButton 4.0
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/getting-started/whats-new-in-bigbluebutton-4-0

A ten-minute video tour of the new interface in BigBlueButton 4.0.

BigBlueButton 4.0 introduces a new interface. In 3.0, the presenter's **Actions (+)** menu mixed things that changed the presentation — switching or uploading a presentation — with things that did not, such as the timer or picking a random user. The **gear** menu was a similar collection: lock viewers, clear reactions, create breakout rooms, the learning analytics dashboard. Both menus grew organically over the years.

4.0 sorts this out. Everything you share now lives in the **media area**, and every other tool lives in the **apps gallery**.

<iframe title="What's New in BigBlueButton 4.0" />

## What changed

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="The media area" icon="photo-film" href="/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-media-area">
    One place to share your screen, slides, an external video, or a camera as content — with thumbnails of your slides.
  </Card>

  <Card title="The apps gallery" icon="grid-2" href="/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-apps-gallery">
    Breakout rooms, polling, the timer, and the learning analytics dashboard gathered in one gallery. Pin the ones you use.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Minimize the presentation" icon="grip" href="/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/minimize-the-presentation-and-switch-to-grid-view">
    The layout manager is gone. Minimize the presentation and everyone sees a grid of tiles.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Participant permissions" icon="sliders" href="/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/participant-permissions-and-policies">
    Lock settings are now affirmative permissions — a checked box means participants can do it.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Presenting modes" icon="user-check" href="/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/presenting-modes">
    Assign the presenter role, let participants request it, or let anyone present at any time.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Two panels side by side" icon="table-columns" href="/docs/4.0/user-guide/open-two-panels-side-by-side">
    Add a second panel and keep the user list and chat — or any two panels — open together.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

Other changes shown in the video:

* **User list** — a search box for finding someone quickly in a large session, and user actions unified into one place.
* **Chat** — pin a message so it stays at the top of the chat as the conversation moves on.
* **Shared notes** — a new editor with slash commands, headings, code blocks, and tables, and much better pasting from Google Docs and similar tools.
* **Profile** — your away/available status and your webcam settings, including adding a second camera, now live at the top of the user list.
* **Settings** — moved to the bottom left. Language, font size, notifications, keyboard shortcuts, about, and a link to this knowledge base.

## What stayed the same

The whiteboard controls, the presentation controls, and the media controls along the bottom — share audio, share webcam, share screen, reactions, raise hand — work as they did in 3.0, along with start recording, connection status, and leave.

## Where to start

* **Students and participants** — read the [User Guide](/docs/4.0/user-guide/open-two-panels-side-by-side) section.
* **Presenters** — read the [Presenter Guide](/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-media-area) section.
* **Moderators and educators** — read the [Moderator Guide](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/participant-permissions-and-policies) section.


# Participant Permissions and Policies
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/participant-permissions-and-policies

What used to be called lock settings is now participant permissions — and the checkboxes are affirmative.

In BigBlueButton 4.0, the user list gathers the user-management functions into one place, including what 3.0 called **lock settings**. They are now **participant permissions**, and they read the way you would expect: **a checked box means participants can do it.** To take something away, clear the checkbox.

<img alt="Userpermissions40" />

## Set permissions

<Steps>
  <Step title="Open permissions and policies **[1]**">
    Open **permissions and policies** from the user list.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Clear what you want to restrict">
    For example, to stop participants from messaging each other, clear **private chat**.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Apply **[2]**">
    Select **Apply**. Participants see the usual message telling them the setting has been locked.
  </Step>
</Steps>

To give a permission back, check the box again and apply — participants are told they are unlocked.

## Guest policy

The same place holds the **guest policy**, which decides what happens when someone arrives **\[1]**:

<img alt="Guestpolicy 1" />

| Policy | What happens |
| - | - |
| **Always ask moderator** | Arrivals wait in the lobby until you review them. |
| **Always accept** | Arrivals join the session directly. |
| **Always deny** | Arrivals are turned away. |

You can confirm your settings by selecting apply **\[2]**.

<img alt="Messageguests" />

You also have the option to message guests that are waiting in the lobby, before they enter the BigBlueButton session.

See [Review and Admit Guests in Bulk](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/review-and-admit-guests-in-bulk) for handling the lobby itself.

## Presentation policy

Also in the same panel is the presenting policy — whether you assign the presenter role, participants request it, or anyone can present at any time **\[1]**. You can confirm your settings by applying them **\[2]** after selection. See [Presenting Modes](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/presenting-modes).

<img alt="Prespolicy" />

## Managing individual users

The per-user actions are the same ones you know from 3.0: make someone a presenter, promote them to moderator, or remove them.

<img alt="Usersettings40" />

When someone is talking, their name appears at the top of the user list, and you can mute them by selecting it.

<img alt="Muteuser40" />

<Tip>
  The user list has a search box in 4.0. In a session with a hundred people, search is the fastest way to find the one you need.
</Tip>


# Presenting Modes: Assigned, Request-and-Approve, or Open
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/presenting-modes

Decide how the presenter role changes hands — you assign it, participants request it, or anyone can present at any time.

In 3.0, the presenter role could only be assigned by a moderator. BigBlueButton 4.0 keeps that as one option and adds two more, so participants have some agency over when they can show something to the class.

## The three modes

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Assigned" icon="lock">
    Only a moderator assigns the presenter role. This is how 3.0 worked.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Request and approve" icon="hand">
    A participant asks to present and you approve or decline.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Anyone can present" icon="lock-open">
    Any participant can take the presenter role at any time, without approval.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

## Set the mode

Open **permissions and policies** from the user list — the same place as [participant permissions](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/participant-permissions-and-policies) and the guest policy — and choose the presenting mode.

## Handling requests

In **request and approve** mode, a participant's request comes to you for approval. Approve it to hand over the presenter role, or decline to leave it where it is.

<img alt="Allowpresenter" />

A pop-up will appear showing that the student is now the presenter.

<img alt="Presenter" />

<Tip>
  **Anyone can present**, combined with [minimizing the presentation](/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/minimize-the-presentation-and-switch-to-grid-view) for a grid of tiles, makes BigBlueButton function much more like a meeting tool — useful for staff meetings, group work, and student-led sessions.
</Tip>

<Note>
  Only one person presents at a time in any mode.
</Note>


# Review and Admit Guests in Bulk
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/review-and-admit-guests-in-bulk

Accept or deny everyone waiting in the guest lobby at once, message someone before letting them in, or stop being asked altogether.

When your session's [guest policy](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/participant-permissions-and-policies) is set to ask the moderator, arrivals wait in the lobby. BigBlueButton 4.0 consolidates that review into a single pop-up, so a class arriving all at once does not mean thirty separate decisions.

## Review the lobby

Everyone waiting appears in the list in the order they arrived. From there you can:

* **Accept** one person, and they join the session immediately.
* **Accept all** — admit everyone currently waiting.
* **Deny** one person, or **deny everyone**.
* **Send a message** to someone who is waiting — useful when you need to ask who they are before letting them in.

<img alt="Reviewguestlobby" />

## Stop being asked

The pop-up also offers a **remember allow all** option. Choose it and BigBlueButton stops asking about arrivals for the rest of the session — they join directly.

You can get the same result by changing the guest policy itself to **Always accept**.

<img alt="Rememberchoice" />

<Warning>
  **Always deny** turns arrivals away. Someone who is denied needs a new invitation to join.
</Warning>

For the policies themselves, see [How to configure guest policy](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-to-configure-guest-policy).


# Minimize the Presentation and Switch to Grid View
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/minimize-the-presentation-and-switch-to-grid-view

Minimize the presentation and everyone in the session sees a grid of tiles instead — one for each person.

The layout manager dialog from 3.0 is gone. In its place is something simpler: as the instructor, you **minimize** or **restore** the presentation, and the change propagates automatically to everyone in the session.

## Minimize the presentation

Select **minimize presentation** in the media area. The presentation collapses and the session switches to a grid of tiles — a webcam for everyone who is sharing one, and an avatar for everyone who is not.

<img alt="Minipres" />

Select **restore** to bring the presentation back.

<img alt="Restorepres" />

## Why use it

The grid puts the people in the room ahead of the content. It helps you build relationships with and between your students, because you can focus on faces rather than slides — and you can bring the focus back to the presentation at any point in the session.

<Tip>
  The grid pairs well with letting [anyone present](/docs/4.0/moderator-guide/presenting-modes): together they make BigBlueButton feel much more like a meeting tool when that is what your class needs.
</Tip>


# The Apps Gallery: Finding and Pinning Tools
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-apps-gallery

The apps gallery gathers the tools that are not part of the presentation — breakout rooms, polling, the timer, and the learning analytics dashboard.

If the [media area](/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-media-area) holds everything you share, the **apps gallery** holds everything else. The tools that used to be scattered through the **Actions (+)** and **gear** menus in 3.0 are now presented as a gallery, which also gives us room to add more apps to BigBlueButton over time.

## Open the gallery

Select **Apps**. The gallery opens with the apps available in your session.

<img alt="Screenshot 2026 08 28 At 9 53 12 PM" />

## Pin the apps you use

Select the pin icon on an app to pin it to the left side. Pinned apps stay there, so you can switch back and forth between them the same way you switch between the user list, chat, and shared notes.

## What's in the gallery

<AccordionGroup>
  <Accordion title="Breakout rooms">
    Breakout rooms now open inside a panel rather than a dialog. Assign people by dragging their names from the user list, or use **randomly assign** to shuffle them. Set the duration at the top, choose the slides each room starts with, and turn on the options to bring back the breakout room whiteboards and shared notes.

    Once the rooms are running, you can see who has joined each one, join a room yourself, send a message to all rooms, and finish all the rooms.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Polling and quizzing">
    Polling works as it did in 3.0 — the same interface for running a poll or a quiz.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Timer">
    The timer has a new look with quick-start options. Once started, it appears in the upper-right corner of the session, and deactivating it closes it.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Learning analytics dashboard">
    The dashboard is more prominent in 4.0. It shows everyone in the session with their activity score, lets you rank them, and shows their responses to polls and quizzes.
  </Accordion>
</AccordionGroup>

<Note>
  Which apps you see depends on your role and on what your administrator has enabled.
</Note>


# The Media Area: One Place to Share
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/presenter-guide/the-media-area

Everything you share in BigBlueButton 4.0 — slides, your screen, an external video, or a camera as content — goes through the media area.

In 3.0, the things you could share were spread through the **Actions (+)** menu alongside tools that had nothing to do with the presentation. BigBlueButton 4.0 gathers all of them into the **media area** — the central part of the screen, and the one place you go to put something in front of the class.

<img alt="Screenshot 2026 08 28 At 9 52 14 PM" />

The media sharing area can be found in the bottom-right corner of the BigBlueButton 4.0 Interface.

<img alt="Screenshot 2026 08 28 At 9 52 39 PM" />

## What you can share

| Content | What it does |
| - | - |
| **Slides** | Upload a presentation and show it to the class. |
| **Screen** | Share a screen, window, or browser tab. |
| **External video** | Play a video from YouTube or another supported link. |
| **Camera as content** | Point a second camera at a document, a whiteboard, or an object. |

## Upload and switch slides

<Steps>
  <Step title="Upload">
    Drag and drop your files onto the media area. Each one appears as a thumbnail, so you can see what you have loaded rather than reading a list of file names.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Choose">
    Select **Slides**, then select the thumbnail you want.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Share">
    Select **Share**. The slides appear in the media area for everyone.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Close the dialog">
    Select anywhere outside the dialog and it closes.
  </Step>
</Steps>

Switching between uploaded presentations later uses the same three steps — select **Slides**, pick the thumbnail, select **Share**.

<Tip>
  The whiteboard and presentation controls themselves are unchanged from 3.0. What moved is how you choose *what* to put in the media area.
</Tip>


# Open Two Panels Side by Side
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/user-guide/open-two-panels-side-by-side

Add a second panel so you can keep the user list and chat — or any two panels — open at the same time.

In BigBlueButton 4.0 you are no longer limited to one panel at a time on the left. You can add a second panel and keep two open together — the user list and the chat, for example — instead of switching between them.

## Add a second panel

<Steps>
  <Step title="Open the first panel">
    Select a panel — the user list, chat, shared notes, or an app you have pinned — from the left side.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Add the second panel">
    Select the **add a second panel** button. A second panel opens beside the first.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Choose what goes in it">
    Whatever you select next opens in that second panel, so you can put the chat next to the user list, or shared notes next to the chat.
  </Step>
</Steps>

Switching between panels works the same way as in 3.0 — selecting a different panel replaces what is in the one you are using, and the other stays where it is.


# Request the Ability to Present
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/4.0/user-guide/request-the-ability-to-present

Ask the moderator for the presenter role so you can share your screen, slides, or a video.

In BigBlueButton 3.0, only a moderator could hand out the presenter role. BigBlueButton 4.0 adds the ability for a participant to **request** it — so if you have something to show the class, you can ask rather than wait to be chosen.

## Send a request

Select **Request to present**. The moderator receives your request and can approve or decline it. When it is approved, you become the presenter and the sharing controls in the media area become available to you.

<img alt="Requestpresenter" />

## If you do not see the option

What you can do depends on which presenting mode the moderator has chosen for the session:

| Mode | What you can do |
| - | - |
| **Assigned** | Only the moderator assigns the presenter role — this is how 3.0 worked, and there is no request option. |
| **Request and approve** | You can ask to present, and the moderator approves or declines. |
| **Anyone can present** | You can take the presenter role yourself at any time, without approval. |

<Note>
  Only one person presents at a time. When someone else becomes the presenter, your sharing controls become unavailable again.
</Note>


# BN Analytics Overview
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/analytics/overview

The Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (ELAD) gives educators and administrators institution-wide insight into virtual learning.

<iframe title="Blindside Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (ELAD)" />

## What is ELAD?

The **Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (ELAD)** is an analytics platform from Blindside Networks that gives educational administrators institution-wide visibility into virtual learning across all of their BigBlueButton classes.

Where BigBlueButton's built-in Learning Analytics Dashboard (LAD) supports individual educators within a single session, ELAD aggregates data across every session to give administrators a high-level view of how virtual classes are performing over time.

## Key capabilities

* **Automatic updates** — The dashboard refreshes after each class session, so administrators get an up-to-date overview of all virtual classes without manual data collection.
* **Trend analysis** — Graphs show student activity, instructional time, product usage, and engagement patterns over time, helping measure the ROI of virtual learning initiatives.
* **Detailed filtering** — Drill down by time period, course, role, and other variables, with export to CSV, XLS, or PDF.
* **Risk and excellence identification** — Outlier analysis surfaces students who may be at risk or those who are excelling.
* **Feature usage insights** — See how BigBlueButton's pedagogical features are being used, revealing opportunities for educator training.
* **LMS integration** — Integrates directly with learning management systems such as Moodle, enabling unified reporting that combines synchronous and asynchronous activity data.

To learn more about ELAD, visit the [Blindside Networks ELAD page](https://blindsidenetworks.com/blindside-elad/) or [contact Blindside Networks](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact-us/).


# Deleting a Schoology Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/deleting-a-conference

Delete an active or past conference from your Schoology course using the gear icon menu.

## Deleting a conference

To delete any active or past conferences, go to the gear icon next to the conference and select **Delete**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 15 At 10 52 25 AM" />
</Frame>

You will be prompted to confirm your deletion.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 15 At 10 55 13 AM" />
</Frame>


# Check Understanding
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/active-learning/check-understanding

Use polls, quizzes, and Smart Slides to assess student comprehension in real time.

Presenters and moderators can check student comprehension during a session using [quick polls](#run-quick-polls), [Smart Slides](#use-smart-slides), [graded quizzes](#run-a-graded-quiz), and [shared poll results](#show-poll-results-to-the-class). Real-time feedback helps you identify gaps and adjust your teaching as you go.

## Run quick polls

Launch an instant poll to gauge understanding. BigBlueButton supports four poll types:

* **Yes / No** — quick binary checks ("Do you understand this concept?")
* **True / False** — fact verification
* **A / B / C / D** — multiple choice questions
* **Custom responses** — open-ended typed answers

For step-by-step instructions on creating and managing polls, see [Use Polling/Quizzing](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing).

## Use Smart Slides

Smart Slides let you embed poll questions directly in your presentation. To use them:

* Format each question with answer options on the slide (for example, `A) Option 1 / B) Option 2`).
* BigBlueButton detects the poll-formatted slide automatically.
* Select the poll prompt to launch the poll in one step.
* Results appear on screen as soon as students respond.

See [Using Smart Slides for One-Click Polling](/docs/help/moderator-guide/using-smart-slides-for-one-click-polling) for the full walkthrough.

<Tip>
  Prepare Smart Slides in advance for a seamless polling experience during your session. See [Create Engaging Content](/docs/prepare/create-engaging-content).
</Tip>

## Run a graded quiz

Use polling as a graded quiz when you want to score answers:

* Mark the correct answer when you create the poll.
* Results show which students chose the correct answer.
* Review results together as a class to turn missed questions into learning moments.

## Show poll results to the class

Poll results appear as a chart visible to all participants. Use them to:

* See the distribution of answers at a glance.
* Decide where to focus your next explanation.
* Spark discussion by asking the class to explain their reasoning ("Why did some of you choose B?").

## Choose a comprehension check strategy

Match the poll type to the moment in your session:

| Strategy | Poll type | When to use |
| - | - | - |
| Concept check | True / False or A / B / C / D | After explaining a concept |
| Exit ticket | Custom response | End of session |
| Pre-assessment | Multiple choice | Start of session |
| Peer instruction | A / B / C / D, discuss, then re-poll | Mid-lecture |


# Collaborative Activities
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/active-learning/collaborative-activities

Run collaborative exercises using the multi-user whiteboard and shared notes.

BigBlueButton's collaborative tools let students work together in real time, creating a more engaging learning experience.

## Multi-User Whiteboard

Enable the multi-user whiteboard so all participants can draw and annotate simultaneously:

* **Brainstorming** — students add ideas visually on the whiteboard
* **Collaborative diagramming** — build diagrams together as a class
* **Group annotation** — annotate images, maps, or charts together
* **Problem solving** — work through math or science problems collaboratively

See [Multi-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard).

## Per-User Whiteboard

Give each student their own whiteboard layer for individual work:

* Students work independently on the same slide
* Moderators can view each student's work privately
* Great for individual practice, quizzes, or assessments
* Students can't see each other's work

See [Per-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-do-i-use-the-per-user-whiteboard).

## Shared Notes Integration

Combine shared notes with the whiteboard for multi-format collaboration:

* **Move shared notes to the whiteboard** — transfer text content for group review and annotation. See [Move Shared Notes to the Whiteboard](/docs/help/presenter-guide/shared-notes-presenter#exporting-notes-to-the-whiteboard).
* **Export shared notes** — save collaborative text for later use

## Activity Ideas

<AccordionGroup>
  <Accordion title="Gallery Walk">
    1. Create multiple breakout rooms, each with a different prompt
    2. Students collaborate on shared notes or whiteboard in each room
    3. Rotate groups between rooms to review and add to previous work
    4. Export artifacts before closing rooms
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Jigsaw Activity">
    1. Assign each breakout room a different subtopic
    2. Groups research and create notes in shared notes
    3. Return to main room and share findings
    4. Move shared notes to whiteboard for class-wide synthesis
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Think-Draw-Share">
    1. Pose a question to the class
    2. Enable per-user whiteboard for individual thinking
    3. Review select student responses
    4. Switch to multi-user whiteboard for class discussion
  </Accordion>
</AccordionGroup>


# Gather Input
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/active-learning/gather-input

Collect student responses using custom polls, shared notes, and random user selection.

Gathering input from students keeps them engaged and gives you insight into their thinking.

## Custom Response Polls

Use polls with typed responses to collect open-ended input:

* Students type their own answers instead of choosing from options
* Great for brainstorming, word association, or collecting examples
* All responses are visible to the presenter

See [Use Polling/Quizzing](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing).

## Responding to Polls (Student View)

Students see a poll notification and can respond directly:

* Click to select an option (multiple choice) or type a response (custom)
* Responses are submitted anonymously by default
* Results appear when the presenter publishes them

See [Respond to Polls](/docs/help/user-guide/respond-to-polls).

## Shared Notes for Input

Use shared notes as a collaborative input tool:

* Pose a question and have students type responses in shared notes
* Everyone can see and build on each other's ideas
* Great for collaborative brainstorming or collecting questions

See [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes).

## Input Gathering Strategies

| Strategy | Tool | Description |
| - | - | - |
| Quick brainstorm | Custom poll | "Type one word that describes..." |
| Collaborative list | Shared notes | "Add your ideas to the shared notes" |
| Anonymous feedback | Custom poll | "What's still unclear?" |
| Group discussion prep | Shared notes | "Write your question before breakout rooms" |
| Think-pair-share | Shared notes + breakout rooms | Individual → small group → class |


# Learning Challenge & Key Takeaways
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/active-learning/learning-challenge-takeaways

Gamified activities, end-of-session reflections, and exporting session artifacts.

End your session with purpose — use challenges to reinforce learning and export artifacts for future reference.

## Learning Challenges

Turn end-of-session activities into engaging challenges:

### Timed Quiz Challenge

* Use the **timer** to add urgency to a final quiz
* Launch a poll with questions covering the session's key concepts
* Display results and celebrate top performers
* See [Timer and Stopwatch](/docs/help/releases/timer-and-stopwatch) and [Use Polling/Quizzing](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing)

### Whiteboard Challenge

* Give students 2 minutes to draw or diagram a key concept from memory
* Use the **per-user whiteboard** so each student works independently
* Review select responses as a class
* See [Per-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-do-i-use-the-per-user-whiteboard)

## Key Takeaways

Capture what students learned before the session ends:

### Exit Ticket (Poll)

* Launch a custom response poll: "What is the most important thing you learned today?"
* Review responses to gauge understanding

### Shared Notes Summary

* Ask students to add their key takeaway to shared notes
* Export the notes for class reference
* See [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes)

## Exporting Session Artifacts

Save work from the session before it ends:

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Export Breakout Room Shared Notes" icon="file-export" href="/docs/help/moderator-guide/access-breakout-room-whiteboards-or-shared-notes">
    Save collaborative text from breakout rooms.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Export Whiteboard Annotations" icon="file-image" href="/docs/help/moderator-guide/access-breakout-room-whiteboards-or-shared-notes">
    Save drawings and annotations from breakout rooms.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

<Warning>Breakout room content is deleted when rooms close. Export artifacts before ending breakout rooms.</Warning>


# Learning Analytics Dashboard
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/assess/learning-analytics-dashboard

Monitor student engagement, activity scores, and poll results in real time.

The Learning Analytics Dashboard (LAD) gives moderators real-time insight into student engagement during a session.

## Accessing the Dashboard

Open the Learning Analytics Dashboard from the moderator panel during a live session. The dashboard updates in real time as students participate.

See [Learning Analytics Dashboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard) for setup and usage details.

## Engagement Metrics

The dashboard tracks several engagement indicators:

| Metric | What It Measures |
| - | - |
| **Activity Score** | Overall engagement level per student |
| **Talk Time** | How long each student has spoken |
| **Webcam Time** | How long each student has shared their camera |
| **Messages Sent** | Number of chat messages per student |
| **Emojis/Reactions** | Reactions and status changes |
| **Raise Hand** | Number of times a student raised their hand |
| **Poll Responses** | Whether and how students responded to polls |

## Timeline View

The timeline view shows engagement patterns across the session:

* See when students were most and least active
* Identify drops in engagement that may correlate with specific content
* Use this data to adjust pacing and activity frequency

## Poll and Quiz Results

Review poll and quiz results within the dashboard:

* See per-student responses
* Identify common misconceptions from wrong answers
* Export results for grading or follow-up

## Using Analytics to Improve Teaching

<Tip>
  * Check the dashboard **during** the session to spot disengaged students early
  * Review the dashboard **after** the session to identify patterns
  * Compare engagement across sessions to see what activities work best
  * Use the data to plan more engaging activities for next time
</Tip>

For post-session analytics and LMS integration, see [Review Your Class](/docs/reflect/review-your-class).


# Keeping Time
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/manage/keeping-time

Use the timer and stopwatch to pace activities and keep your session on track.

BigBlueButton includes built-in timer and stopwatch tools to help you manage time during your session.

## Timer (Countdown)

Use the countdown timer to set time limits for activities:

* Set a duration (e.g., 5 minutes for a breakout room discussion)
* The timer is visible to all participants
* An alert sounds when time is up
* Great for timed activities, quizzes, or transition warnings

## Stopwatch (Count Up)

Use the stopwatch to track elapsed time:

* Start the stopwatch at the beginning of an activity
* Visible to all participants
* Useful for open-ended activities where you want to monitor how long things take

## Common Uses

| Scenario | Tool | Suggested Time |
| - | - | - |
| Breakout room discussion | Timer | 5–10 minutes |
| Quick poll response time | Timer | 1–2 minutes |
| Presentation practice | Stopwatch | Track duration |
| Quiz or assessment | Timer | Set per question or total |
| Transition warning | Timer | 1–2 minutes before next activity |

See [Timer and Stopwatch](/docs/help/releases/timer-and-stopwatch) for setup instructions and details.


# Managing Students
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/manage/managing-students

Mute, lock, message, and manage participants during a live session.

As a moderator, you have tools to manage participant behavior and maintain a productive learning environment.

## User Management Panel

Access user management by clicking on any user in the user list. From there you can:

* **Mute/unmute** individual participants
* **Mute all** — silence all participants at once
* **Remove** a user from the session
* **Promote** a viewer to moderator or **demote** a moderator to viewer

See [Manage Users](/docs/help/moderator-guide/manage-users) for the complete guide.

## Lock Settings

Restrict specific capabilities for all viewers in the session:

* Disable microphone, webcam, public chat, private chat, or shared notes
* Lock settings apply to all viewers (moderators are not affected)
* Settings can be changed during the session

See [Lock Viewers' Abilities](/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes).

## Private Chat Controls

Control whether viewers can send private messages to each other:

* Lock or unlock private chat for individual users or all viewers
* Useful for preventing off-topic side conversations during instruction

See [Lock/Unlock Private Chat](/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes).

## Raise Hand Queue

Students can raise their hand to signal a question or comment:

* Raised hands appear as indicators next to the user's name
* Address raised hands in order to keep discussion fair
* Students lower their hand after being acknowledged, or moderators can lower it for them

See [Raise Hand](/docs/help/user-guide/raise-hand).

## Clearing the Chat

If the public chat becomes cluttered or off-topic:

* Moderators can clear the entire public chat history
* This removes all messages for all participants
* Use sparingly — consider a verbal reminder first

See [Clear the Public Chat](/docs/help/moderator-guide/clear-the-public-chat).

## Tips for Classroom Management

<Tip>
  * Start sessions with **microphones muted** and unlock as needed
  * Use **lock settings** proactively for large classes (50+ students)
  * Keep an eye on the **raise hand queue** — a forgotten raised hand frustrates students
  * Use **private chat** to address individual behavior without disrupting the class
</Tip>


# Roles & Environment
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/manage/roles-environment

Understand moderator, presenter, and viewer roles — and how to assign them during a session.

BigBlueButton uses three roles to manage permissions and responsibilities during a session.

## Role Overview

| Role | Can present? | Can manage users? | Can record? | Assigned how? |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| **Moderator** | Yes (when presenter) | Yes | Yes | Set when joining or by room config |
| **Presenter** | Yes | No | No | Assigned by moderator |
| **Viewer** | No | No | No | Default role for participants |

<Note>A session can have **multiple moderators** but only **one active presenter** at a time.</Note>

## Assign the Presenter Role

Transfer the presenter role to allow another user to control slides, share their screen, or run polls:

* Click on a user in the user list and select **Make presenter**
* The current presenter automatically becomes a viewer
* You can take back the presenter role at any time

See [Give/Take Presenter Role](/docs/help/moderator-guide/givetake-presenter-role) for details.

## Promote and Demote Users

Moderators can change a user's role during the session:

* **Promote a viewer to moderator** — gives them user management capabilities
* **Demote a moderator to viewer** — removes management permissions
* **Remove a user** — eject them from the session entirely

See [Promote/Demote/Remove a User](/docs/help/moderator-guide/promotedemoteremove-a-user) for step-by-step instructions.

## Co-Teaching Setup

For sessions with multiple instructors:

1. Have both instructors join as **moderators**
2. Assign the **presenter** role to whoever is actively teaching
3. Swap the presenter role as needed throughout the session
4. Both moderators retain the ability to manage users, breakout rooms, and recording regardless of who is presenting

<Tip>Coordinate with your co-educator beforehand about when you'll swap presenter roles to keep transitions smooth.</Tip>


# Collaborative Spaces
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/relationships/collaborative-spaces

Use the multi-user whiteboard and shared notes for real-time collaboration.

BigBlueButton provides two primary tools for real-time collaboration: the multi-user whiteboard and shared notes.

## Multi-User Whiteboard

Enable the multi-user whiteboard to let all participants draw, annotate, and contribute visually:

* All participants can draw simultaneously on the presentation slides
* Use for brainstorming, diagramming, or collaborative problem-solving
* The presenter can clear annotations or disable multi-user mode at any time

See [Use the Multi-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard).

### Per-User Whiteboard

For individual work that the moderator can review:

* Each student gets their own whiteboard layer
* Moderators can view each student's work individually
* Great for assessments or individual exercises

See [Per-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-do-i-use-the-per-user-whiteboard).

## Shared Notes

Shared notes provide a collaborative text editor that all participants can edit simultaneously:

* Real-time collaborative editing (like Google Docs)
* Use for meeting minutes, group brainstorming, or collecting responses
* Content can be exported or moved to the whiteboard

See [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes).

### Move Shared Notes to the Whiteboard

Transfer shared notes content to the whiteboard for group review and annotation:

See [Move Shared Notes to the Whiteboard](/docs/help/presenter-guide/shared-notes-presenter#exporting-notes-to-the-whiteboard).

## Choosing the Right Tool

| Activity | Best Tool | Why |
| - | - | - |
| Visual brainstorming | Multi-user whiteboard | Drawing and spatial layout |
| Collecting text responses | Shared notes | Easy typing and editing |
| Group problem solving | Multi-user whiteboard | Diagrams and annotations |
| Meeting minutes | Shared notes | Structured text |
| Individual assessment | Per-user whiteboard | Private work visible to moderator |


# Create Connection
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/relationships/create-connection

Use chat, reactions, and status indicators to build rapport and encourage participation.

Building connections in a virtual classroom requires intentional use of communication tools. BigBlueButton offers several ways for participants to interact beyond audio.

## Public and Private Chat

Chat is often the most active communication channel in a virtual classroom:

* **Public chat** — visible to everyone; great for questions, responses, and shared links
* **Private chat** — one-on-one messages between any two participants; useful for individual support or quiet side conversations

See [Send Public and Private Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages).

<Tip>
  Encourage students to use public chat for questions during a lecture. This lets quieter students participate without unmuting.
</Tip>

## Reactions

The reactions bar lets participants send quick, visual feedback without interrupting the speaker:

* Emoji reactions appear briefly next to the user's name
* Use reactions for informal polls ("thumbs up if you understand")
* Reactions lower the barrier to participation

See [Reactions Bar](/docs/help/user-guide/reactions-bar).

## Status Indicators

Participants can set a status emoji to communicate their state:

* **Raise hand** — signal a question or comment
* **Away** — indicate you've stepped away
* Custom **status emojis** for mood or feedback

See [Set a Status](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#away-status).

## Tips for Building Connection

* **Start with an icebreaker** — use public chat or reactions for a quick warm-up
* **Acknowledge participation** — call out good questions and reactions by name
* **Use private chat for support** — check in with quiet students individually
* **Model the behavior** — use reactions and chat yourself to normalize participation


# Set the Mood
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/relationships/set-the-mood

Use dark mode and reactions to create a comfortable learning environment.

Small environmental adjustments can make a virtual classroom feel more welcoming and reduce fatigue.

## Dark Mode

Switch to dark mode to reduce eye strain, especially for evening sessions or long classes:

* Reduces screen brightness and glare
* Can help reduce video call fatigue
* Each participant can enable it individually

See [Enable Dark Mode](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#dark-mode).

## Reactions for Comfort

Use the reactions bar to create a relaxed, participatory atmosphere:

* Encourage students to use reactions freely during warm-ups
* Reactions provide a low-pressure way to participate
* Seeing emoji reactions from peers makes the session feel more human and connected

See [Reactions Bar](/docs/help/user-guide/reactions-bar).

## Webcam Backgrounds

Let participants customize their appearance to feel more comfortable on camera:

* Blur backgrounds for privacy
* Use virtual backgrounds to reduce distractions

See [Change Webcam Background](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam).


# Breakout Rooms
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/teach/breakout-rooms

Create, manage, and monitor breakout rooms for small-group activities.

Breakout rooms split participants into smaller groups for focused discussion, collaboration, or activities.

## Full Workflow

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create breakout rooms">
    As a moderator, open the breakout room panel and configure:

    * **Number of rooms** — how many groups to create
    * **Duration** — time limit for the breakout session
    * **Assignment** — randomly assign, let users choose, or manually assign participants

    See [Create and Manage Breakout Rooms](/docs/help/moderator-guide/create-and-manage-breakout-rooms).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Assign participants">
    Drag and drop users between rooms or use automatic assignment. You can also allow students to choose their own room.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Start breakout rooms">
    Click **Start** to open all rooms simultaneously. Participants receive a notification to join their assigned room.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Monitor progress">
    As a moderator, you can:

    * See which users are in which rooms
    * Join any breakout room to observe or participate
    * Send a message to all rooms
    * Extend the time if needed
  </Step>

  <Step title="Bring everyone back">
    When time expires (or you end breakout rooms early), all participants return to the main room automatically.
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Joining Breakout Rooms (Participant View)

Participants receive a notification when breakout rooms open and can join their assigned room. See [Join Breakout Rooms](/docs/help/user-guide/join-breakout-rooms).

## Inviting Moderators to Breakout Rooms

You can invite other moderators to specific breakout rooms for co-facilitation. See [Invite Moderators to Breakout Rooms](/docs/help/moderator-guide/create-and-manage-breakout-rooms).

## 1:1 Breakout Rooms

Create a breakout room with just two people for:

* Individual student conferences
* Private conversations
* One-on-one tutoring or feedback

Simply create a breakout room and assign only two participants (or join the room yourself with one student).

## Exporting Breakout Room Artifacts

Capture work from breakout rooms before they close:

* **Export shared notes** — save collaborative text from each room. See [Export Breakout Room Shared Notes](/docs/help/moderator-guide/access-breakout-room-whiteboards-or-shared-notes).
* **Export whiteboard annotations** — save drawings and annotations from each room. See [Export Breakout Room Whiteboard Annotations](/docs/help/moderator-guide/access-breakout-room-whiteboards-or-shared-notes).

<Warning>Breakout room content (shared notes, whiteboard annotations) is lost when rooms close unless you export it first.</Warning>

## Tips

* **Set clear instructions** before opening breakout rooms — students should know their task
* **Use the timer** to keep groups on track
* **Visit rooms briefly** to check progress without disrupting
* **Allow 1–2 minutes** for transition time when planning your session timeline


# Deliver Content
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/teach/deliver-content

Present slides, share your screen, play external videos, and use camera as content during a live session.

BigBlueButton gives you multiple ways to deliver content to your class.

## Presentation Controls

Navigate and annotate your uploaded slides during the session:

* Use arrow keys or toolbar buttons to navigate slides
* Zoom in on specific areas
* Use built-in annotation tools (pen, shapes, text) to highlight content
* Pointer tool to guide attention

See [Use the Presentation Controls](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-the-presentation-controls).

## Screen Sharing

Share your entire screen or a specific application window:

* Share your desktop for live software demos
* Share a specific window to keep other content private
* Works with all major browsers (Chrome recommended)

See [Share My Screen](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-my-screen).

<Tip>Close unnecessary tabs and notifications before sharing your screen to avoid distractions.</Tip>

## External Video

Share a YouTube video or other external media link with synchronized playback:

* Paste a video URL and it plays for all participants simultaneously
* Playback controls are synchronized — when you pause, everyone pauses
* Great for supplementary video content or guest lectures

See [Share an External Audio/Video Link](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link).

## Camera as Content

Use your webcam as a document camera or content source:

* Position your webcam to show physical documents, whiteboards, or objects
* The camera feed appears in the presentation area (not the webcam area)
* Useful for showing handwritten work, lab equipment, or physical materials

See [Camera as Content](/docs/help/releases/camera-as-content).

## Downloading the Original Presentation

Participants can download the original uploaded presentation file if the presenter enables this option:

See [Download of Original Presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download).

## Choosing the Right Delivery Method

| Content Type | Best Method |
| - | - |
| Prepared slides (PDF/PPT) | Presentation upload |
| Live software demo | Screen sharing |
| Supplementary video clip | External video |
| Physical objects or handwriting | Camera as content |
| Live coding | Screen sharing |


# Facilitate Discussion
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/educate/teach/facilitate-discussion

Manage microphones, monitor chat, and handle the raise hand queue for productive class discussions.

Facilitating discussion in a virtual classroom requires active management of multiple communication channels.

## Microphone Management

Control who speaks and when:

* **Mute all** — silence all participants before starting a discussion
* **Unmute selectively** — call on students by unmuting them or asking them to unmute
* **Lock microphones** — prevent viewers from unmuting themselves (useful for large classes)

See [Manage Users](/docs/help/moderator-guide/manage-users) for microphone controls.

## Raise Hand Queue

The raise hand feature creates an orderly discussion flow:

* Students click **Raise Hand** to signal they want to speak
* Raised hands appear in the user list in the order they were raised
* Call on students in order to keep things fair
* Ask students to lower their hand after speaking

See [Raise Hand](/docs/help/user-guide/raise-hand).

<Tip>In large classes, announce "raise your hand if you want to respond" before opening discussion. This prevents everyone from unmuting at once.</Tip>

## Chat Monitoring

Use public chat as a parallel discussion channel:

* Monitor for questions while presenting
* Encourage students to post questions in chat during lectures
* Pause periodically to address chat questions verbally
* Use chat for quick informal polls ("type yes/no in chat")

See [Send Public and Private Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages).

### Clearing Chat

If the chat becomes too noisy or off-topic, moderators can clear the public chat:

See [Clear the Public Chat](/docs/help/moderator-guide/clear-the-public-chat).

## Discussion Strategies

| Strategy | How | Best For |
| - | - | - |
| Think-Pair-Share | Breakout rooms → return to main room | Deep discussion |
| Rapid Response | Type answers in public chat | Quick checks |
| Moderated Q\&A | Raise hand → unmute → speak | Formal discussions |
| Backchannel | Chat alongside lecture | Continuous engagement |
| Anonymous Input | Polls or shared notes | Sensitive topics |


# Ending a Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/ending-a-conference

End an active Schoology Conference to conclude the session and move it to Completed conferences.

## Ending a Conference

To end an active Conference in progress, select the End Conference button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Endconference" />
</Frame>

This will conclude the conference and move it to Completed conferences.


# Accessibility
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/accessibility

BigBlueButton includes features for visual, hearing, motor, and privacy accessibility needs.

BigBlueButton is designed to be accessible to all users. This page consolidates accessibility features across the platform.

## Hearing Accessibility

### Closed Captions

Moderators can enable live closed captions for participants who are deaf or hard of hearing.

* **Speaker setup**: Each user can caption their own audio when joining the session.
* **Viewer experience**: Once anyone has captions enabled, participants can toggle captions on or off with the **CC** button.

See [Use Closed Captions](/docs/help/faq/use-closed-captions) for details.

### Browser-Based Speech Recognition

BigBlueButton supports your browser's built-in speech recognition for automatic captioning:

* **Chrome's built-in captioning**: Use Chrome's Live Caption feature for real-time transcription. See [Using Chrome's Built-in Closed Captioning](/docs/help/faq/using-chromes-built-in-closed-captioning).
* **Browser speech recognition**: Enable your browser's speech-to-text for captions. See [Browser Built-in Speech Recognition](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-my-browsers-built-in-speech-recognition).

### Chat as an Alternative Channel

The public and private chat provides a text-based communication channel alongside audio. See [Send Public and Private Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages).

## Visual Accessibility

### Dark Mode

Reduce eye strain and improve readability in low-light environments with dark mode. See [Enable Dark Mode](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#dark-mode).

### Webcam Controls

* **Adjust brightness**: Modify your webcam brightness for better visibility. See [Adjust Webcam Brightness](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam#how-do-i-adjust-my-webcams-brightness).
* **Make webcams larger**: Increase webcam size for better visibility. See [Make Webcams Larger](/docs/help/user-guide/make-webcams-larger).

## Motor and Navigation Accessibility

### Keyboard Shortcuts

Navigate BigBlueButton without a mouse using keyboard shortcuts. See [Keyboard Shortcuts](/docs/reference/keyboard-shortcuts) for a complete list.

## Privacy

### Webcam Background

Replace or blur your webcam background for privacy. See [Change Webcam Background](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam).

### Disable Self-View

Hide your own webcam feed to reduce self-consciousness. See [Disable Self-View of Webcam](/docs/help/releases/disable-self-view-of-webcam).


# Getting Started
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/educator-guide

How to get the most out of BigBlueButton for your online classes.

<Note>
  If you are a student, go to the [Student Guide](/docs/getting-started/student-guide).
</Note>

As a teacher, the fist -- and best step -- to get started is watch [watch the first two tutorial videos](/docs/help/videos).

The first video covers the basics of BigBlueButton from a learner's perspecitve: how to share audio and video, respond to chat and polls, use the whiteboard, etc.

The second video builds on the first and covers demonstrates how to use BigBlueButton's capabilties to teach students.

## The Big Picture

To help you get started improving learning outcomes in your virtual classess, we've organized this documentation according to best practices broken down into three stages:

1. **Prepare** (before the class),
2. **Teach** (using BigBlueButton), and
3. **Reflect** (review class and plan for next).

The following diagram breaks down the key activities at each stage.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Three-step teaching process: Prepare, Teach," />
</Frame>

Use the navigation at the top of this documentation, or the user interface below to quickly jump to specific sections.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="1-Prepare">
    <CardGroup>
      <Card title="Set Up Your Room" icon="door-open" href="/docs/prepare/prepare-for-your-class">
        Create rooms, configure settings, and invite participants.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Create Engaging Content" icon="file-powerpoint" href="/docs/prepare/create-engaging-content">
        Upload presentations and set up Smart Slides for polling.
      </Card>
    </CardGroup>
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="2-Teach">
    <CardGroup>
      <Card title="Manage Your Class" icon="users-gear" href="/docs/educate/manage/roles-environment">
        Assign roles, manage students, and keep time.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Build Relationships" icon="people-group" href="/docs/educate/relationships/create-connection">
        Build trust with and between students.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Teach" icon="presentation-screen" href="/docs/educate/teach/deliver-content">
        Present slides, share your screen, and play external videos.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Engage with Active Learning" icon="square-poll-vertical" href="/docs/educate/active-learning/check-understanding">
        Launch polls, run quizzes, and check understanding in real time.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Assess & Give Feedback" icon="magnifying-glass-chart" href="/docs/educate/assess/learning-analytics-dashboard">
        Use analytics to ensure every student is learning.
      </Card>
    </CardGroup>
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="3-Reflect">
    <CardGroup>
      <Card title="Recordings" icon="circle-play" href="/docs/reflect/recordings">
        Record sessions and manage recording formats and access.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Review Your Class" icon="magnifying-glass-chart" href="/docs/reflect/review-your-class">
        Analyze engagement data and improve your next session.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Learning Analytics" icon="chart-line" href="/docs/educate/assess/learning-analytics-dashboard">
        Monitor real-time engagement and activity scores.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Troubleshooting" icon="wrench" href="/docs/reference/troubleshooting">
        Resolve common audio, video, and connectivity issues.
      </Card>
    </CardGroup>
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

Looking for a specific feature?  You can use the search at the top, as a question of the docs with AI, and check out the [Educator Quick Reference](/docs/getting-started/educator-quick-reference) links to help docs for the most common actions.


# Quick Reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/educator-quick-reference

Find the right BigBlueButton tool for what you want to do.

Use this page to quickly find the feature you need. Also use the **Search** at the top of this page as well.

## Communication

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Talk to participants | Microphone / Audio | [Join the Audio](/docs/help/user-guide/join-the-audio) |
| Send a message to everyone | Public Chat | [Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages) |
| Send a private message | Private Chat | [Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages) |
| Signal a question | Raise Hand | [Raise Hand](/docs/help/user-guide/raise-hand) |
| React quickly | Reactions Bar | [Reactions](/docs/help/user-guide/reactions-bar) |
| Set my status | Status Indicator | [Set a Status](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#away-status) |

## Presenting Content

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Show slides or a PDF | Presentation Upload | [Upload a Presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download) |
| Show my desktop | Screen Share | [Share My Screen](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-my-screen) |
| Play a YouTube video | External Video | [Share External Video](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link) |
| Annotate on slides | Whiteboard Tools | [Presentation Controls](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-the-presentation-controls) |
| Use my camera as a document cam | Camera as Content | [Camera as Content](/docs/help/releases/camera-as-content) |

## Engaging Students

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Run a quick poll | Polling | [Use Polling/Quizzing](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing) |
| Create a one-click poll from slides | Smart Slides | [Smart Slides](/docs/help/moderator-guide/using-smart-slides-for-one-click-polling) |
| Split into small groups | Breakout Rooms | [Create Breakout Rooms](/docs/help/moderator-guide/create-and-manage-breakout-rooms) |
| Collaborate on text | Shared Notes | [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes) |
| Draw together | Multi-User Whiteboard | [Multi-User Whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard) |
| Set a countdown | Timer / Stopwatch | [Timer and Stopwatch](/docs/help/releases/timer-and-stopwatch) |

## Managing the Session

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Assign roles | User Management | [Roles & Presenter](/docs/help/moderator-guide/givetake-presenter-role) |
| Mute or remove someone | User Management | [Manage Users](/docs/help/moderator-guide/manage-users) |
| Lock participant features | Lock Settings | [Lock Viewers](/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes) |
| Control who can join | Guest Policy | [Guest Policy](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-to-configure-guest-policy) |
| Record the session | Recording | [Start/Stop Recording](/docs/help/moderator-guide/start-and-stop-recording) |
| View engagement data | Learning Analytics | [Analytics Dashboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard) |

## Customizing Your Experience

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Switch to dark mode | Display Settings | [Dark Mode](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#dark-mode) |
| Make webcams bigger | Webcam Controls | [Make Webcams Larger](/docs/help/user-guide/make-webcams-larger) |
| Change my background | Virtual Background | [Webcam Background](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam) |
| Use keyboard shortcuts | Keyboard | [Keyboard Shortcuts](/docs/reference/keyboard-shortcuts) |
| Change my settings | Options Menu | [Access the Options Menu](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu) |


# Why BigBlueButton?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/pedagogy

Because the classroom is not a boardroom.

## Built for Teaching

Unlike general-purpose video conferencing tools, every feature in BigBlueButton is designed around how people actually teach and learn, commingly referred to as the science of Pedagogy.

Our design draws on the following Pedagogical foundations:

* **Vygotsky's Zone of Proximal Development** — We learn best when attempting something that is not too easy or too hard.  Like a good gym workout, the best results are when we stretch and get 'into the zone' of optimal difficulity.
* **Social Constructivism** — We learn best when learning with others.
* **Bloom's Taxonomy** — We learn in stages, and each stage builds upon the previous. Building upon remembering and understanding, the real learning occurs when you are actively solving probems and evaluating the outcomes.  This is learn by doing.
* **Active Learning** — Passive learning does not work.  Active learning means your experiencing some effort, perhaps a momentry sense of frustration as you struggle, and that struggle is how your brain rewires and learns.  No struggle, no learning.

## Pedagogical Overview

<iframe title="The Pedagogical Foundations of BigBlueButton" />


# Getting Started
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/student-guide

Everything you need to participate confidently in a BigBlueButton class.

**Watch this video first.** It covers how to share audio and video, respond to chat and polls, use the whiteboard, and get the most out of your class.

<iframe title="BigBlueButton Student Overview" />

## Quick reference

Looking for a specific tool? The [Student Quick Reference](/docs/getting-started/student-quick-reference) links to help docs for everything covered in the video.

## Tips for Success

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Test your audio early" icon="microphone">
    Run the audio check before class so you don't miss the first few minutes troubleshooting.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Use a headset" icon="headphones">
    A headset reduces echo and helps everyone hear you clearly.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Raise your hand" icon="hand">
    It's the easiest way to get your teacher's attention without interrupting.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Check accessibility options" icon="universal-access">
    Closed captions, keyboard navigation, and other features are built in. See [Accessibility](/docs/getting-started/accessibility).
  </Card>
</CardGroup>


# Quick Reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/student-quick-reference

Quickly find help docs for the tools and features covered in the student overview.

Use this table to quickly find help docs related to concepts covered in the [Student Guide](/docs/getting-started/student-guide) video.

## Joining and Communicating

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Hear and speak in class | Microphone / Audio | [Join the Audio](/docs/help/user-guide/join-the-audio) |
| Turn on my camera | Webcam | [Share a Webcam](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam) |
| Send a message to everyone | Public Chat | [Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages) |
| Send a private message | Private Chat | [Chat Messages](/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages) |
| View captions of what's spoken | Closed Captions | [Use Closed Captions](/docs/help/faq/use-closed-captions) |

## Participating

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Ask a question | Raise Hand | [Raise Hand](/docs/help/user-guide/raise-hand) |
| React quickly | Reactions Bar | [Reactions](/docs/help/user-guide/reactions-bar) |
| Answer a poll | Poll Response | [Respond to Polls](/docs/help/user-guide/respond-to-polls) |
| Take collaborative notes | Shared Notes | [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes) |
| Step away briefly | Status Indicator | [Using Away/Available](/docs/help/user-guide/using-away-available) |
| Join a small-group room | Breakout Rooms | [Join Breakout Rooms](/docs/help/user-guide/join-breakout-rooms) |

## Customizing Your View

| I want to... | Use this tool | Learn more |
| - | - | - |
| Make webcams larger | Webcam Controls | [Make Webcams Larger](/docs/help/user-guide/make-webcams-larger) |
| Move webcams around | Webcam Drag | [Move Webcams](/docs/help/user-guide/move-webcams-in-a-live-session) |
| Hide my own webcam preview | Self-View Toggle | [Disable Self-View](/docs/help/releases/disable-self-view-of-webcam) |
| Focus on the presentation | Close Presentation | [Close the Presentation](/docs/help/user-guide/close-the-presentationenlarge-the-webcams) |
| Switch to dark mode | Display Settings | [Dark Mode](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu#dark-mode) |
| Use keyboard shortcuts | Keyboard | [Keyboard Shortcuts](/docs/reference/keyboard-shortcuts) |


# Welcome
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/getting-started/welcome

Find the resources you need to get started with BigBlueButton.

<div>
  # Welcome

  <div>
    Welcome to guides, references, and resources for BigBlueButton — the complete virtual classroom platform.
  </div>

  <div>
    <CardGroup>
      <Card title="Tutorial Videos" href="/docs/help/videos">
        Watch step-by-step videos to learn BigBlueButton.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Educator Guide" href="/docs/getting-started/educator-guide">
        Read in-depth guides for preparing, teaching, and reflecting.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Quick Reference" href="/docs/getting-started/educator-quick-reference">
        Look up keyboard shortcuts, FAQs, and quick references.
      </Card>

      <Card title="Student Guide" href="/docs/getting-started/student-guide">
        A quick dive into everything you need to use BigBlueButton.
      </Card>
    </CardGroup>
  </div>
</div>


# About Us
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/about-us

Who are we and why did we build BigBlueButton?

Hi there.  We created BigBlueButton in 2007 with one mission: to build the world's most effective platform for online virtual classes.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

Why?  We believe every student in the world deserves access to a high quality online learning experience.  And we believe every educator deserves the best platform to deliver it.

That platform is *not* a business-focused video conferencing system.  You can see more about the differences between BigBlueButton and a video conferencing system at [bigbluebutton.com](https://bigbluebutton.com).

In building the platform, we built a company to offer software as a service hosting for BigBlueButton, which we provide in two flavours:

* [**BigBlueButton Essentials**](/docs/help/essentials/overview) -- The core open source with a few value added capabilities.
* [**BigBlueButton Enhanced**](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features) -- An enhanced hosted version of BigBlueButton with many capabilities to increase learning outcomes.

To follow how we are building on BigBlueButton, check out our [Latest Updates](/docs/hosting-updates) or [Contact Us](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact-us/).


# Overview
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/essentials/overview

BigBlueButton Essentials is our core version of BigBlueButton

As the creators of BigBlueButton, in addition to managing the open source releases that are freely available to anyone in the world, we've also provide hosting for two flavors of BigBlueButton.

* **BigBlueButton Essentials**: the essential capabilities to use BigBlueButton with limitations (see table below)
* **BigBlueButton Enhanced**: Our Enhanced version many value added capabilities to ensure you have the highest learning outcomes.

If you are a sucstomer of Instructure using Canvas, or Powerschool using Schoology, you'll find BigBlueButton Essentials embedded into your product.

You'll also find BigBlueButton Enhanced embedded into Canvas, Schoology, and Moodle Cloud.

## Canvas by Instructure

Every Instructure customer has access to a free, built-in version of BigBlueButton Essentials.  BigBlueButton Essentials is limited to 5 concurrent sessions, recordings expire after 7 days, and recordings are not downloadable.

The table below summarizes the differences between essentials and enhanced.

| Feature | Essentials | Enhanced |
| - | - | - |
| Max simultaneous virtual classes | 5 | Purchased |
| Maximum number of users | 100 | 300 |
| Students can see each other's webcams in a session | - | Yes |
| How long do recordings last? | 7 days | Permanent |
| Recordings are downloadable as video files | - | Yes |
| Recording links are sharable | - | Configurable |
| Ability for teacher to invite a guest into a session | - | Yes |
| Automatically share recordings with Canvas Studio | - | Yes |
| Analytics from session available later in recordings | - | Yes |
| Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (ELAD) available, as upgrade, for insight across all your virtual classes. | - | Yes |
| Custom defaults (\*) | - | Yes |

(\*) See [Account customization](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features#account-customization) for the full list of configurable defaults.

For a detailed walk-through of each Enhanced feature, see the [Overview of BigBlueButton Enhanced](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features).

## Schoology by PowerSchool

Every Schoology customer has access to a free, built-in version of BigBlueButton Essentials.  BigBlueButton Essentials is limited to recordings expire after 7 days and recordings are not downloadable.

The table below summarizes the differences between essentials and enhanced.

| Feature | Essentials | Enhanced |
| - | - | - |
| Students can see each other's webcams in a session | - | Yes |
| How long do recordings last? | 7 days | Permanent |
| Recordings are downloadable as video files | - | Yes |
| Recording links are sharable | - | Configurable |
| Ability for teacher to invite a guest into a session | - | Yes |
| Analytics from session available later in recordings | - | Yes |
| Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (ELAD) available, as upgrade, for insight across all your virtual classes. | - | Yes |
| Custom defaults (\*) | - | Yes |

(\*) See [Account customization](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features#account-customization) for the full list of configurable defaults.

For a detailed walk-through of each Enhanced feature, see the [Overview of BigBlueButton Enhanced](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features).


# Antivirus software causes issues while connecting to a BigBlueButton Session
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/antivirus-software-causes-issues-while-connecting-to-a-bigbluebutton-session

Resolve antivirus connection errors by temporarily disabling the Web Shield in Avast or similar antivirus software.

Users running Avast or similar antivirus software may see a connection error when joining a BigBlueButton session. Temporarily disabling the antivirus **Web Shield** restores access.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Antivirus connection error shown when joining a BigBlueButton session" />
</Frame>

## Disable the Web Shield

To open the antivirus dashboard, launch your antivirus software.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Avast antivirus dashboard" />
</Frame>

To open the protection settings, select **Protection** **\[1]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Protection icon highlighted in the Avast sidebar" />
</Frame>

To view the active shields, select **Core Shields** **\[1]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Core Shields option inside the Protection menu" />
</Frame>

To disable web filtering, select **Web Shield** **\[1]** and switch it off.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Web Shield toggle inside Core Shields" />
</Frame>

To choose the duration, select the option that matches how long the session will run.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Duration options for disabling Web Shield" />
</Frame>

The **Web Shield** icon turns from green to red, confirming the shield is off.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Web Shield icon shown in red after being disabled" />
</Frame>

<Tip>
  After the **Web Shield** is disabled, rejoin the BigBlueButton session. Re-enable the shield once the session ends to restore full protection.
</Tip>


# Can I play a video using screen sharing?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/can-i-play-a-video-using-screen-sharing

Share videos in BigBlueButton using the built-in external video option or screen sharing.

The best way to share a YouTube, Vimeo, or Canvas Studio video is through the built-in [Share external video](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link) option. This instructs each user's browser to load the video directly.

However, if you want to use [Screen sharing](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-my-screen) to share a video (start screen sharing and then play the video on your screen outside of BigBlueButton), we recommend using the Chrome browser.

When using Chrome, enable **Also share system audio** so Chrome shares audio with users. Once enabled, audio from the screen plays for everyone in the session.

<img alt="Image" />

<Warning>
  Share external video is the most efficient, but the video won't appear in the recording as the user's browser directly plays the video (it does not go through the server).
</Warning>


# Can users connect to BigBlueButton from within China?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/can-users-connect-to-bigbluebutton-from-within-china

We are committed to making BigBlueButton accessible globally. BigBlueButton is a web-based application that runs within your browser (no software to...

We are committed to making BigBlueButton accessible globally.

BigBlueButton is a web-based application that runs within your browser (no software to install).  When the BigBlueButton client loads within your browser, it connects and joins you to a virtual class running on the remote BigBlueButton server.

Blindside Networks hosts BigBlueButton servers in Europe, North America, Asia Pacific, and Canada.

However, for users within China, they must connect to outside servers through the Great Chinese Firewall (GCF).  As such, connections to these servers -- including BigBlueButton servers -- are subject to restrictions of the GCF.  These restrictions may include no constraints (full access), throttling of the connection, or even blocking access to a server.

For such users, if you are having difficulty accessing or maintaining a connection to BigBlueButton, given China has three main telecom providers, we recommend switching between the providers.  You may also try using a subscription-based Virtual Private Network (VPN) client where such clients will create an encrypted network through the GCF for access to outside servers.


# Common YouTube external video playback error
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/common-youtube-external-video-playback-error

If you see this error when trying to share an external YouTube video and you are using Chrome then you can resolve this error by clearing YouTube's...

If you see this error when trying to share an external YouTube video and you are using Chrome

<img alt="BBB_error1.png" />

then you can resolve this error by clearing YouTube's cookies from your browser.

To clear the cookies, go to the Chrome menu (upper right-hand corner) and choose  **More Tools -> Developer Tools**, then click the **Application** tab.  You'll see an entry on the left-hand side for Cookies.

<img alt="applicationtab.png" />

Click to expand '**Cookies**', and then on the [https://www.youtube.com](https://www.youtube.com) entry, right click and choose '**Clear**'.

After that, you will be able to share a YouTube video as normal again.


# Connection Status
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/connection-status

Use Connection Status to track the stability of your connection

The connection status icon is in the upper right-hand of the client.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Connection status icon with tooltip" />
</Frame>

The icon changes based on the strength of your connection.

* Green - a good connection
* Purple - weakened connection -- you may experience some delays in audio and video
* Red - no connection

Clicking on the icon will provide more details regarding your connection.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 45 21 PM" />
</Frame>

Under the first tab of the connection status page, you will see details regarding your audio upload/download rates, video upload/download rates, Jitter, Lost packets, and if you are using a TURN server for your connection.

On a direct connection, you'll see **Using TURN: No**.  If you see 'Yes', it means the client needs to connect to an intermediate server, which also may introduce delays in audio and video.  If you see 'Yes', switch to another network if possible.

Under the first tab of the connection status page, you will see details regarding your audio upload/download rates, video upload/download rates, Jitter, Lost packets, and if you are using a TURN server for your connection.

You can copy the connection status stats by using the Copy Stats button in the bottom right-hand corner.

This will copy the details of the meeting and user connection information into a text format that is useful for troubeshooting.  Below is an example of the copied stats.

```json theme={null}
{
  "ready": true,
  "user": {
    "time": "2026-05-23T19:50:26.098Z",
    "meeting_name": "Demo Meeting",
    "meeting_id": "106453fe2abf5ee2268ad6b79d355bb873293ec8-1779565806159",
    "user_id": "w_eikz6atyjr4u",
    "extern_user_id": "gl-demo-1a1d39b65e9e"
  },
  "audio": {
    "audioCurrentUploadRate": 94,
    "audioCurrentDownloadRate": 0,
    "jitter": 1,
    "packetsLost": 0,
    "transportStats": {
      "isUsingTurn": false
    }
  },
  "video": {
    "videoCurrentUploadRate": 0,
    "videoCurrentDownloadRate": 0
  }
}
```

All users will see the **My Logs** tab.  This shows the last state of your connection (green, purple, and red).

<Frame>
  <img alt="My Logs tab showing connection issues" />
</Frame>

Moderators will additionaly see **Session Logs** tab, which shows the last connection status for all users.  If a particular user in the session indicates they are having troubles with audio or video, for example, chaeck the **Session Logs** tab to see if their client has reported issues with the connection.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Session Logs tab showing connection issues for all users in the session" />
</Frame>

### Adjusting Your Connection Settings

When you lose connection to your session, the connection status will turn red, and you can change your **Data Saving** options by selecting [**Adjusting Your Settings**](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu).

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 47 58 PM" />
</Frame>


# Does the PIN number for a conference change?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/does-the-pin-number-for-a-conference-change

The PIN number may change between launches of the same conference. When you join a BigBlueButton session, you will see a dial-in number and PIN...

The PIN number may change between launches of the same conference.

When you join a BigBlueButton session, you will see a dial-in number and PIN number (such as 155 256 572 as shown below).

<img alt="BigBlueButton dial-in panel showing the phone number and PIN 155 256 572" />

BigBlueButton will attempt to keep this PIN number consistent between launches of the same conference, but it is not guaranteed to be consistent.

In other words, if you copy this information from a previous session and send it out to others before starting the same session again, the PIN number may change.

If you have users that want to join the meeting by phone, the safest approach is to start the conference a few minutes earlier and then e-mail them the current dial-in number and PIN number.


# How do I capture the browser's console?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/how-do-i-capture-the-browsers-console

If you encounter an error message in the client, or the client's screen suddenly goes blue, then the browser's console will contain additional...

If you encounter an error message in the client, or the client's screen suddenly goes blue, then the browser's console will contain additional information on the error message.

[Video on Chrome](https://www.screencast.com/t/rTdNSstxxz).

[Video on Firefox](https://www.screencast.com/t/I5MwunHS32DH).

To access the console in Chrome, under the menu choose **More tools -> Developer tools**

<img alt="mceclip0.png" />

This will open to the Javascript console by default.  Within the area of the console, right-click and choose **Save as...**

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

This will prompt you to save the contents of the console to a file.

Send this file to Blindside Networks support with as much description as possible of what you were doing prior to seeing BigBlueButton show an error or stop working.


# How many webcams can I share in a meeting?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/how-many-webcams-can-i-share-in-a-meeting

BigBlueButton is not designed as a purely video conferencing application, but rather it focuses on engagement with students.

BigBlueButton is not designed as a purely video conferencing application, but rather it focuses on engagement with students (breakout rooms, shared notes, multi-user whiteboard, etc.).

For most BigBlueButton Enhanced accounts, you can share webcams in BigBlueButton and students can see each other by unlocking the **See other viewers webcams** (in the [lock settings](/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes)).

<img alt="mceclip0.png" />

BigBlueButton will dynamically adjust the number of webcams moderators and viewers see based on the number of users in the session.

| **Number of Users** | **Webcams moderator can view** | **Webcams viewers can view** |
| - | - | - |
| \< 30 | 25 | 6 |
| \< 40 | 20 | 5 |
| \< 50 | 16 | 4 |
| \< 60 | 8 | 4 |
| \< 70 | 8 | 3 |
| \< 80+ | 8 | 2 |

See this article for further information - [Options for giving students visibility of other student's webcams](/docs/help/premium/options-for-giving-students-visibility-of-other-students-webcams)

Right now, there are no hard-coded limits in the webcam sharing, but the above guidelines will ensure you and your students have a good experience.

If a student is on low bandwidth, they [can turn off webcams for their client](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu) via the Options menu.

Viewers now see (up to) five (5) webcams at a time.


# How to mirror your iPad/iPhone screen to a Mac computer with QuickTime
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/how-to-mirror-your-ipadiphone-screen-to-a-mac-computer-with-quicktime

When running the BigBlueButton client on a mobile device, you can view screen sharing, but can't initiate it. In other words, the mobile browsers do...

When running the BigBlueButton client on a mobile device, you can view screen sharing, but can't initiate it.  In other words, the mobile browsers do not allow sharing of the screen.

If you want to share the screen on your Apple device (iPhone or iPad) and you have a Mac, you can use Quicktime to share the device's screen on your Mac, and then share your screen on your Mac (or the application window of Quicktime showing your mobile device).

To display your iPhone/iPad screen on your mac, do the following:

**1.** Connect your iPad/iPhone to your Mac using your Lightning to USB cable.

**2.** Open QuickTime on your Mac.

**3.** Click on "File" in the menu bar at the top of the screen.

**4.** Click "New Movie Recording."

<img alt="mceclip0.png" />

**5.** Next to the red record button (bottom middle), click on the down arrow. Select your iPad/iPhone from the list of available devices. If it's not there, try disconnecting and reconnecting your iPad/iPhone.

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

**6.** Your iPad/iPhone should now be fully mirrored on your computer, in the exact shape of your iPhone screen.

In order to share your iPad or iPhone screen during a BigBlueButton session, you must first also have a Mac on hand.

On your Mac, follow the steps in [this article](/docs/help/faq/how-to-mirror-your-ipadiphone-screen-to-a-mac-computer-with-quicktime) to share your iPad/iPhone screen to your Mac.

Once that is done, you can then share the iPad/iPhone screen in the BigBlueButton session by clicking the "Share screen" button.

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

This will bring up the Screen Share menu.

<img alt="mceclip2.png" />

Once in the Screen Share menu, click **Window \[1]** then select the **Movie Recording \[2]** window which will be your iPad/iPhone screen.  Finally, click the **Share \[3]** button.

The rest of the session will now see the iPad/iPhone screen.


# Using Closed Captioning
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/use-closed-captions

Enable automatic browser-based closed captions in BigBlueButton, with captions also embedded in the recording as subtitles.

BigBlueButton can automatically generate closed captions in Chrome and Safari. When the feature is enabled, each user can choose to have their own audio captioned, and any user can view the captions in the session and the recording.

## Enable captions for your audio

Once enabled, each user has the option to caption their audio when joining. In a class, typically the educator captions their own voice.

<img alt="Captions option when joining audio" />

## View captions during the session

As soon as one user has captions enabled, a **CC** button appears at the bottom of the screen for everyone.

<img alt="CC button at the bottom of the screen" />

To view captions for every speaker who has enabled captions, select the **CC** button.

<img alt="Live captions visible in the presentation area" />

To open the full transcript panel, select **Live Transcript** on the left-hand side.  You can download the transcript anytime by selecting the **Download** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Live transcription message with download button" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  When using [Blindside Networks](/docs/help/about-us) hosting of BigBlueButton, this feature is available for enabling on your account.
</Note>

## Captions in the recording

After the session ends, users can view the captions in the recording by clicking the 'CC' button in the recording playback toolbar.

<img alt="Captions visible as subtitles in a recording" />

<Note>
  **Privacy:** Chrome and Safari implement browser speech-to-text by sending the user's audio to Google's cloud services and Apple's transcription services. Captioning works well, but the user's audio is shared with Google and Apple for the speech-to-text conversion. Be aware of this data sharing before enabling the feature.
</Note>


# Using Chrome's Built In Closed Captioning
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/using-chromes-built-in-closed-captioning

Chrome v132.0 (and later) offers built-in captioning of all audio in a meeting.

You can enable live captioning by opening Chrome settings, Select **Advanced**, Select **Accessibility**, and enabling **Live Captions**.

<img alt="mceclip0.png" />

Once enabled, you'll see a window at the bottom giving a live caption (English) of the meeting's audio.

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

For more information, see [https://blog.google/products/chrome/live-caption-chrome/](https://blog.google/products/chrome/live-caption-chrome/)


# What are the minimum requirements for BigBlueButton?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/what-are-the-minimum-requirements-for-bigbluebutton

This page summarizes the recommended browser, device, and network requirements for using BigBlueButton.

BigBlueButton runs entirely in your web browser and does not require you to install an application. Most users with a reasonably recent computer or mobile device, a stable Internet connection, and a current web browser should have a good experience.

# High Level Requirements

## Recommended Browsers

For the best experience, we recommend using the latest stable version of one of the following browsers:

* **Desktop/Laptop:** Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Microsoft Edge, or Apple Safari.
* **iPhone/iPad:** Safari.
* **Android:** Google Chrome.

BigBlueButton relies on modern browser technologies such as WebRTC. Older or unsupported browsers may not provide all BigBlueButton features.

BigBlueButton runs within the browser, so it is largely independent of the underlying operating system. Windows, macOS, Linux, and ChromeOS can all run BigBlueButton provided they support a current version of a supported browser.

## Desktop/Laptop Users

### Recommended settings for desktop or laptop users

1. **Computer:** We recommend a laptop, desktop, or Chromebook with at least **4 GB of memory**. **8 GB or more is recommended** when using webcams, screen sharing, or running other applications at the same time.
2. **Internet connection:** As a general baseline, we recommend at least **1 Mbit/sec upstream** and **2 Mbit/sec downstream** available to BigBlueButton.

   Actual bandwidth requirements depend on how you use BigBlueButton. Audio and presentation viewing require relatively little bandwidth, while publishing webcams, viewing multiple webcams, and screen sharing require progressively more bandwidth.

   You can check your available bandwidth using [speedtest.net](https://speedtest.net/).
3. **Browser:** We recommend using the latest stable version of **Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Microsoft Edge, or Apple Safari**.
4. **Audio:** A built-in microphone and speakers will work, but we recommend using **headphones or a headset** when possible. This can improve audio quality and reduce echo and background noise for other participants.

A laptop with a built-in webcam and microphone is generally sufficient when used in a quiet environment.

### Connection Quality

Connection quality is just as important as raw bandwidth.  Real-time audio, video, and screen sharing can be affected by:

* High network latency
* Packet loss
* Network congestion
* Unstable Wi-Fi
* VPNs or restrictive corporate networks

A fast Internet connection can still provide poor real-time audio or video if the connection is unstable.

For the best experience, use a stable wired, Wi-Fi, 4G/LTE, or 5G connection.

# Detailed Requirements

## Network Connectivity

Each user should be able to make the following TCP/IP and UDP network connections:

| **Protocol** | **Port(s)** | **Description** |
| - | - | - |
| TCP/IP | 80 | HTTP |
| TCP/IP | 443 | HTTPS and fallback media connectivity |
| UDP | 16384-32768 | Encrypted WebRTC audio, video, and screen share media streams (DTLS-SRTP) |

For the best real-time audio and video performance, UDP traffic should be allowed.

If a [firewall](/docs/help/faq/whitelisting-bigbluebutton-servers-for-the-firewall) blocks UDP connections, BigBlueButton may attempt to relay media through TCP/TLS on port 443. This can allow the session to continue, but may result in reduced audio or video performance, particularly on congested or high-latency networks.

## Mobile Device Users

BigBlueButton works directly in supported mobile browsers and does not require a dedicated mobile application.

### Recommended settings for mobile users

1. **Network:** We recommend a reliable **Wi-Fi, 4G/LTE, or 5G** connection.
2. **Browser:**
   * On **iPhone and iPad**, use a current version of Safari.
   * On **Android**, use a current version of Google Chrome.
3. **Wi-Fi:** A stable private Wi-Fi network will generally provide a better experience than a congested public Wi-Fi network.
4. **Device usage:** Close unnecessary applications and browser tabs, particularly on devices with limited memory or processing capacity.

Mobile users can participate in audio, view presentations and screen sharing, use chat, respond to polls, and use many other BigBlueButton features directly from their browser.

## Additional Recommendations for Moderators and Presenters

Moderators and presenters can join BigBlueButton from mobile devices, but we recommend using a **laptop, desktop, or Chromebook** whenever possible.

A larger-screen device generally provides the best experience when:

* Managing participants
* Presenting slides
* Using the multi-user whiteboard
* Managing breakout rooms
* Sharing a webcam
* Sharing your screen

**Screen sharing from mobile browsers may not be available because of browser and operating-system limitations. Presenters who need to share their screen should use a laptop, desktop, or Chromebook.**

### Screen Sharing

Screen sharing typically requires more upstream bandwidth than audio or presentation viewing.

For presenters who will share their screen, we recommend at least **2 Mbits/sec of available upstream bandwidth**. Higher bandwidth may be beneficial when sharing high-resolution screens or rapidly changing content.

The actual bandwidth used for screen sharing depends on screen resolution, content, and the configuration of the BigBlueButton server.


# Where is meeting data stored in Europe?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/where-is-meeting-data-stored-in-europe

Recordings are stored in Ireland and live sessions are hosted in Netherlands (Amsterdam) and France.



# Where is the hosting location for Australia customers?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/where-is-the-hosting-location-for-australia-customers

Storage of recordings is in Australia, and our BigBlueButton servers are in Singapore and Australia.



# Whitelisting BigBlueButton servers for the firewall
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/whitelisting-bigbluebutton-servers-for-the-firewall

BigBlueButton servers require specific ports to be accessible by the web browser in order to transfer audio and video media.

## BigBlueButton Servers

The web browser must be able to connect to the BigBlueButton server using the following ports and protocols for the best connection stability:

| Protocol | Port(s) | Description |
| - | - | - |
| TCP | 443 | HTTPS<br />TURN over TLS<br /><abbr title="Application-Layer Protocol Negotiation, a TLS extension">ALPN</abbr><sup>[\[1\]](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Application-Layer_Protocol_Negotiation)</sup>: `h2,http/1.1,stun.turn` |
| TCP, UDP | 3478 | STUN and TURN |
| TCP | 5349 | TURN over TLS<br />ALPN: `stun.turn` |
| UDP | 16384-32768 | WebRTC audio, video, and screen share media (encrypted using DTLS-SRTP) |

Blindside Networks uses dynamic servers for most of its BigBlueButton sessions.
The IP addresses used by the servers are allocated on-demand by our cloud hosting providers, and will change on a day-to-day basis.

If you need to limit outgoing firewall exceptions to apply only to BigBlueButton servers, we recommend using DNS suffix or wildcard matching to whitelist the servers for the above ports and protocols.

The DNS hostnames used for BigBlueButton servers depend on the hosting region, and are as follows:

| Hosting Region | Domain name suffix |
| - | - |
| **Canada** | \*.rna2.blindsidenetworks.com |
| **United States** | \*.rna1.blindsidenetworks.com |
| **Europe** | \*.reu1.blindsidenetworks.com |
| **Asia Pacific** | \*.roc2.blindsidenetworks.com |

## STUN/TURN Servers

To improve the success and speed of WebRTC media connections, Blindside Networks runs STUN/TURN servers.
If you are unable to allow the web browser to connect to the full range of UDP ports on the BigBlueButton server, ensure that the following ports are permitted for connections to the STUN/TURN servers:

| Protocol | Port(s) | Description |
| - | - | - |
| TCP | 443 | TURN over TLS<br /><abbr title="Application-Layer Protocol Negotiation, a TLS extension">ALPN</abbr><sup>[\[1\]](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Application-Layer_Protocol_Negotiation)</sup>: `stun.turn` |
| TCP, UDP | 3478 | STUN and TURN |
| TCP | 5349 | TURN over TLS<br />ALPN: `stun.turn` |

The STUN/TURN servers are configured on static IP addresses, listed below.
Please note that all of the STUN/TURN servers are global, and which server a given user will connect to depends on DNS geolocation and current network conditions.

| **Hostname** | **IP Addresses** |
| - | - |
| turn4.reu1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 206.189.242.91<br />134.209.83.176<br />2a03:b0c0:2:d0::f13:4001<br />2a03:b0c0:2:d0::f13:4002 |
| turn5.reu1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 157.230.77.225<br />68.183.67.52<br />2a03:b0c0:3:d0::1328:f001<br />2a03:b0c0:3:d0::1328:f002 |
| turn6.rna1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 165.227.252.138<br />157.230.177.241<br />2604:a880:400:d0::1ee1:9001<br />2604:a880:400:d0::1ee1:9002 |
| turn7.rna1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 159.203.15.102<br />174.138.115.240<br />2604:a880:cad:d0::d91:a001<br />2604:a880:cad:d0::d91:a002 |
| turn8.rna1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 45.55.124.139<br />142.93.190.81<br />2604:a880:800:c1::150:5001<br />2604:a880:800:c1::150:5002 |
| turn9.rna1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 69.55.54.22<br />206.189.253.12<br />2604:a880:400:d0::17f1:d001<br />2604:a880:400:d0::17f1:d002 |
| turn10.roc2.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 188.166.204.178<br />159.89.192.13<br />2400:6180:0:d1::5c:a001<br />2400:6180:0:d1::5c:a002 |
| turn11.roc2.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 139.59.219.6<br />128.199.216.59<br />2400:6180:0:d0::5f:7001<br />2400:6180:0:d0::5f:7002 |
| turn12.reu1.turn.blindsidenetworks.com | 159.223.232.74<br />161.35.247.127<br />2a03:b0c0:2:d0::11ab:8001<br />2a03:b0c0:2:d0::11ab:8002 |

In particular, ensure the whitlist excludes these servers from TLS inspection; otherwise, STUN/TURN packets will fail over TLS and users will not be able to share media.


# Why is there no BigBlueButton Mobile Application?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/faq/why-is-there-no-bigbluebutton-mobile-application

By design, BigBlueButton is a fully HTML5 web application. It runs with a browser on Desktop, Laptop, Chromebook, and mobile devices. On mobile,...

By design, BigBlueButton is a fully HTML5 web application.  It runs with a browser on Desktop, Laptop, Chromebook, and mobile devices.

On mobile, BigBlueButton runs within the Mobile browser (Safari mobile on iOS and Chrome mobile on Android).

As such, users don't need to install any mobile app to run BigBlueButton.  They are always running the latest version.


# Getting Started with Personal Rooms
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/getting-started/getting-started-with-personal-rooms

Administrators can request a Personal Rooms instance, which gives instructors a front end for BigBlueButton outside the LMS.

Personal Rooms is a front end that lets your instructors use BigBlueButton outside your institution's Learning Management System (LMS). This article covers [what Personal Rooms does](#what-personal-rooms-does), [what we need from you](#what-we-need-from-you), [how to request it](#request-personal-rooms), and [what to set up next](#next-steps).

## What Personal Rooms does

Personal Rooms gives instructors what they need to run and manage BigBlueButton sessions on their own:

* Sign up and sign in with Office 365 or Google.
* Manage account settings and user preferences.
* Create and manage their own personal rooms.
* Let users wait for a room to start, then join automatically when it does.
* Invite others to a room with a simple URL.
* View recordings and share them with others.

To see how it works, try Personal Rooms at [my.bigbluebutton.com](https://my.bigbluebutton.com).

<Note>
  Personal Rooms sessions count toward your purchased concurrent session capacity. If an instructor has a Personal Room active while another instructor is using BigBlueButton in your LMS, that counts as two concurrent sessions.
</Note>

## What we need from you

To set up a Personal Rooms instance, we configure an authentication method for your account. Personal Rooms supports:

* [Google OAuth2](/docs/help/getting-started/google-oauth2)
* [Office 365 OAuth2](/docs/help/getting-started/office-365-oauth2)
* [SAML](/docs/help/getting-started/saml-auth)
* [In Application Authorization](/docs/help/getting-started/in-application-authorization)

Choose the method your institution uses, then send a request to [support@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:support@blindsidenetworks.com) with:

1. The parameters that method requires — see the linked page for details.
2. The name and email address of the person at your organization to set up as your Personal Rooms administrator.

## Request Personal Rooms

If you are not a hosted customer of Blindside Networks and would like to use Personal Rooms, contact your account manager or email [team@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:team@blindsidenetworks.com).

## Next steps

Once your instance is set up, configure it from the Administrator Panel:

* [Access the Administrator Panel](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/accessing-the-administrator-panel) — find the Manage Users, Server Recordings, Site Settings, and Roles menus.
* [Manage users](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/managing-users) — view, search, edit, and ban user accounts.
* [Site settings](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/site-settings) — set branding, registration methods, and default recording visibility.
* [Manage recordings](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/managing-recordings) — view, rename, and delete recordings across your instance.


# Google OAuth2
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/getting-started/google-oauth2

Administrators can configure Personal Rooms so users sign in with their institution's Google accounts, with no app to install.

Google OAuth2 lets your users sign in to Personal Rooms with the Google accounts they already have. There is no app to install — Blindside Networks configures the connection for you.

Users can sign in when their Google email address belongs to the host domain assigned to your account.

## What we need from you

Your institution's **Host Domain** — the domain of the email addresses hosted by Google. For example, `blindsidenetworks.com`.

Send it to [support@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:support@blindsidenetworks.com), along with the name and email address of the person to set up as your Personal Rooms administrator.


# In Application Authorization
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/getting-started/in-application-authorization

Administrators can let users create their own Personal Rooms accounts, and choose whether sign-up is open, invitation-only, or requires approval.

In Application Authorization lets anyone with your Personal Rooms URL create an account, regardless of their email domain. Use it when your users are not all on a single Google or Office 365 domain.

You control who can complete sign-up by choosing one of three [registration methods](#registration-methods).

## Registration methods

Choose one method. The methods cannot be combined, and the method you choose applies to everyone who tries to register.

* **Open registration** — anyone with your Personal Rooms URL can sign up and sign in.
* **Join by invitation** — open sign-up is disabled. Only people who receive an email invitation from an administrator can sign up.
* **Approve/decline** — anyone can sign up, but an administrator must approve the account before the user can sign in.

## What we need from you

The registration method you want to use.

Send your choice to [support@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:support@blindsidenetworks.com), along with the name and email address of the person to set up as your Personal Rooms administrator.

<Note>
  You can change the registration method at any time from [Site Settings](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/site-settings) in the Administrator Panel.
</Note>


# Office 365 OAuth2
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/getting-started/office-365-oauth2

Administrators can configure Personal Rooms so users sign in with their institution's Office 365 accounts, with no app to install.

Office 365 OAuth2 lets your users sign in to Personal Rooms with the Office 365 accounts they already have. There is no app to install — Blindside Networks configures the connection for you.

Users can sign in when their Office 365 email address belongs to the host domain assigned to your account.

## What we need from you

Your institution's **Host Domain** — the domain of the email addresses hosted by Office 365. For example, `blindsidenetworks.com`.

Send it to [support@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:support@blindsidenetworks.com), along with the name and email address of the person to set up as your Personal Rooms administrator.


# SAML Auth
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/getting-started/saml-auth

Administrators can connect Personal Rooms to their institution's SAML identity provider so users sign in with their existing credentials.

SAML (Security Assertion Markup Language) is an authentication and authorization protocol used for single sign-on and identity management. Connecting Personal Rooms to your SAML identity provider lets your users sign in with the institutional credentials they already have.

<Note>
  SAML support is in beta. It has been tested successfully with OpenCAS (which runs on Shibboleth), ClassLink, QuickLaunchSSO, and Azure AD.
</Note>

## What we need from you

In your institution's SAML identity provider, add two new apps or service providers: one for Personal Rooms Staging and one for Personal Rooms Production.

Set up Staging before Production. The staging environment lets us update your Personal Rooms instance with minimal downtime to your production environment.

Contact [support@blindsidenetworks.com](mailto:support@blindsidenetworks.com) for the metadata descriptor and callback URLs for your region, along with the customer identifier to use.

## Required parameters

Include the following parameters as part of the launch:

* **user\_id** — a unique user ID in your context.
* **email** — the user's email address.
* **firstname** — normally found as `givenName` or `GivenName`.
* **lastname** — normally found as `Surname`.

## Optional parameters

You may also want to add:

* **image** — a URL to the user's avatar. Applies only if your Personal Rooms site has avatars enabled.
* **roles** — a string with the role the user should be authenticated in Personal Rooms. Applies only if you use different functionality profiles per role.

## Identity provider metadata

We also need the descriptor for your identity provider. Send us either:

* An endpoint where we can retrieve your SAML IdP `EntityDescriptor` — a metadata file containing your public certificate, endpoint, and other information about your IdP, **or**
* The fingerprint of your certificate, together with the endpoint of your IdP.


# Access breakout room whiteboards or shared notes
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/access-breakout-room-whiteboards-or-shared-notes

Save whiteboards and shared notes from breakout rooms as PDFs and access them from the Action menu after rooms end.

When creating breakout rooms, you can select **Save whiteboard** or **Save shared notes**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 11 52 13 AM" />
</Frame>

This will export whiteboard presentations or shared notes from all of the breakout rooms you created as PDFs. When breakout rooms end, you can access the files from the **Action menu (+)**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 11 49 11 AM" />
</Frame>

Or, you can access the files from the **Upload/Manage presentations** menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 11 47 00 AM" />
</Frame>

Breakout room presentations and shared notes can be managed as shown in the guides below:

* [Upload a presentation and enable for download](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download)
* [Shared notes as a presenter](/docs/help/presenter-guide/shared-notes-presenter)


# Clear the public chat
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/clear-the-public-chat

Only moderators can clear the public chat for everyone in the session.

All users in BigBlueButton can copy or download the public chat. However, only moderators can clear it for everyone in the session.

## To clear the public chat

Expand the **Chat Window \[1]** if not already visible, then open the **Public Chat Menu \[2]** in the upper right of the chat panel.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Publicchatclear" />
</Frame>

Select **Clear \[3]** from the list of options. The chat panel empties and all messages are removed for every participant.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Clearchat" />
</Frame>

<Warning>
  Clearing the public chat cannot be undone and removes all messages from the chat for everyone in the session.
</Warning>


# Create and manage breakout rooms
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/create-and-manage-breakout-rooms

Create, configure, and manage breakout rooms during a live BigBlueButton session, and invite late joiners.

Moderators use breakout rooms in BigBlueButton to encourage small group discussion, collaboration, and cooperation amongst students. This page describes how to create breakout rooms, manage them during a live session, and invite late joiners.

## Create breakout rooms

Only viewers who have already joined the BigBlueButton session can be assigned to a breakout room. All connected users appear in the **Users** list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 11 59 59 PM" />
</Frame>

To create breakout rooms, select the gear icon above the **Users** list and choose **Create breakout rooms**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 11 57 37 PM" />
</Frame>

Configure the breakout rooms using the options described below.

* **Number of rooms** **\[1]**: the default minimum is 2. Select the dropdown to change the number of breakout rooms, up to a maximum of 8.
* **Breakout room options** **\[2]**: see the list below for each option.
* **Duration (minutes)** **\[3]**: all rooms close once this duration is reached, and users return to the main session.
* **Randomly assign** **\[4]**: distributes viewers evenly across the selected number of rooms.
* **Not assigned** **\[5]**: lists users who have not yet been assigned to a breakout room.
* **Created Rooms** **\[6]**: shows each room with its assigned users.

The **Breakout room options \[2]** include:

* **Allow users to choose a breakout room to join**: viewers select from a dropdown of available breakout rooms when prompted.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Jointhebreakoutroom" />
</Frame>

* **Save whiteboard**: whiteboard annotations are converted to a PDF and made available as a presentation from the action menu.
* **Save shared notes**: shared notes are converted to a PDF and made available as a presentation from the action menu.
* **Send invitation to assigned moderators**: sends breakout room invitations to selected moderators so they can manage the rooms their users are assigned to.

<Note>
  Moderators are not assigned to breakout rooms from the create panel. Use **Send invitation to assigned moderators** or join a room manually after creation.
</Note>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 17 At 12 12 45 AM" />
</Frame>

Once the rooms are configured, select **Create** to launch them.

Viewers receive a prompt to join their assigned room. Their audio is removed from the main session, and they are prompted to rejoin audio in the breakout room.

When viewers join a breakout room, they see the current slide from the main session. Slide navigation arrows are disabled because the breakout room contains only that one slide.

## Manage breakout rooms

To invite students who are not currently in a breakout room, select the gear icon and choose **Breakout room invitation**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 17 At 12 15 18 AM" />
</Frame>

A dialog appears where you can see students in main room (Not assigned) and breakout rooms.  To move a student into a breakout room, **\[1]** Select their name and **drag-and-drop** them into the list below the name of the breakout rooms.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 05 15 At 12 35 04 AM" />
</Frame>

## Breakout room controls

After breakout rooms are created and viewers have joined, moderators manage and join the rooms from the main session through the **Breakout Room Control** panel.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Breakoutroomsettings" />
</Frame>

The **Breakout Room Control panel** **\[1]** appears under **Messages** above the **Users** list on the left. Select it to expand the panel.

* **Duration time** **\[2]**: shows the remaining time for the breakout rooms.
* **Breakout room options menu** **\[3]**: opens the actions described below.
* **Message all rooms** **\[4]**: send a message to every breakout room from the chat box.
* **Number and names of attendees in each room** **\[5]**: lists active breakout rooms and their participants.
* **Ask to join** **\[6]**: join a specific breakout room directly.
* **Join audio** **\[7]**: listen in on a breakout room without joining it (Note: This feature is currently disabled in BigBlueButton).

The **breakout room options menu \[3]** provides:

* **Change duration**: increase or decrease the time remaining for all breakout rooms.
* **Manage users**: open the breakout room settings panel to add or remove users in each room.
* **End breakout rooms**: close all breakout rooms before the duration ends. Users return to the main session and rejoin audio.

### Join a breakout room

To join a breakout room directly, select **Ask to join \[6]** for that room. Your audio disconnects from the main session, and you are prompted to connect audio in the breakout room.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Audiosettingsdefault" />
</Frame>

If you do not want to join the audio in the breakout room, select the **X** in the audio chooser when prompted.

You can open as many breakout rooms as you like using **Ask to join**. Each room opens in a new browser tab at the top of the window.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Mainandbreakout" />
</Frame>

### Manage Breakout Rooms

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

## Important notes and recommendations

<Note>
  All viewers enter breakout rooms with moderator status, and the first to connect is assigned the presenter role. We recommend assigning one person per room as the "breakout captain" to upload content or pass the presenter role during the discussion.
</Note>

<Warning>
  * Breakout rooms **cannot** be recorded.
  * Once breakout rooms are created and started, the duration cannot be extended.
</Warning>


# End meeting on logout
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/end-meeting-on-logout

Moderators can end the session for everyone on logout, which closes the meeting and sends recordings for processing immediately.

Any user can log out of BigBlueButton, but only a moderator can end the session for everyone on logout. Ending the session ensures the meeting does not stay open if other users have not logged out, and it sends any recorded segments for processing immediately.

## End the session for all users

Select the **Leave** button, then select **End session**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 13 52 PM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 14 30 PM" />
</Frame>

A confirmation prompt asks "Are you sure you want to end this session?". Select **End session for all users**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 15 19 PM" />
</Frame>

A final message confirms the session has ended. Select **OK** to return to your institution's home page.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 15 29 PM" />
</Frame>


# Give/take presenter role
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/givetake-presenter-role

How moderators assign or reclaim the presenter role from any user in the session.

Moderators can assign the presenter role to any user in the session, including themselves. The presenter can [upload a presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download), share a [link from YouTube](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link), or [engage a poll](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing).

By default, the first moderator to join the session is the presenter.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 06 18 PM" />
</Frame>

## Make a user the presenter

To assign the presenter role to another user, select the user's name in the **Users list** **\[1]**, then select **Make presenter** **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 06 06 PM" />
</Frame>

The presenter icon moves to the new presenter's avatar in the **Users list**, and that user gains presenter controls in the presentation area.

## Reclaim presenter status

To take back the presenter role, select your own name in the **Users list** and select **Take presenter role**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 08 28 PM" />
</Frame>

You can also reclaim presenter status from the action button in the presentation area. Select the action button, then select **Take presenter role**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 04 59 PM" />
</Frame>

The presenter icon moves to your avatar in the **Users list**, and you regain access to the presenter tools.

## Request the presenter role as a viewer

If you are not a moderator, ask a moderator in the session to make you the presenter.


# How do I use the per-user whiteboard?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-do-i-use-the-per-user-whiteboard

Moderators can grant whiteboard access to one viewer at a time, and remove access for an individual or all viewers at once.

Moderators can grant a single viewer whiteboard access without enabling it for the whole class — useful when you want one student to mark up the slide. You can [grant access to a user](#grant-whiteboard-access-to-a-user) and [remove access](#remove-whiteboard-access) at any time.

For full whiteboard mode, see the [multi-user whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard).

## Grant whiteboard access to a user

<Frame>
  <img alt="Whiteboardaccess" />
</Frame>

To grant access, select a user in the **Users list** **\[1]**, then select **Give whiteboard access** **\[2]**.

A pen icon appears next to the user's avatar to confirm access.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 11 05 11 PM" />
</Frame>

That user can now use all the [multi-user whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard) tools.

A counter appears on the multi-user whiteboard icon showing how many users currently have access.

<img alt="Whiteboard access counter" />

## Remove whiteboard access

There are two ways to remove access.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 11 05 37 PM" />
</Frame>

To remove access for everyone except the presenter, select the **multi-user whiteboard** icon **\[1]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 11 06 00 PM" />
</Frame>

To remove access from a single user, select their name in the **Users list**, then select **Remove whiteboard access**.


# How to configure Guest Policy
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-to-configure-guest-policy

Moderators set the guest policy to control whether users can join the session, are denied automatically, or wait in a lobby for approval.

Moderators set the **guest policy** to control how new users are admitted to the session — automatically allowed, automatically denied, or queued in a lobby for moderator approval.

## Set the guest policy

To set the policy, select the gear icon next to **USERS**, then select **Guest policy**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 04 06 PM" />
</Frame>

Choose one of three options:

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 54 06 PM" />
</Frame>

* **Always deny** — every user attempting to join is denied entry automatically.
* **Always accept** — every user attempting to join is allowed in automatically.
* **Ask moderator** — joining users wait in a lobby. Moderators can allow or deny each request individually, or handle every waiting user in one action.

## Manage users in the lobby

When **Ask moderator** is set, moderators see pending requests and can act on them.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 55 20 PM" />
</Frame>

You have three actions per guest:

* **Allow** — let the guest join the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 55 33 PM" />
</Frame>

* **Message** — send a note to a guest waiting in the lobby.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 55 52 PM" />
</Frame>

* **Deny** — block the guest from entering.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 56 05 PM" />
</Frame>

## What guests see in the lobby

Guests see a lobby screen and cannot view the session until a moderator admits them.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 55 07 PM" />
</Frame>

Messages sent to the **Guest Lobby** appear on the same waiting screen.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 07 07 PM" />
</Frame>


# Learning Analytics Dashboard overview
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard

Moderators use the Learning Analytics Dashboard to monitor real-time student attendance, engagement, and poll responses during a BigBlueButton session.

Moderators use the **Learning Analytics Dashboard (LAD)** to monitor real-time attendance, engagement, and poll responses during a BigBlueButton session. The LAD provides per-user metrics that help educators identify who is engaged, who may need follow-up, and how students are responding to content.

## What the LAD shows

The LAD reports per-user metrics including:

* When each learner joined the session, and whether they are still online.
* How long each learner has been in attendance.
* Who is actively speaking, and for how long.
* Who is sharing a webcam, and for how long.
* Who is messaging, reacting with emojis, or raising a hand.
* How learners answered each poll or quiz.

Moderators can use these metrics to identify absent or disengaged students, prompt encouragement during the session, and review participation after the fact.

## Open the LAD

Once you join a session as a moderator (typically through your LMS), select the gear icon and choose **Learning Analytics Dashboard**.

## Layout overview

The dashboard has four main areas:

1. A tab list of available views — **User**, **Activity Score**, **Timeline**, and **Polls**.
2. The session overview — date, duration, and whether the session is **Active** or **Inactive**.
3. The per-user table for everyone who attended the session.
4. A button to download the dashboard as CSV.

<img alt="Learning Analytics Dashboard layout" />

## Per-user details

Each row in the user table shows nine fields:

1. User name, plus the time and date they joined.
2. Total online duration.
3. Total time speaking.
4. Total time with webcam on.
5. Number of chat messages sent.
6. Number and type of emoji reactions.
7. Number of times the user raised a hand.
8. Activity score for the session.
9. Current status (online or offline).

<img alt="Per-user fields in the dashboard" />

## Switch views

The LAD provides several views — switch between them using the tabs at the top.

### User view

The default view, sorted by join time.

<img alt="User view" />

### Activity Score view

Sorts users by activity score, highest first. Select the arrow beside the column title to reverse the sort.

<img alt="Activity score view" />

### Timeline view

A scrollable timeline of the session. Slides appear along the top with the time they were displayed; users appear along the bottom with any emoji reactions or raised hands. Use this view to see when and how students reacted to specific content.

<img alt="Timeline view" />

### Poll view

Lists every poll question along with student answers and the most popular response.

<img alt="Poll view" />

### Individual view

Select a user's name in any view to open their individual overview, which gathers all of that user's metrics in one place.

<img alt="Individual user view" />


# Lock viewers' ability to use their mic/webcam/chat/shared notes
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes

Moderators can lock viewer access to specific BigBlueButton features such as mic, webcam, chat, and shared notes.

Moderators can lock viewer access to specific features in BigBlueButton — for example, to encourage verbal participation, reduce back-channel chat during testing, or save bandwidth.

Common reasons to lock viewers:

* Restrict the public chat to encourage attendees to use their microphones.
* Lock the private chat to reduce back-channel communication during online testing.
* Restrict webcam sharing to save bandwidth and focus attention on uploaded content.
* Lock shared notes so only moderators can edit them.

<Note>
  Lock settings apply to viewers only — they do not apply to other moderators in the session.
</Note>

## Apply lock settings to all viewers

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 10 46 27 PM" />
</Frame>

To open the lock settings, select the gear icon above the **Users** list, then choose **Lock viewers**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Lockmenu" />
</Frame>

The available lock settings are:

* **Share webcam** **\[1]** — restricts viewers from sharing their webcams.
* **See other viewers webcams** **\[2]** — only the moderator's webcam is visible to viewers, while moderators continue to see all webcams. Reduces bandwidth for viewers.
* **Share microphone** **\[3]** — restricts viewers from sharing their mic. Already-joined microphones are muted and locked when this setting is applied.
* **Send Public chat messages** **\[4]** — restricts viewers from posting in the public chat.
* **Send Private chat messages** **\[5]** — restricts viewers from sending private chats to other viewers. Viewers can still reply to private chats from a moderator.
* **Edit Shared Notes** **\[6]** — restricts viewers from opening or contributing to shared notes.
* **See other viewers in the Users list** **\[7]** — viewers see only their own user icon and the moderator's.
* **See other viewers cursors** **\[8]** — viewers see only the moderator's cursor on the whiteboard.
* **See other viewers annotations** **\[9]** — viewers see only the moderator's annotations.

## Lock or unlock private chat per user

Sessions can be configured to start with private chat disabled, or you can lock **Send Private chat messages** manually at any time.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 18 56 PM" />
</Frame>

Once locked, users appear marked as **Locked**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 22 47 PM" />
</Frame>

While locked, users cannot send private chats to each other, although moderators can still send private chats to locked users.

To enable private chat for an individual user without unlocking the whole session, select the user's name in the user list and select **Unlock \<user>**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 24 46 PM" />
</Frame>

Unlocked users can send private chats to locked users, but locked users cannot reply. In the example below, *Student A* is unlocked and can send private chats to *Student B* and *Student C*, but neither can reply.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 23 09 PM" />
</Frame>

Two unlocked users can chat with each other in both directions. In the example below, *Student B* and *Student C* are both unlocked and can send private chats to each other.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 26 14 PM" />
</Frame>

To lock a user again, select their name in the user list and select **Lock \<user>**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 10 54 59 PM" />
</Frame>


# Manage users
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/manage-users

Moderators manage settings for all users at once or for individual users from the User list.

Moderators manage participant settings for everyone in the session or for individual users. All users (moderators and viewers) appear in the **User list** panel on the left side of the session.

To show or hide the panel, select the **User list toggle** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 35 43 PM" />
</Frame>

To open settings that apply to everyone, select the **Manage users** gear icon beside **USERS**. The manage users menu opens.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 36 01 PM" />
</Frame>

## Manage all users

<Frame>
  <img alt="Managemenu" />
</Frame>

Select **\[1] Enable (or Disable) Users join muted** to control whether users joining the session have their microphones muted.

Select **\[2] Mute all users except presenter** to mute every user except the presenter. Users can still unmute themselves.

Select **\[3] Lock viewers** to open a menu with more granular options. See [Lock viewers](/docs/help/moderator-guide/lock-viewers-ability-to-use-their-micwebcamchatshared-notes) for more information.

Select **\[4] Guest policy** to set the session user access policy. See [Guest policy](/docs/help/moderator-guide/how-to-configure-guest-policy) for more information.

Select **\[5] Save user names** to download the list of users as a text file.

Select **\[6] Clear all reactions** to remove all emojis and raised hands.

Select **\[7] Create breakout rooms** to open the breakout rooms management interface. See [Create and manage breakout rooms](/docs/help/moderator-guide/create-and-manage-breakout-rooms) for more information.

Select **\[8] Learning Analytics Dashboard** to open the dashboard. See [Learning Analytics Dashboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard) for more information.

## Manage a single user

To open settings for an individual user, select their name in the **User list**. A menu of actions for that user opens.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Studentmenu 1" />
</Frame>

Select **\[1] Start a private chat** to open a window visible only to the moderator and the selected user.

Select **\[2] Lock public chat** to prevent the user from posting messages in the **Public Chat** window.

Select **\[3] Mute user** to mute the selected user's microphone.

Select **\[4] Give whiteboard access** to allow the selected user to mark up the whiteboard.

Select **\[5] Make presenter** to promote the user to the [presenter](/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-the-presentation-controls) role.

Select **\[6] Promote to moderator** or **Demote to viewer** to change the user's role.

Select **\[7] Remove user** to eject the user from the session. You can also choose **Prevent this user from rejoining the session**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 22 23 PM" />
</Frame>


# Promote, demote, or remove a user
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/promotedemoteremove-a-user

Moderators can promote viewers to moderator, demote moderators to viewer, or remove a user from the session.

Moderators can [promote a viewer to moderator](#promote-to-moderator), [demote a moderator to viewer](#demote-to-viewer), or [remove a user](#remove-a-user) from the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Rolelist" />
</Frame>

In the user list, moderators have a **square** **\[1]** avatar icon and viewers have a **circular** **\[2]** avatar icon.

Common reasons to change a user's role:

* Promote a guest speaker to moderator so they have full session control.
* Promote a user who joined as a viewer because of an LMS misconfiguration.
* Demote a moderator who was assigned the role by mistake.
* Demote a moderator to reduce the number of users with full control.

## Promote to moderator

To promote a viewer, select their avatar in the user list, then select **Promote to moderator**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 13 26 PM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 16 40 PM" />
</Frame>

The avatar shape changes from a circle to a square to confirm the new role.

## Demote to viewer

To demote a moderator, select their avatar in the user list, then select **Demote to viewer**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 05 50 PM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 18 50 PM" />
</Frame>

The avatar shape changes from a square to a circle to confirm the new role.

## Remove a user

To remove a user from the session, select their avatar in the user list and select **Remove user**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 8 05 34 PM" />
</Frame>

Removal applies for the duration of the current session:

* Phone users cannot dial back in from the same phone.
* Regular users cannot rejoin in the same way (LMS link, Personal Rooms link, Guest invite link).

Selecting **Prevent this user from rejoining the session** blocks them for the rest of the current session only.

<img alt="Prevent user from rejoining checkbox" />

<Note>
  Removal is per-session. A removed user can still join other BigBlueButton sessions, or the same session if it is restarted later.
</Note>


# Start and stop recording
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/start-and-stop-recording

Moderators use the Start/Stop Recording button to capture the session when recording is enabled for the meeting.

When a BigBlueButton meeting is enabled for recording, the moderator uses the **Start/Stop Recording** button in the live session to [start](#start-the-recording) or [stop](#stop-or-pause-the-recording) the recording.

<Note>
  Enabling recording when the meeting is created does not auto-capture the session. You must use the **Start/Stop Recording** button in the live session for a recording to be produced.
</Note>

The recording icon sits in the top centre of the BigBlueButton interface, to the right of the session title.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 44 37 AM" />
</Frame>

## Start the recording

To start the recording, select the **Start Recording** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 49 30 AM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 45 53 AM" />
</Frame>

The recording icon turns red and a timer counts up the recorded duration.

## Stop or pause the recording

To stop or pause the recording, select the **red icon and timer**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 55 17 AM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 46 45 AM" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Recording processing takes about as long as the **full** session duration and only begins after the session ends or all attendees log out.
</Note>

<Note>
  All sessions have a maximum duration of 9 hours.
</Note>


# Using Smart Slides for one-click polling
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/moderator-guide/using-smart-slides-for-one-click-polling

Smart Slides detects poll, quiz, and video patterns in your slide content and turns them into one-click interactions during a session.

**Smart Slides** detects specific patterns in your slide content and turns them into one-click polls, quizzes, or video plays during a BigBlueButton session. There is no setup beyond writing your slides — when BigBlueButton recognises a supported pattern, a launch button appears for the presenter.

This page covers the [seven Smart Slide types](#smart-slide-types), the [quick-reference table](#quick-reference), and how [Smart Slides feed into the Learning Analytics Dashboard](#learning-analytics-dashboard).

For a video walkthrough, see [How Smart Slides work](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mze90AVni08).

## Launch a Smart Slide

When the current slide contains a recognised pattern, a **Quick Poll** or **Play External Video** button appears in the lower-left of the toolbar.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Smart Slides button visible on the toolbar" />
</Frame>

Select the button to launch the interaction. Question text and answer choices are pulled directly from the slide.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Quick Poll button location" />
</Frame>

The poll opens with the extracted information.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Poll panel pre-filled from slide content" />
</Frame>

Students see the corresponding response prompt.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Student view of a Smart Slide poll" />
</Frame>

## Smart Slide types

### Single choice poll

**Trigger:** A question followed by a lettered or bulleted list of answer options.

Students see the question and select one answer. This is the most common Smart Slide type and requires no special syntax.

**Example slide text:**

```
What are the rings of Saturn made of?

A. Iron
B. Ice
C. Granite
D. Volcanic rocks
E. Gummy bears
```

### Quiz with a correct answer

**Trigger:** A single-choice poll with `__` (two underscores) appended to the correct answer.

Adding `__` after an answer marks the question as a quiz. The Learning Analytics Dashboard tracks who answered correctly and shows a per-student breakdown in the **Quiz** tab.

To hide the answer marker from students, change the colour of the `__` characters to match the slide background. BigBlueButton still detects them.

**Example slide text:**

```
What are the rings of Saturn made of?

A. Iron
B. Ice__
C. Granite
D. Volcanic rocks
E. Gummy bears
```

<Frame>
  <img alt="Quiz slide with hidden underscore marker" />
</Frame>

The quiz launches with the correct answer pre-marked.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Quiz panel showing the correct answer marked" />
</Frame>

### Multiple choice poll

**Trigger:** A question ending in `??` (two question marks), followed by a list of answer options.

Students can select more than one answer. Use this type when a question has multiple valid responses.

**Example slide text:**

```
What two elements comprise table salt??

A. Sodium
B. Calcium
C. Chloride
D. Zinc
```

### Yes/No poll

**Trigger:** The text `(yes/no)` anywhere in the question.

Launches a Yes/No poll. Use it for quick checks, opinion questions, or agreement prompts.

**Example slide text:**

```
Did Einstein discover the atom (yes/no)?
```

### True/False poll

**Trigger:** The text `(true/false)` anywhere in the question.

Functionally similar to Yes/No, but the response options are labelled True and False.

**Example slide text:**

```
Did Einstein discover the atom (true/false)?
```

### Typed response poll

**Trigger:** A question with no answer options listed below it.

When BigBlueButton sees a question without A, B, C choices, it treats the question as open-ended. Students type their answer directly, and responses are visible to the presenter.

**Example slide text:**

```
Calculating time

Two cars started from the same point at 5 am, traveling in opposite directions
at 40 and 50 mph respectively. At what time will they be 450 miles apart?
```

### External video

**Trigger:** A YouTube, Vimeo, or direct `.mp4` URL placed on the slide. The URL must be on a single unbroken line.

BigBlueButton detects the link and shows the **external video** button in the lower-left of the toolbar. Selecting it shares the video with all participants in a synchronized player.

<Frame>
  <img alt="External video button in the toolbar" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Synchronized external video playing for all users" />
</Frame>

**Single video example:**

```
https://youtu.be/v2Z4eANMNuA
```

**Multiple videos with labels:**

You can place several video URLs on one slide. Add a comment after a `#` on each URL to label it — BigBlueButton displays the labels in a selection menu.

```
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-SM_HTxVcx0#Layout-Manager
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tqkVEWO12tI#Uploading-Presentations
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xeLOzKBUdIk#Using-Webcams
```

Direct `.mp4` links also work:

```
https://example.com/your-video.mp4
```

## Quick reference

| Slide content | Smart Slide type |
| - | - |
| Question + A, B, C… options | Single choice poll |
| Question + A, B, C… options + `__` after one answer | Quiz with a correct answer |
| Question ending in `??` + options | Multiple choice poll |
| Question containing `(yes/no)` | Yes/No poll |
| Question containing `(true/false)` | True/False poll |
| Question with no options | Typed response poll |
| YouTube, Vimeo, or `.mp4` URL | External video |

## Learning Analytics Dashboard

All poll and quiz responses are aggregated automatically in the [Learning Analytics Dashboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard). The dashboard shows response distributions per question and, for quiz questions, a per-student view of correct vs. incorrect answers.

## Try it out

To experiment with Smart Slides, download this sample slide deck and upload it in BigBlueButton:

* [BigBlueButton Sample Smart Slides](https://docs.google.com/presentation/d/1cqj8jOuaSmTjFh3zj0aT7o52sPI3cDH5-rF-gxm4vBY/edit?slide=id.g179c55560b9_0_99#slide=id.g179c55560b9_0_99)

Look for the Smart Slides button when BigBlueButton detects a supported pattern.


# Accessing the Administrator Panel
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/accessing-the-administrator-panel

It it important to note that only user(s) who have been assigned the Administrator role have access to the Administrator Panel. Once you are logged...

## It it important to note that only user(s) who have been assigned the Administrator role have access to the Administrator Panel.

Once you are logged in as an Administrator your account drop down will have a new option titled **Organization:**

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-09-19_at_3.22.12_PM.png" />

When selected, your Organization Settings menu will open. There are four sub-menus in total (located to the left of the Manage User panel):

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-09-19_at_3.20.21_PM.png" />

**Manage Users \[1], Server Recordings \[2], Site Settings \[3],** and **Roles** **\[4]**

* **Manage Users \[1]:** quickly manager users and accounts associated with your Personal Rooms instance.
* **Server** **Recording \[2]:** easily access all recordings associated with Personal Rooms.
* **Site Settings \[3]:** customize your Personal Rooms instance. Set a logo, theme colour, and registrations methods (to name a few).
* \*\*Roles \[4]: \*\*edit or create new roles and assign permissions.


# Managing Recordings 
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/managing-recordings

Administrators can use the Server Recordings menu to view, search, sort, rename, and delete or email all recordings made by user accounts. 

## Administrators can use the Server Recordings menu to view, search, sort, rename, and delete or email all recordings made by user accounts.

This article covers how to [access the Server Recordings](#access-server-recordings) where you can:

* [View, search & sort recordings](#view-search--sort-recordings)
* [Rename recordings](#rename-recordings)
* [Set recording visibility](#recording-visibility)
* [Edit or delete recordings](#email-or-delete-recordings)

## Access Server Recordings

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_10.29.15_AM.png" />

Select \*\*Organization \*\*from your account drop down.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.06.28_AM.png" />

Next choose **Server Recordings** from the Administrator menu options (located in the upper left hand corner next to the users listing).

**IMPORTANT NOTE: If your Personal Rooms instance has several accounts with many rooms and/or recordings, this page may take some time to load or may not load.**

## View, Search & Sort Recordings

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.10.14_AM.png" />

The **Server Recordings** menu will, by default, list recordings in chronological order based on the date they were recorded.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.12.30_AM.png" />

Recording playback and statistics reports are located under the **Formats** column of the recordings server menu.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.13.05_AM.png" />

**To view a recording playback** select \*\*"video"\*\*from the format options. A new tab will open and the recording playback will load for viewing.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.12.51_AM.png" />

**To view the statistics report** from the recorded session select **"statistics"** from the format options. A new tab will open for viewing.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.08.25_AM.png" />

Use the **Search Bar** to filter based on the recording name, length, users, recording owner (room owner), visibility, and format. You can also **Sort** recordings based on the recording name, length, users, and visibility.

## Rename Recordings

Administrators (and the room owner) can rename room recordings that appear in the server recordings listing.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.07.26_AM.png" />

Locate the recording you wish to rename and hover over the current title/name, select the **Edit Icon.**

You can now edit or rename the recording. Once complete, click anywhere outside of the grey area to save the changes.

## Recording Visibility

Administrators (and the room owner) can change a recording's visibility.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.17.47_AM.png" />

By default all recordings are **Unlisted.** Only users who have the direct recording URL can view it.

Changing the visibility to **Public** allows anyone with the meeting room link access to the recording playback; users will see a recordings menu on the page where they joined the live session.

## Email or Delete Recordings

Administrators (and the room owner) can **Email or Delete** recordings.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-24_at_11.17.29_AM.png" />

Select the \*\*Vertical Ellipsis \*\*or **Hamburger Menu** located to the right of the recording you wish to email or delete.

 It is important to note that selecting **Email** will open the email launcher you have installed on your desktop (outlook for example). It does not provide a direct recording URL.

Selecting \*\*Delete \*\*will permanently delete the recording and its statistic report.


# Managing Users 
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/managing-users

Administrators can use the Manage Users menu to view, search, sort, and edit all user accounts created. This article covers how to access the Manage...

## Administrators can use the Manage Users menu to view, search, sort, and edit all user accounts created.

This article covers how to [access the Manage Users menu](#accessing-the-manager-users-menu) where you can:

* [View, search & sort user accounts](#search--sort)
* [Delete, ban & edit user accounts](#delete-ban-or-edit-user-accounts)

## Accessing the Manager Users Menu

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.08.37_PM.png" />

Select **Organization**from your account drop down.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.39.54_AM.png" />

By default the **Manage Users** menu will open.

## Tabs

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.42.09_AM.png" />

The **Manage Users** menu separates account owners into four specific categories or **Tabs** . Click the specific tab for a listing of users under each.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.58.18_AM.png" />

The four **Tabs** or categories of users are:

1. **Active \[1]**: Lists all active user accounts, this is the default tab listing when the Manage Users menu is opened.
2. **Pending \[2]**: Lists all user accounts that are awaiting an Administrator's approval .
3. **Banned \[3]**: Lists all users who were denied permission to create an account or who were banned from their Personal Rooms account by an Administrator .
4. **Deleted \[4]**: Lists all users whose accounts were deleted by an Administrator .

## Search & Sort

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.43.01_AM.png" />

The **Manage Users** menu will, by default, list users in chronological order based on the date they were added to your Personal Rooms instance. All times are UTC.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.39.31_AM.png" />

Use the **S\*\*\*\*earch Bar** to filter based on name, user name (email), authenticator or user creation date.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-12-19_at_10.40.51_AM.png" />

To filter based on role, select the specific role you wish to view from the **Role**column. You should see only the users with the assigned role selected.

## Delete, Ban, or Edit User Accounts

Administrators can Delete, Ban, or Edit each user account registered to their Personal Rooms instance.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.27.39_PM.png" />

Select the **Vertical Ellipsis**or **H\*\*\*\*amburger Menu** located to the right of each user account.

To delete an account, select **Delete** from the account options.

It is important to note that this will remove the account from your Personal Rooms instance, however, does not prevent the user from signing up in the future with the same credentials.

To ban an account, select **Ban** from the account options.

This will both remove the user account and prevent the user from using the banned credentials to sign up for your Personal rooms instance in the future.

To edit an account, select **Edit**from the account options, and an edit user menu will open.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.34.31_PM.png" />

Administrators can edit the ******Account Name \[1], Account Email \[2], Account Role \[3], and add a Profile Picture \[4]****** to the account.

When editing an account **Role \[3]** it is important to note that though a user may be assigned multiple roles, only the role with the highest priority will be used to determine the user's account permissions.


# Site Settings 
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/site-settings

Administrators are able to customize the look and function of their Personal Rooms instance through the Site Settings. 

## Administrators are able to customize the look and function of their Personal Rooms instance through the Site Settings.

This article covers how to [access your Personal Rooms Site Settings](#accessing-your-site-settings) and customize the following:

* [Branding image and colour scheme](#branding-image-and-colour-scheme)
* [Registration methods](#registration-methods)
* [Authentication](#authentication)
* [Default recording visibility](#default-recording-visibility)

## Accessing your Site Settings

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.08.37_PM.png" />

Select \*\*Organization \*\*from your account drop down.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.42.06_PM.png" />

Next choose **Site Settings** from the Administrator menu options (located in the upper left hand corner to the left of the users listing).

## Branding Image and Colour Scheme

Administrators can change the default **Branding** **Image** which is displayed in the upper left hand corner of your Personal Rooms instance.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.48.40_PM.png" />

Replace the default image URL and select \*\*Change Image. \*\*You may need to refresh the page for the changes to appear.

**IMPORTANT NOTE: The image must have a public web address**

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.47.20_PM.png" />

To customize the **Primary Colour** theme of your Personal Rooms instance select **Regular** from the options available.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_12.47.29_PM.png" />

A colour palette **Editor** will open. Here you can select a new primary colour. The palette editor enables you to drag the colour bar, select a specific colour, or enter a specific colour hex code.

Be sure to select \*\*Save \*\*to apply the changes to your account.

The primary colour is the palette Personal Rooms uses as the basis for styling components such as buttons, links, and icons.

Once the primary colour theme has been updated, the **Secondary (lighten)** and \*\*Tertiary (darken) \*\*colour options will automatically adjust. You can also change the secondary (lighten) and tertiary (darken) colours individually.

## Registration Methods

Personal Rooms has three main registration methods; [open registration](#open-registration), [join by invitation](#join-by-invitation), and [approve/decline](#approve-decline). Each registration method cannot be combined and applied to all users who attempt to register for an account under your Personal Rooms instance.

Administrators can configure these registration methods and make changes to them at anytime.

### Open Registration

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.15.34_PM.png" />

This registration method allows any individual with a valid email address and access to your Personal Rooms URL link the ability to sign up and create an account.

### Join by Invitation

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.15.44_PM.png" />

Join by invitation disables the open registration. Only those individuals who have received an email invitation from an Administrator have the ability to sign up and create an account.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_4.23.06_PM.png" />

Once this registration method is enabled, Administrators can **Invite a user** by navigating back to the **Manage Users** menu, and select the \*\*Invite User \*\*button located to the right of the menu search bar.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_4.24.01_PM.png" />

Enter the user email, then send multiple invites by entering emails separated by a comma. The invitee(s) will receive an email invitation to sign up for their Personal Rooms account.

### Approve Decline

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.15.54_PM.png" />

This registration method, much like [Open Registration](#open-registration), allows any individual with a valid email address and access to your Personal Rooms URL link the ability to sign up, however, that user must also be approved by an Administrator to create a Personal Rooms account and access features.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_4.25.31_PM.png" />

When a user attempts to create an account, they are set to **Pending** in the **Manage Users** menu. The Administrator will receive an email notification when a new user signs up.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_4.25.46_PM.png" />

The pending user(s) can be Approved or Declined by accessing the **Vertical Ellipsis** or **Hamburger Menu** to the right of the listing.

If a user is approved, they will receive an email notification that their account is now accessible to them.

If a user is declined, they will be set to the Banned state; a banned user cannot sign in or access any features in Personal Rooms with the credentials they signed up with.

## Authentication

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.16.02_PM.png" />

Personal rooms authentication is set to be **Disabled** by default. Any user with the Meeting Room invitation link can join that room once it has been started by the Room Owner.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.16.12_PM.png" />

An Administrator can **Enable** authentication for rooms, however, this would require that users with the invite link be signed into their own Personal Rooms accounts.

## Default Recording Visibility

All recordings created by users have two visibility settings that can be updated by the Administrator (and Room Owner).

### Unlisted

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.16.19_PM.png" />

By default, recordings are set to **Unlisted** toanyone with the direct recording URL. Users would need to be provided this link directly from the Room Owner or an Administrator.

### Public

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.16.27_PM.png" />

When the default is set to **Public** all users with the original Meeting Room invite link will have access to the recording and any future recordings made in the same Meeting Room.

Users will see their own Recordings List where they can view recordings.

## Room Limits

This setting allows an Administrator to limit the number of Meeting Rooms users with accounts can create.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-16_at_2.15.27_PM.png" />

By default, users are allowed to create and manage as many Meeting Rooms as they like. To restrict this, select one of the available options.

**IMPORTANT NOTE: If users have already created more rooms than the limit subsequently applied, the user will not be able to start any sessions for the Meeting Rooms that are above the limit based on creation date.**

**For example: If a user creates 10 Meeting Rooms and the room limit is subsequently changed to 5, the 5 oldest Meeting Rooms become inaccessible**


# Can I delete my personal rooms?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/can-i-delete-my-personal-rooms

Yes — room owners can delete a personal room from the Room Menu, which also deletes every recording associated with that room.

Yes. As the owner of a Personal Room, you can delete it at any time.

<Warning>
  Deleting a personal room also deletes every recording associated with that room. The action cannot be undone.
</Warning>

For example, here is a room called "Welcome to Greenlight".

<img alt="Personal room titled Welcome to Greenlight" />

To delete the room, select the **Room Menu** **\[1]** and select **Delete** **\[2]**. A confirmation dialog appears.

<img alt="Delete confirmation dialog for a personal room" />

Selecting **I'm sure, delete this room** removes the room and all of its recordings.


# Can I invite attendees to my meetings?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/can-i-invite-attendees-to-my-meetings

Yes — Personal Rooms owners can invite attendees using the Invite Participants link or share the in-session invite from the chat.

Yes. As the owner of a Personal Room, you can invite attendees in two ways: using the [**Invite Participants**](#invite-with-the-invite-participants-link) link before the session, or sharing the [**Personal Room Invite Link**](#share-the-in-session-invite-link) once the session is running.

## Invite with the Invite Participants link

<img alt="Invitegreenlight" />

To invite attendees before the session starts, copy the **Copy Join Link \[1]** link and send it via email or message.

If a participant opens the invite link before you have started the session, they see a waiting message.

<img alt="Waiting" />

When you, the owner, enter the room and start the BigBlueButton session, anyone on the waiting page is joined into the session automatically.

## Share the in-session invite link

When the session is running, the **Personal Room Invite Link** **\[1]** and the **Join by URL link \[2]** appears in the session's title, showing the details of the meeting in a tab. Both options will send guests an invite to the meeting room.

<img alt="Invitedetails" />

You can select **Invite a guest to join a meeting \[1]** to find an invite link and a button to invite guests to the session by email.

<img alt="Screenshot 2026 08 28 At 9 08 58 PM" />


# How do I create my own rooms?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/how-do-i-create-my-own-rooms

Create additional Personal Rooms beyond the default Home Page, modify room settings, and configure user behaviour for each room.

Personal Rooms accounts come with a default **Home Page** room. You can [create additional rooms](#create-a-new-room), [modify room settings](#modify-room-settings), and [configure user behaviour](#configure-user-settings) for each room.

The Home Page displays each time you log in to your Personal Rooms account.

<img alt="Personal Rooms Home Page after logging in" />

## Create a new room

To create a new room, select the **+ New Room** button. Enter a name for the new room when prompted.

<img alt="Prompt to enter a room name when creating a new room" />

New rooms appear in the **Room Manager**, ordered by the date they were created.

## Modify room settings

To modify a room, select the settings tab.

<img alt="Settings tab on a personal room" />

<img alt="Room settings panel for changing the room name and generating room and moderator access codes" />

| # | Setting |
| - | - |
| 1 | Change the room name. Select **Update** to save. |
| 2 | **Generate an optional room access code** — select **Generate** to create an access code that you can copy into an email or message along with the room link. To remove an existing code, select the **trash bin** icon. |
| 3 | **Generate an optional moderator access code** — select **Generate** to create a code that lets users join as moderators. To remove an existing code, select the **trash bin** icon. |

## Configure user settings

<img alt="User settings panel with toggles for recording, sign-in, moderator approval, mute on join, and delete room" />

You can configure each room with custom settings to match your use case:

* **Allow room to be recorded** **\[1]** — by default, rooms are not recordable. Enable this to let the moderator record the meeting.
* **Require users to be signed in before joining** **\[2]** — requires users to sign in to Personal Rooms before they can join.
* **Require moderator approval before joining** **\[3]** — prompts the moderator to approve each join request.
* **Allow any user to start this meeting** **\[4]** — by default, only the room owner can start a room. Enabling this lets any user with the room link start the room.
* **All users join as moderators** **\[5]** — by default, only the room owner enters as moderator. Enabling this gives moderator privileges to anyone with the room link.
* **Mute users when they join** **\[6]** — automatically mutes users joining with a microphone. Users can unmute themselves once in the meeting.
* **Delete Room** **\[7]** — delete the room. A confirmation prompt appears.

<Warning>
  Deletion is permanent and cannot be undone. Deleting a room also deletes all recordings associated with it.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Delete room confirmation dialog" />
</Frame>

## Enter or manage an existing room

To enter or manage a room, select it in the **Room Manager**.

<img alt="Room manager listing existing personal rooms to enter or manage" />


# How do I find / manage recordings?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/how-do-i-find-manage-recordings

View and manage Personal Rooms recordings per room or across your entire account, and set per-recording visibility, format, and access.

You can view and manage Personal Rooms recordings two ways: per room ([Room recordings](#recordings-for-the-selected-room)) or across your account ([All recordings](#all-recordings)).

## Recordings for the selected room

When you log in, the currently selected room is your **Home Room**. The bottom panel lists all recordings for the selected room.

<img alt="Recordings tab listing recordings for the selected room with name, date, length, attendees, visibility, and format columns" />

| # | Column |
| - | - |
| 1 | **Recordings tab** — shows all recordings for this room. |
| 2 | Search for a recording. |
| 3 | Recording name (matches the room name) and the date it was recorded. |
| 4 | Length in minutes. |
| 5 | Number of attendees in the session. |
| 6 | Visibility of the recording. |
| 7 | Available formats for the recording. |
| 8 | Quickly copy the recording link. |
| 9 | Quickly delete the recording. |

### Recording visibility

By default, recordings are **unlisted** — only the room owner can access them. To allow attendees with the room link to access a recording, change visibility from the dropdown.

<img alt="Recording visibility dropdown showing Public, Protected, Published, and Unpublished options" />

* **Public** — appears on the Public Recordings page on the Room Join page. The link can be shared with anyone.
* **Protected** — must be viewed from within Personal Rooms.
* **Published** — accessible to anyone who has the link.
* **Unpublished** — not accessible to anyone.

<Note>
  Setting a recording to **Public** also makes the meeting statistics available.

  An **Unpublished** recording can still be viewed by anyone given the playback URL directly, even without access to the room link.
</Note>

### Recording formats

Up to four formats are produced for each processed recording. Selecting **presentation** or **video** opens the playback in a new tab. Selecting **statistics** or **notes** also opens in a new tab.

Anyone with access to the room can view the available recording formats. The **statistics** format provides an overview of attendance, participation, and engagement.

<Note>
  If you use Blindside Networks hosting, deleted recordings can be recovered up to 14 days after the **live** session.
</Note>

## All recordings

To view every recording across your account, select the home icon, then the **Recordings** tab.

<img alt="Home icon" />

<img alt="Recordings tab on the home view showing all recordings across the account" />

You can also select **Recordings** from the navigation toolbar in the upper-right corner of the interface.

<img alt="Recordings link in the navigation toolbar" />

The **All recordings** view lists every recording in chronological order.


# Personal Rooms
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/overview

Create and manage your own BigBlueButton rooms

Create permanent meeting rooms with unique URLs that you can use anytime, without needing an LMS integration.

<Columns>
  <Card title="Personal Rooms" icon="door-open" href="/docs/help/personal-rooms/overview-of-personal-rooms-interface">
    Learn to create rooms, invite attendees, and manage recordings
  </Card>

  <Card title="Getting Started" icon="rocket" href="/docs/help/getting-started/getting-started-with-personal-rooms">
    Set up authentication with Google, Office 365, or SAML
  </Card>

  <Card title="Admin" icon="gear" href="/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/accessing-the-administrator-panel">
    Configure site settings and manage users
  </Card>
</Columns>


# Overview of Personal Rooms interface
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/personal-rooms/overview-of-personal-rooms-interface

The Personal Rooms main page contains four areas: Account Information, the Home Button, the Personal Room Manager, and the Recordings Manager.

After you sign in to Personal Rooms, the main page displays four key areas: **Account Information**, the **Home Button**, the **Personal Room Manager**, and the **Recordings Manager**.

<img alt="Personal Rooms main page with Account Information, Home Button, Personal Room Manager, and Recordings Manager areas highlighted" />

* **Account Information** **\[1]** — update your profile, access the help center, and (if applicable) open the Administrator Panel.
* **Home Button** **\[2]** — quickly return to the home page that lists all of your Personal Rooms.
* **Personal Room Manager** **\[3]** — shows the room title and lets you start, join, or copy the room link, alongside last-session information.
* **Recordings Manager** **\[4]** — shows recordings, meeting statistics, and the invite link for the selected room. Processed recordings appear here once they are available.

## Recordings Manager

<img alt="Recordings Manager listing recordings with name, date, length, attendees, visibility, and format columns" />

| # | Column |
| - | - |
| 1 | **Recordings tab** — shows all recordings for this room. |
| 2 | Search for a recording. |
| 3 | Recording name and the date and time of the session. |
| 4 | Length of the recording in minutes. |
| 5 | Number of users who attended. |
| 6 | Visibility of the recording. |
| 7 | Available formats. |
| 8 | Quickly copy the recording link. |
| 9 | Quickly delete the recording. |


# Can I prevent users from downloading a recording?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/can-i-prevent-users-from-downloading-a-recording

BigBlueButton does not block recording downloads. Browser controls, network capture, and screen recording each give a determined user a way around any restriction.

BigBlueButton Enhanced viewers can right-click on a playing recording and select **Save video as…** to download it. BigBlueButton does not block this action.

The download menu is a function of the browser. Disabling it with JavaScript would not stop a determined user from downloading the recording: they could inspect network traffic to find the underlying URL, or screen-record the playback into a separate video file.

For these reasons, we have not added a restriction on **Save video as…** in BigBlueButton.


# Frequently asked questions
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/faq

Common questions about BigBlueButton Enhanced pricing, concurrent sessions, and capacity.

## How is the cost of BigBlueButton Enhanced calculated?

BigBlueButton Enhanced costs are based on the maximum number of concurrent sessions (or, in some K12 cases, concurrent users) running at any one time. A concurrent session is any BigBlueButton session with two or more users that runs for more than 15 minutes.

In practice, you have multiple sessions throughout the day. The more that run at the same time, the more capacity we provision — so we charge based on concurrency.

A concurrent session is not tied to a specific user. There is no second login layer. Instructors and students join a BigBlueButton session by selecting a link in the LMS, and the session opens in their browser.

For pricing details, contact your LMS provider or [reach out to us directly](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact/).

## Can I track my concurrent sessions?

Yes. We can provide a URL that displays a graph of your peak concurrent sessions.

## What happens if I exceed the number of concurrent sessions?

BigBlueButton continues to work — there is no hard-coded limit on concurrent sessions. However, if your usage is significantly above the number of purchased concurrent sessions, we will reach out to discuss adding capacity.


# How do I download a recording?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/how-do-i-download-a-recording

BigBlueButton Enhanced recordings can be downloaded as a single 720p video file by right-clicking the playback area and selecting Save video as.

BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting from Blindside Networks lets you download a recording as a single video file.

## Download a BigBlueButton Enhanced recording

To download a recording, right-click within the playback area and select **Save video as…**. The downloaded file is a 720p `.mp4` (MPEG-4) video, approximately 150 MB per hour of recording.

<img alt="Right-click menu showing Save video as on a recording" />

The downloaded video does not include videos shared via the **Share video** option, nor does it include chat. To save chat messages, scroll to the end of the recording in the browser and copy and paste the final chat panel.

## BigBlueButton Essentials recordings are not downloadable

BigBlueButton Essentials recordings play back in the browser as a synchronized combination of web components — there is no single video file to download.

You can still download the video component of the recording (webcams and audio), but the presentation portion (uploaded slides, whiteboard, and polling) uses a combination of JavaScript, PNG images, and SVG, and only runs in the browser.

To get downloadable, permanent recordings as single video files, upgrade to BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting.


# How do I invite a guest to a live meeting?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/how-do-i-invite-a-guest-to-a-live-meeting

Moderators on BigBlueButton Enhanced can invite a guest into the active session by sharing a per-session invite link.

If your account has been upgraded to BigBlueButton Enhanced from Blindside Networks, moderators can invite a guest into a live session using a per-session invite link.

## Invite a guest

When you join a BigBlueButton session, the **Session Details** window appears automatically.

<img alt="Session Details window showing the meeting title and Invite a guest option" />

<Tip>
  To re-open the **Session Details** window later, select the **Meeting Title** **\[1]**.
</Tip>

If you joined as a moderator, the guest invite option is available. Select **Invite a guest to join this meeting** **\[2]** to open a new tab containing the invite link.

<img alt="Guest invite tab showing the invite link to copy and share" />

Copy the **invite link** **\[1]** and email it to your guest so they can join directly.

<Note>
  By default, the invite link is only valid for the current active session. To make the link valid for the current session **and** all future sessions for this meeting, contact Blindside Networks.
</Note>

## Join a session via a guest invite link

When a guest opens the invite link, the **Join a running meeting** prompt appears.

<img alt="Join a running meeting prompt with name field and Join button" />

To join, enter your **name** **\[1]** and select **Join** **\[2]**. The guest enters the session as a viewer with the **(guest)** prefix on their name.

<img alt="Guest joined the BigBlueButton session as a viewer with the (guest) prefix on their name" />


# How long until my recording is available for viewing?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/how-long-until-my-recording-is-available-for-viewing

Recordings take up to 24 hours to process. If your recording is missing, check that you used the Start/Resume record button during the session.

Recordings take up to 24 hours to process. If you do not see your recording within a few hours, it is likely still in the processing queue and will be available shortly.

## If you still do not see a recording

During the session, you must indicate which segments to include in the recording by selecting the **Start/Resume record** button. If you did not select **Start/Resume record** at any point during the session, no recording was captured and the session cannot be recovered.


# Key Takeaways
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/key-takeaways

Moderators can end a session by having students write the key takeaways, vote on each other's, and publish the results to the class.

At the end of a session, most educators tell the class what the key topics were. Key Takeaways inverts that: it asks your students to supply the takeaways themselves, then has them rate each other's. Think of it as a digital exit ticket.

The whole activity takes only a few minutes, and it gives you insight into what your class actually took away from the session.

Here's a quick overview video of how it works.

<iframe title="BigBlueButton Key Takeaways" />

The steps are:

1. **[Configure the activity](#1-configure-the-activity)**
2. **[Monitor the takeaways](#2-monitor-the-takeaways-as-they-arrive)** as they arrive
3. **[Transition to voting](#3-transition-to-voting)**
4. **[Publish and assess](#4-publish-and-assess)**

## Using Key Takeaways

### 1. Configure the activity

Set how many key takeaways each student provides, how long they have to write them, and how long the voting phase runs.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Key Takeaways activity configuration screen" />
</Frame>

### 2. Monitor the takeaways as they arrive

Every response appears live as students submit it, so you can see what the class thought was important before anyone votes. You can delete any response you do not want carried into the voting phase.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Key Takeaways activity with student input and live results" />
</Frame>

### 3. Transition to voting

To move the class into the voting phase, select **Transition to voting**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Key Takeaways screen with writing phase timer" />
</Frame>

Each student is shown two takeaways at random from their classmates and asked which one is better. Over about eight rounds of these head-to-head comparisons, the strongest takeaways rise to the top — and students evaluate the material a second time as they choose.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Key takeaway voting with two options and timer" />
</Frame>

Here you see the highest-voted key takeaways rising to the top.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Student comments with vote counts displayed" />
</Frame>

### 4. Publish and assess

End the activity to see the summary of key takeaways.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Key takeaways voting results and sharing options" />
</Frame>

Publish the results, anonymously if you prefer, and they post to the chat.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Published key takeaways posted to the chat" />
</Frame>

The summary tells you exactly what your students took from the session. If they missed something important, you have a teachable moment to cover it before class ends.

Each student sees an indicator of their rank, and the student whose takeaway received the most votes is notified.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Ranked #1 as Graceful Lynx" />
</Frame>

## Pedagogical value

Having students produce the takeaways is far more effective than listing the takeaways for them. Writing one is active recall, and rating a classmate's is a second pass over the same material.


# Learning Challenge
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/learning-challenge

Moderators can run a live, timed quiz during a session to check understanding, watch responses come in, and share results by name or anonymously.

Moderators can run a Learning Challenge — a live, timed quiz — during a session for quick checkpoints and formative assessment. By combining active recall with spaced repetition, a challenge improves learning outcomes while keeping the class engaged.

Here's a quick overview video of how it works.

<iframe title="BigBlueButton Learning Challenge Overview" />

There are four steps to running a Learning Challenge.

1. **[Use AI to generate questions](#1-use-ai-to-generate-questions)** ahead of your class.
2. **[Paste in the questions](#2-paste-in-the-questions)** and set the time limit.
3. **[Start the challenge](#3-start-the-challenge)** and monitor the live results as students submit their answers.
4. **[End the challenge](#4-end-the-challenge)** and share the results with student names or pseudonyms.

## 1. Use AI to generate questions

As shown in the video above, you can use your favorite AI to generate a formatted list of questions on any topic — anatomy, algebra, English, or anything else you teach.

Here are three examples to get you started.

<Prompt description="Generate 4 grade 7 English questions, all multiple choice.">
  ```text theme={null}
  Generate 4 grade 7 English questions. Make them all have a single correct answer using MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  OUTPUT
  Return ONLY a valid JSON array — no markdown, no code fences, no commentary.
  First character [, last character ].

  SCHEMA
  [
    {
      "questionText": string,
      "questionType": "TEXT" | "MULTIPLE_CHOICE",
      "questionAnswer": string,   // required for BOTH types
      "questionMetadata": { "options": [string, string, string, string] }  // MULTIPLE_CHOICE only; omit for TEXT
    }
  ]
  No other fields. There is no correctIndex — the correct choice is the option
  that questionAnswer matches.

  TEXT
  - questionAnswer is 1-2 words: no article, no punctuation, no units or
    notation. "Atlantic" not "The Atlantic Ocean"; "3" not "x=3".
  - Ask so exactly one surface form is natural. If the answer could reasonably
    be written more than one way, make it MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  MULTIPLE_CHOICE
  - questionAnswer must be character-for-character identical to one option.
    Matching is case-insensitive and trims outer whitespace, nothing else:
    "Atlantic Ocean" does not match the option "Atlantic".
  - Exactly 4 distinct options, no letter or number prefixes ("YAML", never
    "B) YAML"). Options may be phrases; the 1-2 word limit is TEXT-only.
  - Options are mutually exclusive, comparable in length and specificity, and
    all plausible to someone who has not studied the material. The correct one
    must not be the longest. No "all/none of the above".
  - Vary the correct option's position across the set.

  GENERAL
  - Math in plain text: ^ exponent, / division, * multiplication, sqrt() root,
    +/- plus-minus, <= and >= comparison. No LaTeX, MathML, or Unicode math
    symbols — never √, ±, ×, ÷, ≤, ≥, or superscript digits.
  - Questions must match the stated topic and level. Include at least one
    MULTIPLE_CHOICE question.

  EXAMPLE OUTPUT
  [{"questionText":"What is Brazil's capital?","questionType":"TEXT","questionAnswer":"Brasília"},{"questionText":"Which ocean borders Brazil?","questionType":"MULTIPLE_CHOICE","questionAnswer":"Atlantic","questionMetadata":{"options":["Pacific","Atlantic","Indian","Arctic"]}}]

  ```
</Prompt>

<Prompt description="Generate 4 grade 9 Algebra questions.">
  ```text theme={null}
  Generate 4 grade 9 Algebra questions.

  OUTPUT
  Return ONLY a valid JSON array — no markdown, no code fences, no commentary.
  First character [, last character ].

  SCHEMA
  [
    {
      "questionText": string,
      "questionType": "TEXT" | "MULTIPLE_CHOICE",
      "questionAnswer": string,   // required for BOTH types
      "questionMetadata": { "options": [string, string, string, string] }  // MULTIPLE_CHOICE only; omit for TEXT
    }
  ]
  No other fields. There is no correctIndex — the correct choice is the option
  that questionAnswer matches.

  TEXT
  - questionAnswer is 1-2 words: no article, no punctuation, no units or
    notation. "Atlantic" not "The Atlantic Ocean"; "3" not "x=3".
  - Ask so exactly one surface form is natural. If the answer could reasonably
    be written more than one way, make it MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  MULTIPLE_CHOICE
  - questionAnswer must be character-for-character identical to one option.
    Matching is case-insensitive and trims outer whitespace, nothing else:
    "Atlantic Ocean" does not match the option "Atlantic".
  - Exactly 4 distinct options, no letter or number prefixes ("YAML", never
    "B) YAML"). Options may be phrases; the 1-2 word limit is TEXT-only.
  - Options are mutually exclusive, comparable in length and specificity, and
    all plausible to someone who has not studied the material. The correct one
    must not be the longest. No "all/none of the above".
  - Vary the correct option's position across the set.

  GENERAL
  - Math in plain text: ^ exponent, / division, * multiplication, sqrt() root,
    +/- plus-minus, <= and >= comparison. No LaTeX, MathML, or Unicode math
    symbols — never √, ±, ×, ÷, ≤, ≥, or superscript digits.
  - Questions must match the stated topic and level. Include at least one
    MULTIPLE_CHOICE question.

  EXAMPLE OUTPUT
  [{"questionText":"What is Brazil's capital?","questionType":"TEXT","questionAnswer":"Brasília"},{"questionText":"Which ocean borders Brazil?","questionType":"MULTIPLE_CHOICE","questionAnswer":"Atlantic","questionMetadata":{"options":["Pacific","Atlantic","Indian","Arctic"]}}]

  ```
</Prompt>

<Prompt description="Generate 4 questions on the anatomy of the heart valves, all multiple choice.">
  ```text theme={null}
  Generate 4 questions on the anatomy of the heart valves. Make them all have a single correct answer using MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  OUTPUT
  Return ONLY a valid JSON array — no markdown, no code fences, no commentary.
  First character [, last character ].

  SCHEMA
  [
    {
      "questionText": string,
      "questionType": "TEXT" | "MULTIPLE_CHOICE",
      "questionAnswer": string,   // required for BOTH types
      "questionMetadata": { "options": [string, string, string, string] }  // MULTIPLE_CHOICE only; omit for TEXT
    }
  ]
  No other fields. There is no correctIndex — the correct choice is the option
  that questionAnswer matches.

  TEXT
  - questionAnswer is 1-2 words: no article, no punctuation, no units or
    notation. "Atlantic" not "The Atlantic Ocean"; "3" not "x=3".
  - Ask so exactly one surface form is natural. If the answer could reasonably
    be written more than one way, make it MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  MULTIPLE_CHOICE
  - questionAnswer must be character-for-character identical to one option.
    Matching is case-insensitive and trims outer whitespace, nothing else:
    "Atlantic Ocean" does not match the option "Atlantic".
  - Exactly 4 distinct options, no letter or number prefixes ("YAML", never
    "B) YAML"). Options may be phrases; the 1-2 word limit is TEXT-only.
  - Options are mutually exclusive, comparable in length and specificity, and
    all plausible to someone who has not studied the material. The correct one
    must not be the longest. No "all/none of the above".
  - Vary the correct option's position across the set.

  GENERAL
  - Math in plain text: ^ exponent, / division, * multiplication, sqrt() root,
    +/- plus-minus, <= and >= comparison. No LaTeX, MathML, or Unicode math
    symbols — never √, ±, ×, ÷, ≤, ≥, or superscript digits.
  - Questions must match the stated topic and level. Include at least one
    MULTIPLE_CHOICE question.

  EXAMPLE OUTPUT
  [{"questionText":"What is Brazil's capital?","questionType":"TEXT","questionAnswer":"Brasília"},{"questionText":"Which ocean borders Brazil?","questionType":"MULTIPLE_CHOICE","questionAnswer":"Atlantic","questionMetadata":{"options":["Pacific","Atlantic","Indian","Arctic"]}}]

  ```
</Prompt>

Select **Copy prompt** to copy any of these examples, then paste it into your favorite AI.

Each prompt has two parts: a topic section that states what you want questions about, and the formatting instructions below it that tell the AI to return the questions in the format the Learning Challenge expects. For technical details, that format is JavaScript Object Notation, or JSON for short.

To write a prompt for your own topic, copy the formatting instructions below and add your own topic section above them. For example, `Generate 5 grade 4 questions on the water cycle.`

<Prompt description="Formatting instructions only — add your own topic section above them.">
  ```text theme={null}
  OUTPUT
  Return ONLY a valid JSON array — no markdown, no code fences, no commentary.
  First character [, last character ].

  SCHEMA
  [
    {
      "questionText": string,
      "questionType": "TEXT" | "MULTIPLE_CHOICE",
      "questionAnswer": string,   // required for BOTH types
      "questionMetadata": { "options": [string, string, string, string] }  // MULTIPLE_CHOICE only; omit for TEXT
    }
  ]
  No other fields. There is no correctIndex — the correct choice is the option
  that questionAnswer matches.

  TEXT
  - questionAnswer is 1-2 words: no article, no punctuation, no units or
    notation. "Atlantic" not "The Atlantic Ocean"; "3" not "x=3".
  - Ask so exactly one surface form is natural. If the answer could reasonably
    be written more than one way, make it MULTIPLE_CHOICE.

  MULTIPLE_CHOICE
  - questionAnswer must be character-for-character identical to one option.
    Matching is case-insensitive and trims outer whitespace, nothing else:
    "Atlantic Ocean" does not match the option "Atlantic".
  - Exactly 4 distinct options, no letter or number prefixes ("YAML", never
    "B) YAML"). Options may be phrases; the 1-2 word limit is TEXT-only.
  - Options are mutually exclusive, comparable in length and specificity, and
    all plausible to someone who has not studied the material. The correct one
    must not be the longest. No "all/none of the above".
  - Vary the correct option's position across the set.

  GENERAL
  - Math in plain text: ^ exponent, / division, * multiplication, sqrt() root,
    +/- plus-minus, <= and >= comparison. No LaTeX, MathML, or Unicode math
    symbols — never √, ±, ×, ÷, ≤, ≥, or superscript digits.
  - Questions must match the stated topic and level. Include at least one
    MULTIPLE_CHOICE question.

  EXAMPLE OUTPUT
  [{"questionText":"What is Brazil's capital?","questionType":"TEXT","questionAnswer":"Brasília"},{"questionText":"Which ocean borders Brazil?","questionType":"MULTIPLE_CHOICE","questionAnswer":"Atlantic","questionMetadata":{"options":["Pacific","Atlantic","Indian","Arctic"]}}]

  ```
</Prompt>

Your topic section can be as specific as you like about the questions you want. Here's a more detailed example to place above the formatting instructions.

<Prompt description="A detailed topic section — place it above the formatting instructions.">
  ```text theme={null}
  Generate exactly 10 advanced assessment questions about Red Hat OpenShift for experienced platform engineers, SREs, and Kubernetes administrators.

  SCOPE

  Focus exclusively on advanced OpenShift topics, including:

  - Cluster architecture
  - CVO and MCO
  - Operators and OLM
  - SCC and RBAC
  - Authentication and OAuth
  - Networking (OVN-Kubernetes, Routes, Ingress, Egress, NetworkPolicy)
  - Storage (CSI, PV/PVC, Local Storage, ODF)
  - etcd
  - Image Registry
  - BuildConfigs and Tekton Pipelines
  - OpenShift GitOps (Argo CD)
  - Monitoring, Alertmanager, and Logging
  - Cluster upgrades and disaster recovery
  - Performance tuning
  - Advanced Cluster Management (ACM)
  - OpenShift Virtualization
  - Production troubleshooting and operational scenarios

  QUESTION GUIDELINES

  - Emphasize scenario-based, troubleshooting, and operational questions.
  - Test OpenShift-specific internals rather than generic Kubernetes knowledge.
  - Include architecture, configuration, diagnostics, and "what should you do next?" scenarios.
  - Ensure each question has exactly one correct answer.
  - Avoid beginner, definition-based, or ambiguous questions.
  - Mix TEXT and MULTIPLE_CHOICE questions.
  - Use realistic distractors, and vary the position of the correct option
    across the set — do not leave it in the same slot each time.

  DIFFICULTY

  - 30% Advanced
  - 50% Expert
  - 20% Very Expert

  ```
</Prompt>

<Note>
  Some AI chatbots wrap their answer in a code fence — a line of three backticks before and after the questions. If yours does, delete those two lines before pasting. The list must start with `[` and end with `]`.
</Note>

## 2. Paste in the questions

To launch a challenge, select **+**, then select **Learning Challenge**.

Paste in the JSON list of questions, then set the time limit. In the example below, we pasted in questions about English grammar and set the time limit to 120 seconds, or two minutes.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Learning Challenge question creation interface" />
</Frame>

## 3. Start the challenge

Once you select **Start Challenge**, your students see the first question. They can navigate through the questions and see the time remaining in the upper right-hand corner.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Grammar quiz question about identifying an adverb" />
</Frame>

As students answer, you see live analytics for the challenge.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Leaderboard showing Student A's quiz progress" />
</Frame>

## 4. End the challenge

Once your students have submitted their answers, you see a preview of the results.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Learning Challenge results sharing options" />
</Frame>

If you select **Share anonymously**, each student is given a randomly generated pseudonym, such as "Eager Butterfly" or "Mighty Seahorse", that only they know. The results are published with everyone's pseudonyms, but each student only knows their own.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Learning Challenge Results: Outstanding" />
</Frame>

Each student sees their pseudonym along with the correct answers for any questions they got wrong.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Ranked #1 as Outstanding Albatross in a quiz" />
</Frame>

<Tip>
  A typical Learning Challenge takes only a few minutes. You can create a set of challenges ahead of class with a few prompts and have them ready whenever you want to give students a chance to test their knowledge.
</Tip>

<Note>
  The Learning Challenge is low-stakes quizzing. Results do not pass back to the gradebook in your LMS.
</Note>


# Options for giving students visibility of other students' webcams
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/options-for-giving-students-visibility-of-other-students-webcams

Some BigBlueButton Essentials accounts hide other students' webcams from students. To make all webcams visible, the instructor can share their screen or upgrade to BigBlueButton Enhanced.

On some BigBlueButton Essentials accounts, students cannot see other students' webcams in regular sessions. Webcams still play a major role in the lecture in those configurations:

1. Students can share their own webcams.
2. Educators can see every student's webcam.
3. Students can see the instructor's webcam.
4. Students can see each other's webcams in breakout rooms.

To make every webcam visible to every student — important in K12 — the instructor can share their screen while viewing the webcam strip. Students see the screen share and, in turn, see all the webcams from the instructor's view.

For a walkthrough, see [Showing webcams through screen sharing](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hG-F3nOhdnU\&feature=youtu.be).

To enable cross-student webcam visibility directly, contact your LMS administrator about upgrading to BigBlueButton Enhanced.


# Overview
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features

How BigBlueButton Enhanced goes beyond the open source version of BigBlueButton

**BigBlueButton Enhanced** is Blindside Networks' premium hosted version of BigBlueButton.  If you already use BigBlueButton Essentials in Moodle, Canvas, or Schoology, when you upgrade to BigBlueButton Enhanced you these additional capabilities to increase learning outcomes:

* [Recordings](#recordings)
* [Meeting analytics](#meeting-analytics)
* [Active learning activities](#active-learning-activities)
* [Personal rooms](#personal-rooms)
* [Guest invites](#guest-invites)
* [Dial-in number](#dial-in-number)
* [Account customization](#account-customization)
* [Increased capacity](#increased-capacity)

To upgrade, contact your LMS provider — Instructure, Schoology, or your Moodle Partner — who can resell BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting directly. You can also [contact us](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact) directly.

## Recordings

### Recordings as video files

Recordings are produced as a single video file containing all session content except chat (displayed beside the video during playback) and videos shared via **Share video**.

### Recordings are permanent

Recordings do not expire. They persist until you delete them. We can also set up a policy to:

* automatically remove recordings a set number of days after creation, or
* automatically remove recordings a set number of days after they were last accessed.

There is no cost for storage of the first 10,000 recordings, which for 95% of customers is all they will need.

### Recordings are downloadable

See how to [download a recording](/docs/help/premium/how-do-i-download-a-recording).

### Recordings are protected (optional)

When recording links are passed to your LMS, our servers can generate temporary links that are only viewable by a single person — preventing students from copying and sharing recordings.

### Integration with Canvas Studio

If you have Canvas Studio, we can configure your account to [automatically upload recordings into Studio and share them with the instructor's account](/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-integration-with-canvas-studio).

## Meeting analytics

For each recorded session, instructors see a **statistics** playback format that answers:

* Who attended?
* How long did they attend?
* What activities did they participate in (talking, chatting, raising hand, emojis)?
* How did they respond to polling?

All data is downloadable as CSV. All times in the statistics reports are in UTC.

## Active learning activities

Two built-in activities let instructors check what students learned without leaving the session.

### Learning Challenge

A live, timed quiz for quick checkpoints and formative assessment. Paste in a list of questions, set a time limit, watch the results arrive live, then publish a leaderboard with student names or anonymous pseudonyms.

See [Learning Challenge](/docs/help/premium/learning-challenge).

### Key Takeaways

A digital exit ticket. Rather than telling the class what the key topics were, students write the takeaways themselves and vote on each other's, and the highest-rated ones post to the chat.

See [Key Takeaways](/docs/help/premium/key-takeaways).

## Personal rooms

If you authenticate instructor email accounts via Office 365 or Google Apps, we can provide an interface outside your LMS to create rooms, invite users, and manage recordings. Personal rooms have permanent URLs.

See the [Personal Rooms admin guide](/docs/help/personal-rooms/admin/site-settings).

## Guest invites

Moderators can [invite guests](/docs/help/premium/how-do-i-invite-a-guest-to-a-live-meeting) into a live session.

## Dial-in number

Every BigBlueButton Enhanced account in North America includes a default dial-in number. For Canada, Europe, and Asia/Pacific, we can provide a dial-in number for an additional cost.

## Account customization

As part of BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting, Blindside Networks can customize a range of account-level settings. To request any of the changes below, contact your Blindside Networks Customer Success Manager with a description of what you need.

### Webcams

#### Don't record student webcams

We can configure your account so student webcams are not visible in the recordings.

#### Custom default webcam background

For additional branding, provide a PNG or JPEG image at an HTTPS URL, and we can configure your account to use it as the default webcam background. Users can still upload their own background.

### Recording policies

#### Auto-expire recordings

If your school requires recordings to be deleted automatically after a set period — for example, two years (730 days) — we can configure auto-deletion. Tell us the retention you need.

#### Protected recording links

We can enable Protected Recording Links so viewers cannot copy and share recording links.

#### Disable recording

We can configure your account so no sessions are recorded.

#### Automatic transfer of recordings to an S3 bucket

We can set up a workflow so that once our infrastructure finishes processing a recording, it is automatically transferred to a write-only S3 bucket hosted by you, along with a manifest of the recording metadata.

### Privacy

#### Default lock settings

Each instructor can use **Lock viewers** to restrict viewer access to specific features.

<img alt="Lock viewers panel with toggles for restricting viewer features" />

We can set any of these lock settings as defaults for your account. For example, you can configure every session to start with these locks in effect:

* Microphone
* Private chat messages
* Edit shared notes

<img alt="Default lock settings applied at session start, restricting microphone, private chat, and shared notes editing" />

#### Ability to unmute users

By default, moderators cannot unmute another user's microphone, for privacy. However, for K12 customers teaching young students, we can enable moderators to unmute student microphones directly.

#### Mute users on join

By default, users joining with a microphone are unmuted. We can change the default so all users join muted.

#### Hide viewer names in recording chat

We can conceal student names in the chat of recordings. Student and viewer names appear as "Viewer" while moderator and instructor names display as normal.

### Branding

#### Custom welcome message

When users join a session, they can select the meeting title to see additional information. The left column is visible to everyone; the right column is only visible to moderators.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Session details window showing the welcome message columns" />
</Frame>

We can replace these branding elements with whatever text you choose.

#### Show dial-in number only to moderators

All North American accounts include a default dial-in number, visible by default to both instructors and students. Some schools — especially K12 — prefer to make the dial-in number visible only to moderators, for example in a separate moderator-only welcome message.

<img alt="Moderator-only welcome message with dial-in number" />

We can set whatever moderator-only welcome message you want.

#### Custom logo

We can place your logo in the upper-left corner of the BigBlueButton session.

<img alt="BigBlueButton session with a custom logo placed in the upper left-hand corner" />

#### Custom default presentation

You can send us a PDF that will appear as the default presentation on all your sessions.

### Session behaviour

#### Automatically end session when no moderators are present

We can set an interval (such as 2 minutes) after which BigBlueButton automatically ends a session that no longer has a moderator present. This is useful in K12 to avoid scenarios where the educator gets disconnected — for example, loses their internet connection — and students are left unsupervised.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Session ended due to absence of moderator" />
</Frame>

## Increased capacity

Compared with BigBlueButton Essentials, you have more capacity in in BigBlueButton Enhanced

* Number of users per session increased to 300
* Number of concurrent sessions based on your purchase, not capacity (we can handle 1,000's of concurrent sessions)
* Choose from four regions in the world for hosting of meetings and storage of recordings: North America, Canada, Euorpe, and Asia/Pacific


# My BigBlueButton
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/premium/personal

Want to try out BigBlueButton personally?  We have an option for that too.

Are you learning BigBlueButton and want to have your own space to try out with others?

Blindside Networks offers [my.bigbluebutton.com](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/) -- a free, personal version of BigBlueButton available to anyone in the world.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

At [my.bigbluebutton.com](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/), you can try out BigBlueButton with two different approaches

* **Instant** - Launch a meeting immediately.  No sign-up needed. Useful for trying BigBlueButton for a few minutes. The meeting ends 10 minutes is reached.
* **Personal** - Create a free account with your email, Google, or Microsoft sign-in. You get a permanent personal room with a shareable link you can reuse with up to 5 people.

The following table shows the differences between Instant and Free.

| Feature | Instant | Personal |
| - | - | - |
| Account required | No | Yes (free) |
| Personal room | - | Yes |
| Shareable room link | - | Yes |
| Max participants | 2 | 5 |
| Session length | 10 minutes | 30 minutes |
| Sign-in options | - | Email, Google, Microsoft |

Visit [my.bigbluebutton.com](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/) to try it out.

## Need more?

<Note>
  Need more participants, longer sessions, recordings, or account customization? See [BigBlueButton Enhanced](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features) — managed hosting from Blindside Networks.
</Note>


# Raise Hands
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/raise-hands

Users raise their hand to signal the presenter, and presenters can lower individual hands or all hands at once.

Any user can raise their hand to signal the presenter — for example, to ask a question or request to speak. Presenters can lower a single hand or lower all hands at once.

To raise your hand, select the hand icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Raisehand" />
</Frame>

A hand emoji appears on your user icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Presenterraisehand" />
</Frame>

A prompt also appears in the top-right corner confirming that your hand is raised.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Raisehandprompt" />
</Frame>

When you lower your hand, the emoji disappears from your user icon and another prompt confirms the change.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Lowerhandprompt" />
</Frame>

## Lower another user's hand

As a presenter, select a user's name in the user list to lower that one hand, or select **Lower all hands** to lower every raised hand at once.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Lowerhands" />
</Frame>


# Share an External Audio/Video Link
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link

Presenters can share an external audio or video URL with everyone in the session and control playback for all users.

Presenters can share an external audio or video URL with everyone in the session. BigBlueButton synchronizes playback for all users so the presenter can [start the video](#start-sharing-a-video), pause it, scrub the playhead, and [stop sharing](#stop-sharing-the-video) when done.

BigBlueButton supports URLs from:

* YouTube
* Vimeo
* Instructure Media (previously called Arc)
* Twitch and Dailymotion
* Panopto
* A direct link to an `.mp4` file, for example [https://ubuntu.bigbluebutton.org/test/FredDixon.mp4](http://ubuntu.bigbluebutton.org/test/FredDixon.mp4)
* A direct link to an `.mp3` file, for example [https://ubuntu.bigbluebutton.org/test/audioSample.mp3](http://ubuntu.bigbluebutton.org/test/audioSample.mp3)
* A direct link to an `.mp4` or `.mp3` file shared in Dropbox (get a free Dropbox account at [dropbox.com/basic](https://www.dropbox.com/basic) to upload your videos)

<Warning>
  Externally shared videos do not appear in the processed recordings.
</Warning>

## Start sharing a video

To share a video, select the **'+' Actions menu** **\[1]**, then **Share an external video** **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Externalvideo" />
</Frame>

In the dialog box, paste your video URL and select **Share a new video**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 4 24 08 PM" />
</Frame>

The video appears in the presentation area, and BigBlueButton synchronizes playback for everyone in the session. As presenter, you can:

* Start or pause the video
* Move the playhead
* Stop sharing

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 4 17 22 PM" />
</Frame>

## Stop sharing the video

To stop sharing, select the **X** in the upper-right corner of the presentation area.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Stopsharing" />
</Frame>

The presentation area reverts to the previous presentation.


# Share my screen
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-my-screen

Presenters can share their entire screen, an application window, or a single browser tab with everyone in the session.

Presenters can share their entire screen, an application window, or a single browser tab in addition to uploading a presentation. The shared screen appears in the presentation area for all attendees, and is captured in the recording if the session is being recorded.

<Note>
  Mobile devices such as iPhone, iPad, and Android do not support screen sharing.
</Note>

## Confirm your presenter role

By default, the first moderator to enter a BigBlueButton session receives the presenter role. If you are a viewer, request the presenter role from a moderator before continuing.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Presenter icon shown over a user avatar in the users list" />
</Frame>

When a user has the presenter role, the **presenter icon** appears over their avatar in the user list.

## Start sharing your screen

To begin sharing, select the **Screen Share** button in the media bar.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screen Share button in the BigBlueButton media bar" />
</Frame>

Your browser prompts you to share your entire screen, an application window, or a browser tab.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Browser screen sharing prompt" />
</Frame>

After you confirm your selection, your shared screen appears in the presentation area.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Presentation area showing the shared screen" />
</Frame>

To stop sharing, select the **Screen Share** button again.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Stop screen sharing by selecting the Screen Share button" />
</Frame>

<Tip>
  Open the applications or browser windows you intend to share **before** you start screen sharing. Doing so makes them available in the browser's selection dialog.
</Tip>

## Choose a sharing option for your browser

The next steps depend on which browser you use.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Chrome">
    Chrome prompts you to choose **Chrome Tab** **\[1]**, an application **Window** **\[2]**, or **Entire Screen** **\[3]**. After choosing, select **Share** **\[4]** to begin sharing with attendees.

    <Frame>
      <img alt="Chrome screen sharing dialog with Chrome Tab, Window, Entire Screen, and Share options" />
    </Frame>

    Pick the option that matches what you want to share:

    * **Entire Screen** — Attendees see your screen even when you switch to another browser or application. Use this option if you plan to move between several applications without reconfiguring screen sharing.
    * **Window** — Attendees see only the selected application. If you navigate outside that application, attendees do not see those actions. This option uses less bandwidth than sharing your entire screen and works well when you stay in a single application.
    * **Chrome Tab** — On the latest version of Chrome, switch tabs quickly by opening another tab and selecting **Share this tab instead**.

    <Warning>
      **Error 1136: Permission to capture the screen needs to be granted.** If Chrome is partway through an update when you start screen sharing, the browser may not register the request. To fix it, restart Chrome, allow the update to finish, then start screen sharing again.
    </Warning>

    <Frame>
      <img alt="Error 1136 permission to capture the screen message" />
    </Frame>
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Firefox">
    Firefox asks for screen sharing permission. Select **Allow** to continue.

    <Frame>
      <img alt="Firefox screen sharing permission prompt" />
    </Frame>

    If the window you want to share is not in the list, it is likely not open. Open the application or window, then start screen sharing again.
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

## What attendees see

Attendees see your shared screen displayed in the presentation area of the BigBlueButton interface — it no longer loads in a separate window.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Shared screen displayed in the BigBlueButton presentation area" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  As the presenter, your own BigBlueButton interface shows a mirrored broadcast of the shared screen. Attendees viewing another tab or application do not see this duplicated view.
</Note>

<img alt="Mirrored broadcast view of the shared screen" />


# Shared notes as a presenter
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/shared-notes-presenter

Anyone in a session can collaborate in Shared Notes, export the contents to common file formats, or pin the notes onto the whiteboard.

Anyone in a BigBlueButton session can [contribute to Shared Notes](#contribute-to-shared-notes), [export the notes](#export-the-notes-to-a-file) to a file, or — as a presenter — [pin or convert the notes](#pin-or-convert-notes-to-the-whiteboard) onto the whiteboard.

## Contribute to Shared Notes

<Frame>
  <img alt="Sharednotesuser" />
</Frame>

To open the notes panel, select **Shared Notes** **\[1]** in the left sidebar. **Formatting Options** **\[2]** such as **Bold** and **Italic** appear at the top of the panel. To reveal undo, redo, and download buttons, select the **'+'** **\[3]** button.

When another user edits the notes, an alert appears on the **Shared Notes** icon.

## Export the notes to a file

To download the current notes, select the **Export** **\[4]** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Exportnotes" />
</Frame>

A list of available formats appears. Select your preferred format and save the file to your device.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Notesnotification" />
</Frame>

## Pin or convert notes to the whiteboard

As presenter, you can pin the live notes onto the presentation area or convert them into a slide.

To open the notes options, select the **Notes options** menu in the upper-right corner.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 6 56 13 PM" />
</Frame>

### Pin notes onto the whiteboard

To pin the notes to the presentation area, select **Pin notes onto whiteboard**. Every user in the session can continue typing in the pinned notes.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Pinnoteswhite" />
</Frame>

To unpin and return the notes to the sidebar, select the **X** in the upper-right corner.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 08 18 PM" />
</Frame>

### Convert notes to a presentation slide

To post the notes onto the presentation as a PDF slide, select **Convert notes to presentation**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Convertnotes" />
</Frame>

The notes appear in the presentation area as a document.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 6 53 05 PM" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  * Shared Notes are not captured in the recording.
  * Each user must open their own Shared Notes panel.
  * Contributions to Shared Notes are anonymous.
</Note>


# Upload a presentation and enable for download
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download

Presenters can upload documents into the presentation area, switch between presentations, and enable any of them for viewers to download.

Presenters can [upload a presentation](#upload-a-presentation) into the BigBlueButton presentation area, [enable it for download](#enable-a-presentation-for-download) so viewers can save a copy, and [switch between uploaded presentations](#switch-between-presentations) during the session.

## Confirm your presenter role

To upload documents and enable them for download, you must have the presenter role. By default, the first moderator to enter the session receives the presenter role. If you are a viewer, request the presenter role from a moderator.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 4 34 45 PM" />
</Frame>

When a user has the presenter role, the **presenter icon** appears over their avatar in the user list.

## Verify document size and format

Each document can be up to **30 MB or 150 pages**. You can upload multiple documents as long as each one is under those limits.

BigBlueButton accepts:

* Office documents — `.doc`, `.docx`, `.pptx`
* Text documents — `.txt`
* Images — `.png`, `.jpg`
* Adobe Acrobat documents — `.pdf`

For the best results, convert your documents to **PDF** before uploading.

## Upload a presentation

<Frame>
  <img alt="Uploadpres" />
</Frame>

To open the uploader, select the **Actions menu** **\[1]** in the lower-left corner of the presentation window, then **Upload/Manage presentations** **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 4 39 56 PM" />
</Frame>

The uploader lets you **drag and drop** **\[3]** files into the panel or **browse for files** **\[4]** on your computer.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Uploadconfirm" />
</Frame>

When uploading one or more files, set the file you want shown by default by selecting the **green circle** to the right of that document, then select **Confirm** to upload.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 5 02 40 PM" />
</Frame>

A prompt confirms the upload while BigBlueButton converts the files. You can return to **Upload/Manage presentations** at any time to change which presentation is shown.

Larger documents take longer to convert and load.

## Enable a presentation for download

A presenter can enable any uploaded document for download by viewers at any time during the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 16at4 57 15PM" />
</Frame>

You can offer the presentation as a **.pptx**, a **PDF**, or a **PDF with annotations**.

If you have multiple presentations uploaded, you can choose which ones to enable for download.

## What viewers see

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 16at4 44 49PM" />
</Frame>

Viewers download enabled documents using the **download icon** in the lower-left corner of their presentation area.

## Switch between presentations

After uploading multiple presentations, you can switch between them at any time during the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Upmenu" />
</Frame>

To switch, select the **Actions menu** **\[1]** in the lower-left corner, then choose a **presentation from the uploaded list** **\[2]**.


# Use Polling or Quizzing
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-pollingquzzing

Presenters can launch polls and quizzes during a session to gauge understanding, gather feedback, and review answers with the class.

Presenters can [start a poll](#start-a-poll) to engage students, run informal pop quizzes, or gather quick feedback during a session. Presenters can also [run a quiz](#run-a-quiz) — a poll with a correct answer marked.

By default, the first moderator to enter the session receives the presenter role. If you are a viewer, request the presenter role from a moderator before starting a poll.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 17 At 1 34 30 PM" />
</Frame>

When a user has the presenter role, a **presenter icon** appears over their avatar in the user list.

## Start a poll

<Frame>
  <img alt="Findpolling" />
</Frame>

To open the polling panel, select the **Actions menu** **\[1]** in the lower-left corner of the presentation window, then **Start a poll/quiz** **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 37 29 PM" />
</Frame>

The **Poll** option is selected by default. Enter a question in the **Write your question** **\[1]** field, then pick one of the **Response Types** **\[2]** to set how users answer.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 35 26 PM" />
</Frame>

For example, type **"Are insects animals?"** **\[1]**, choose **Yes / No / Abstention** **\[2]**, then select **Start poll** **\[4]** to push the poll to all users.

After you start the poll, every user receives a prompt to respond.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 29 09 PM" />
</Frame>

As users respond — for example, by selecting **Yes** — the presenter sees live results.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 45 54 PM" />
</Frame>

The poll panel shows each student's **Yes** response next to their name.

<Note>
  Select **Anonymous Poll** before starting the poll to hide student names from the results.
</Note>

### Publish poll results

Selecting **Publish results** posts the results to both the public chat and the current slide.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Pollresults" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 21 54 PM" />
</Frame>

Once published to the slide, the results behave like any other whiteboard object — you can move, resize, duplicate, or delete them.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 51 58 PM" />
</Frame>

Published results also appear in the recording, in both the chat and the slide.

## Run a quiz

A quiz is a poll with a correct answer marked. To start one, select **Quiz** **\[1]** in the polling panel — the response types update to show multiple-choice options.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 09 52 PM" />
</Frame>

To launch the quiz, enter a question such as **"Are insects animals?"** **\[1]**, choose **Yes / No / Abstention** **\[2]**, mark **True** **\[3]** as the correct answer, then select **Start quiz** **\[4]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 12 13 40 PM" />
</Frame>

Users see a prompt to respond to the quiz.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 32 27 PM" />
</Frame>

The presenter sees live results. Because the quiz has a correct answer, BigBlueButton indicates whether each student selected it.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 17 At 1 48 47 PM" />
</Frame>

Published quiz results show the correct answer alongside each response, unless you clear **Display correct answers to all participants** before publishing.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 33 04 PM" />
</Frame>

### Quiz with Smart Slides

You can also run a quiz directly from a Smart Slide. The video below walks through the workflow.

<iframe title="YouTube video player" />


# Use the presentation controls
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/presenter-guide/use-the-presentation-controls

Presenters can navigate slides, zoom and fit content, and enable the multi-user whiteboard for everyone in the session.

Presenters can [navigate slides](#navigate-slides), zoom and fit content, and enable the multi-user whiteboard for everyone. For annotation tools, see [Use the multi-user whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard).

## Confirm your presenter role

By default, the first moderator to enter the session receives the presenter role. If you are a viewer, request the presenter role from a moderator before continuing.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 4 34 45 PM" />
</Frame>

When a user has the presenter role, the **presenter icon** appears over their avatar in the user list.

## Navigate slides

Once content is uploaded into the presentation area, you can control how it displays and which slide is shown.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Slidesbar" />
</Frame>

The presenter's slide control panel sits below the presentation display, above the media controls.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Slidesbaroptions" />
</Frame>

To move through your slides, use the **Slide Navigator** **\[1]**:

* Select the **forward** arrow (`>`) to advance.
* Select the **backward** arrow (`<`) to go back.
* Select a slide number from the **dropdown** to jump to a specific slide.

## Enable the multi-user whiteboard

To let every user annotate the slide, select the **multi-user whiteboard** button **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Whiteboardslidesbar" />
</Frame>

A prompt appears in the upper-right corner confirming that multi-user mode is on, and the multi-user whiteboard icon highlights in the toolbar.

## Zoom and fit content

The presenter control panel also includes zoom and fit options:

* **Zoom in (+) or Zoom out (-)** **\[3]** — change the zoom level of the slide.
* **Fit-to-Width** **\[4]** — fit the slide to the width of the presentation area.

<Tip>For portrait documents, use **Fit-to-Width** to enlarge the text. You can then drag with the hand tool to scroll up and down the document.</Tip>

<img alt="fittopage.gif" />


# Camera as Content
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/releases/camera-as-content

Presenters can share a webcam as the main presentation content — useful for displaying a physical whiteboard or focusing on a particular area of a hybrid classroom.

Presenters in hybrid classes can share a webcam as the main presentation content. Use this to display a physical whiteboard, focus on a particular student, or highlight an area of the classroom.

<Note>
  The camera being shared as content cannot already be in use as your main webcam.
</Note>

## Share a camera as content

To share a camera as the main content:

1. Select the **action button**.
2. Select **Share camera as content**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Camascontent" />
</Frame>

The webcam settings dialog appears. Select an available webcam.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Webcam settings dialog" />
</Frame>

The selected camera appears in the presentation area for everyone in the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Camera shown in the presentation area" />
</Frame>

## Stop sharing the camera as content

1. Select the **action button**.
2. Select **Stop camera as content**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Stopcontent" />
</Frame>


# Disable self-view of webcam
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/releases/disable-self-view-of-webcam

Any user sharing a webcam can hide their own self-view to reduce on-camera fatigue, while their webcam continues to broadcast to others.

Any user sharing a webcam can hide their own self-view to reduce the fatigue of watching themselves on camera. Disabling self-view affects only your own display — your webcam continues to broadcast to other users.

## Disable self-view

To disable self-view:

1. Select the **caret** next to your name.
2. Select **Disable self-view**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Diview" />
</Frame>

A placeholder image of yourself appears with an overlay reminding you that **your webcam is still active and others see you**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 50 42 AM" />
</Frame>

## Enable self-view

To turn self-view back on:

1. Select the **caret** next to your name.
2. Select **Enable self-view**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enview" />
</Frame>


# How do I use my browser's built-in speech recognition?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-my-browsers-built-in-speech-recognition

Enable per-user automatic transcription using the browser's speech recognition, or view captions for any user who has enabled it.

Any user can enable automatic transcription of their own voice using their browser's built-in speech recognition. Other users in the session can view those transcriptions without enabling transcription themselves.

## Enable transcription for your voice

By default, the automatic transcription language selector is disabled. To have your voice transcribed, select the desired language from the dropdown in the join audio dialog.

<img alt="Language dropdown in the join audio dialog" />

When transcription is active, a **CC** icon appears next to your name in the "who is talking" indicator.

<img alt="CC indicator next to user name" />

## View transcriptions for other users

When at least one user has transcription enabled, a **CC** button appears for everyone. Select it to view captions for every speaker who has the **CC** indicator. You do not need your own audio transcribed to view captions for others.

The location of the **CC** button depends on your device.

On mobile, find the **CC** button in the three-dot menu in the top-right corner.

<img alt="CC button in the mobile three-dot menu" />

On desktop, the **CC** button is in the lower-left corner.

<img alt="CC button in the lower-left on desktop" />

Desktop users can change the caption display language by selecting the up arrow on the **CC** button.

<img alt="Language menu on the CC button" />

<Note>
  Automatic transcription is only available in browsers that support Speech Recognition — Chrome, Edge, and Safari. Joining from another browser displays a warning at the bottom of the join audio dialog.

  <img alt="Unsupported browser warning" />
</Note>

## Enable the feature on your server

To enable automatic transcription for users of Chrome, Edge, and Safari, edit `/etc/bigbluebutton/bbb-html5.yml` and add the following to the `public:` section, then restart BigBlueButton:

```yaml theme={null}
public:
  app:
    audioCaptions:
      enabled: true
```


# How do I use the multi-user whiteboard
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard

When the presenter enables the multi-user whiteboard, all users in the BigBlueButton session can annotate the whiteboard simultaneously.

The presenter can [enable the multi-user whiteboard](#enable-the-multi-user-whiteboard) so every user in the session can annotate at the same time. Once enabled, everyone has access to the [styles toolbar](#use-the-styles-toolbar) for changing how annotations look, the [tools toolbar](#use-the-tools-toolbar) for drawing and selecting, and the [actions submenu](#use-the-actions-submenu) for arranging objects.

## Enable the multi-user whiteboard

To turn on multi-user mode, select the **multi-user whiteboard** button on the toolbar.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 02 24 AM" />
</Frame>

The whiteboard controls appear on the right-hand side of the presentation area, and all users can now annotate the slide.

<Frame>
  <img alt="2.6_Whiteboard.gif" />
</Frame>

The whiteboard provides two toolbars: a **Styles toolbar** **\[1]** for changing how annotations look, and a **Tools toolbar** **\[2]** for selecting, drawing, and arranging.

<Frame>
  <img alt="newwhiteboard.png" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Boardmenu" />
</Frame>

## Use the styles toolbar

The **Styles toolbar** controls the appearance of your annotations — color, fill, opacity, dash pattern, and size — along with undo and redo.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Styles" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="stylesbarlabels.png" />
</Frame>

| Control | What it does |
| - | - |
| **Color** | Sets the color of your annotations |
| **Fill** | Fills selected objects with color |
| **Opacity** | Changes the opacity of an object |
| **Dash** | Sets the dash pattern of an object |
| **Size** | Sets the font size: (S)mall, (M)edium, (L)arge, or Extra Large (XL) |

## Use the tools toolbar

The **Tools toolbar** holds the drawing, selection, and shape tools, plus an actions submenu for arranging objects.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Tools" />
</Frame>

<Tip>Hold **Shift** to select multiple objects.</Tip>

| # | Tool | What it does |
| :- | :- | :- |
| 1 | **Selection** | Select annotations |
| 2 | **Hand** | Move your view of the whiteboard |
| 3 | **Pen** | Draw freehand lines |
| 4 | **Highlighter** | Highlight text on the board |
| 5 | **Eraser** | Swipe across objects to erase them |
| 6 | **Arrow** | Draw an arrow |
| 7 | **Text** | Type text |
| 8 | **Sticky Notes** | Place a sticky note to type on |
| 9 | **Shapes** | Place a shape on the whiteboard. To change the shape, open the **Shapes submenu** **\[10]** |
| 10 | **Shapes submenu** | Choose from a range of shapes, use the line tool, or place a frame on the whiteboard |
| 11 | **Actions submenu** | Open the actions submenu (see below) |

### Use the actions submenu

The actions submenu lets you duplicate, rotate, align, group, and re-order objects on the whiteboard.

| Icon | Action |
| - | - |
| <img alt="mceclip16" /> | Duplicate |
| <img alt="mceclip17" /> | Rotate |
| <img alt="mceclip18" /> | Unlock |
| <img alt="mceclip19" /> | Unlock Aspect Ratio |
| <img alt="mceclip20" /> | Group |
| <img alt="mceclip21" /> | Move to Back |
| <img alt="mceclip22" /> | Move Backward |
| <img alt="mceclip23" /> | Move Forward |
| <img alt="mceclip24" /> | Move to Front |
| <img alt="mceclip25" /> | Reset Angle |
| <img alt="mceclip26" /> | Align Left |
| <img alt="mceclip27" /> | Align Horizontal Center |
| <img alt="mceclip28" /> | Align Right |
| <img alt="mceclip29" /> | Stretch Horizontal |
| <img alt="mceclip30" /> | Distribute Horizontal |
| <img alt="mceclip31" /> | Align Top |
| <img alt="mceclip32" /> | Align Vertical Center |
| <img alt="mceclip33" /> | Align Bottom |
| <img alt="mceclip34" /> | Stretch Vertical |
| <img alt="mceclip35" /> | Distribute Vertical |


# Timer and Stopwatch
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/releases/timer-and-stopwatch

Presenters can display a countdown timer or count-up stopwatch to all participants, with an audible alarm when a timer elapses.

Presenters can display a [countdown timer](#timer) or [count-up stopwatch](#stopwatch) to all participants in the session. An audible alarm plays when a timer elapses.

## Activate a timer or stopwatch

1. Select the **action menu**.
2. Select **Activate timer/stopwatch**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Timerstop" />
</Frame>

The side panel updates to show the timer and stopwatch options.

### Stopwatch

<Frame>
  <img alt="Stopwatch options" />
</Frame>

### Timer

<Frame>
  <img alt="Timer options" />
</Frame>

All users see the active stopwatch or timer in the upper-right corner of the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Timer or stopwatch in the upper-right corner" />
</Frame>


# Cannot join audio on macOS after allowing browser permissions
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/after-allowing-the-browser-permissions-on-mac-os-i-am-still-unable-to-join-my-audio-in-bigbluebutton

Re-enable microphone access for your browser in macOS System Preferences so you can join audio in a BigBlueButton session.

Anyone joining a BigBlueButton session on macOS needs to grant the browser permission to use the microphone. If you previously denied that permission, macOS blocks audio even after the in-session prompts succeed.

## Grant microphone permission at the system prompt

<img alt="macOS microphone permission prompt" />

The first time you join a session after a system update, macOS prompts you to allow the browser to access your microphone.

To grant access, select **OK**.

If you selected **Don't Allow**, or you suspect you did, macOS blocks your microphone even after you allow access in the browser. Re-enable it in **System Preferences**.

## Re-enable microphone access for your browser

<img alt="macOS Apple menu" />

To open system settings, select the Apple menu and choose **System Preferences**.

<img alt="System Preferences window" />

To open privacy settings, select **Security & Privacy**.

<img alt="Microphone privacy settings with privacy, microphone, and application checkbox callouts" />

To find the microphone list, select the **Privacy** **\[1]** tab, then select **Microphone** **\[2]** from the sidebar.

A list of applications that have requested microphone access appears.

To allow your browser to use the microphone, check the box next to the application **\[3]**.

<Note>
  Restart the browser before rejoining the session so the new permission takes effect.
</Note>

You can now share your microphone in BigBlueButton.


# Blindside Networks Status Page
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/blindside-networks-status-page

View current and past BigBlueButton Network status updates on the Blindside Networks status page.

View current and past BigBlueButton Network status updates at [https://blindsidenetworks.statuspage.io/](https://blindsidenetworks.statuspage.io/).


# Client periodically disconnects/reconnects
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/client-periodically-disconnectsreconnects

Diagnose and resolve repeated disconnect/reconnect issues during a BigBlueButton session.

Any user can troubleshoot a BigBlueButton client that repeatedly disconnects and reconnects, which interrupts microphone, webcam, and screen sharing. This guide helps you isolate whether the cause is your internet connection, your computer, or a router or firewall setting.

An occasional disconnect is not unexpected. If the drop is momentary, you can rejoin the session by refreshing your browser tab.

<img alt="Browser refresh button location to the left of the URL bar" />

## Run a test session

<Tip>
  For a quick connectivity check before joining a full test session, run the self-test at [https://test.bigbluebutton.com/](https://test.bigbluebutton.com/). It checks your browser's ability to make network connections (especially WebRTC connections for media) to a BigBlueButton server.  The test page will give you a list of any failed attempts as well as the ability to download a PDF report of all tests.
</Tip>

To confirm whether the problem is reproducible, join a test session at [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/) using **Chrome** or **Firefox** on the desktop, or **Safari** on iOS.

Join the audio and share your webcam. If the connection holds, the original session may have had a transient issue.

If the test session also disconnects repeatedly, the cause is likely your internet connection, your computer, or a router or firewall.

## Test on a different network

To rule out your local network, connect through a different network while keeping everything else the same. A smart phone hotspot works well for this.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create a hotspot">
    Set up a temporary wireless hotspot on your smart phone.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Switch networks">
    Connect your computer to the phone's wireless hotspot.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Rejoin the test session">
    Open [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/) and join a test session again.
  </Step>
</Steps>

If the disconnects continue on the hotspot, the issue is likely with your computer rather than the network.

If the connection is stable on the hotspot, the issue is likely with your home or office router or firewall.

## Test your computer

If the hotspot test still disconnects, work through the following checks on your computer.

To rule out anti-virus interference, temporarily disable any real-time monitoring in your anti-virus software and rejoin the test session. Some anti-virus tools mistakenly close the browser's connection to the BigBlueButton server.

To rule out a browser-specific problem, test in both **Chrome** and **Firefox**.

To rule out a hardware-specific problem, try joining from a different computer on the same network.

## Resolve router or firewall issues

If the hotspot test was stable, focus on your router or firewall.

If you are behind a corporate firewall, ask your network administrator to [whitelist the BigBlueButton servers](/docs/help/faq/whitelisting-bigbluebutton-servers-for-the-firewall) using the wildcard domain name.

If you are connecting from home, your router may be mishandling IPv6. We have received reports from **Spectrum** customers experiencing periodic disconnects related to IPv6.

To resolve IPv6-related disconnects, [disable IPv6 on your computer or router](/docs/help/troubleshooting/how-to-disable-ipv6) and then retest at [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/).


# How to disable IPv6
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/how-to-disable-ipv6

Disable IPv6 on Windows, macOS, or your Spectrum router to stop your home connection from dropping BigBlueButton sessions.

If your connection to BigBlueButton repeatedly reconnects from home, your router may be inadvertently closing the connection. This is common on Spectrum networks in the US.

To resolve this, disable IPv6 on your computer or router using the steps below.

## Disable IPv6 on Windows 10

<Steps>
  <Step title="Open the network menu">
    Right-click the **Network <img alt="Windows 10 Network Icon" /> / Wi-Fi <img alt="Windows 10 Network Icon" />** icon in the bottom-right corner of your screen. A pop-up menu appears.

    <img alt="Open Network Settings" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Open the Network and Sharing Center">
    Select **Open Network and Sharing Center**. The Settings dialog appears.

    <img alt="Network Sharing Center" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Change adapter options">
    Select **Change adapter options**. A list of network adapters appears. Locate the active adapter — either **Ethernet** or **Wi-Fi**.

    <img alt="Network Adapters" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Open adapter properties">
    Right-click the active network adapter and select **Properties**.

    <img alt="Adapter Properties" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Disable IPv6">
    In the **Properties** window, scroll to **Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)**.

    <img alt="Properties Window" />

    Uncheck the **Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)** checkbox, select **OK** to save the changes, and restart your computer.
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Disable IPv6 on macOS

<Steps>
  <Step title="Open Network preferences">
    Open **System Preferences** and select the **Network** icon.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Select your network">
    Select the network you are using — usually labeled **Wi-Fi**.

    <img alt="Network preferences" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Open advanced settings">
    Select **Advanced…**.

    <img alt="Advanced button" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Open the TCP/IP tab">
    Select the **TCP/IP** tab.

    <img alt="TCP/IP tab" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Set IPv6 to link-local only">
    Open the **Configure IPv6** drop-down menu and set it to **Link-local only**.

    <img alt="Configure IPv6 menu" />
  </Step>

  <Step title="Save and restart">
    Select **OK**, then restart your Mac.
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Disable IPv6 on your Spectrum router

If you have the **rac2v1k** Spectrum router, you can disable IPv6 from the router's web-based interface.

To sign in, find the URL and password on the back of the router — typically [http://192.168.1.1](http://192.168.1.1/) with `admin`/`admin`.

Once signed in, select **Advanced** at the top, select **IPv6** on the left, and under **IPv6 LAN settings** choose **Disable**.

<img alt="Disable IPv6 on Spectrum router" />

Select **Apply**. After a few moments, the router confirms the update is complete. Try joining the BigBlueButton session again.


# Important Information for users of the BigBlueButton HTML5 Client
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/important-information-for-users-of-the-bigbluebutton-html5-client

This document contains important information for early users of the BigBlueButton HTML5 client. Earlier this year we announced that we will be...

## This document contains important information for early users of the BigBlueButton HTML5 client.

Earlier this year we announced that we will be transitioning all users to the BigBlueButton HTML5 client (no more Flash client) for (see [blog post](https://blindsidenetworks.com/2019/03/15/html5-client-is-coming/)).

This document contains the latest information on the BigBlueButton HTML5 client (referred hereafter as simply "HTML5 client").

## Table of Contents

1. [Recommended browsers](#recommended-browsers)
2. [Minimum bandwidth requirements](#minimum-bandwidth-requirements)
3. [Features still in development](#features-still-in-development)
4. [Differences from the Flash client](#differences-from-the-flash-client)
5. [Known issues/bugs](#known-issuesbugs)

The following article is actively updated, please be sure to check back regularly to ensure you are up to date.

## Recommended Browsers

The recommended browsers are

* **Desktop/Laptop:** Chrome or Firefox (latest versions)
* **Mobile iOS (12.2+):** Safari
* **Mobile Android (6.0+)**: Chrome

**At this time IE and EDGE browsers are not supported browsers.**

Java is no longer required for screen sharing.

## Minimum Bandwidth Requirements

### For all users, we recommend (a minimum of)

* 0.5 Mbits/s upload bandwidth
* 1.0 Mbits/sec download bandwidth

### For instructors wanting to share their screen, we recommend (a minimum of)

* 1.0 Mbits/s upload bandwidth
* 1.0 Mbits/sec download bandwidth

### The same bandwidth recommendations apply to **mobile devices:**

1. For data network, we recommended **4G LTE** for best results or **minimum 3G Network** to use audio, view presentation content and receive screen sharing.
2. For connection via wireless, we recommend **private** versus public networks where possible.
3. To reduce bandwidth usage, users can turn off webcams on their mobile devices (see below).

For a list of recommended settings for Desktop/Laptop users see: [Minimum Requirements for BigBlueButton](/docs/help/faq/what-are-the-minimum-requirements-for-bigbluebutton).

## Features still in development

These features were present in the Flash client and are not yet in the HTML5 client

* **Show Slide Thumbnails:** At this time the slide navigation does not show thumbnails when using the slide menu to navigate to specific slides.
* **Managing webcams:** The Flash client allowed users to individually close webcams.  This feature is not yet implemented in the HTML5 client.
* **Links in slides not clickable**: when uploading slides with clickable links, they could be clicked in the Flash client. Currently, they are not clickable in the HTML5 client.

## Differences from the Flash client

* **Layout Dropdown:** The Flash client had a layout menu that let moderators push down layout changes in windows to all viewers.  The HTML5 client does not use windows (it uses panels that show/hide).  We are going to add capabilities for the moderator to show/hide the presentation area in a future update.
* **Track users in breakout rooms**: The Flash client would inform moderators of which users were in which breakout room.

Currently, when webcams are shared in a session, a user can minimize the presentation area and have the shared webcams take over the presentation area (which is good for creating a video chat-type session).

To close the presentation, select the **"X"** located in the upper right hand corner of the presentation.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-03-04_at_3.31.21_PM.png" />

Once closed the webcam streams will take up the full screen of the BigBlueButton interface.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-03-04_at_3.43.21_PM.png" />

To restore the presentation and minimize the webcams, select the **Presentation Icon** located in the bottom right hand corner of the screen.

If no webcams are being shared in the meeting, the user cannot close the presentation window.

There is no limit on the number of webcams that can be shared, but there is a practical limit in terms of bandwidth -- probably 16 webcams is a good number.  At higher number of webcams you may see some webcams stop updating.

A user can disable all incoming webcam streams by selecting the Settings menu.

<img alt="Settings menu opened to access the Data savings options" />

and then choose "Data savings" and turn off "Enable webcams".

<img alt="Data savings panel with the Enable webcams toggle turned off" />

Clicking the "Save" button will then turn off all webcams (which is good when on a mobile device with limited bandwidth).

* **Shared Notes:** shared notes are now located in the side panel to the left of the presentation area where the users list and chat messaging are located. To view and edit the shared notes, click on the "Shared Notes" link.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-03-14_at_4.34.48_PM.png" />

* **Moderator Unmute:** Due to privacy concerns moderators are by default not able to unmute users (you can contact us to have this feature enabled for your account).
* **Multiuser Whiteboard between slides:** Currently, multiuser whiteboard only applies to the current slide.  When the presenter changes to another slide, they need to re-engage multi-user whiteboard.


# Known Issues
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/known-issues

These are the known issues with using BigBlueButton.

* **Audio and video in recordings out-of-sync.**  In BigBlueButton, the audio and video travel through two different channels.  In some recordings, they can be about a second out of sync.  A future update will transmit both audio and video on the same channel.
* **Connectivity issues with Spectrum Internet**.  We've seen issues with some customers of Spectrum Internet getting periodically disconnected after recent network updates.  The fix is to [disable IPV6](/docs/help/troubleshooting/how-to-disable-ipv6) on their router. 
* **Safari Mobile (iPad/iOS) does not allow users to share their screen.**  Currently, neither Android or iOS devices implement the screen share API for the browser.
* **Error 1136: Permission to capture the screen needs to be granted** If your chrome is open, and it's half way through updating, then screen-share will not be recognized and you might get this error. To fix, restart Chrome (and let it finish updating) and then you will be able to screen share again.


# LaTeX documents not converting correctly
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/latex-documents-not-converting-correctly

For some LaTeX documents, the mathematical symbols using bitmap fonts may not convert well (whereas OTF and TTF fonts are handled well). Using...

For some LaTeX documents, the mathematical symbols using bitmap fonts may not convert well (whereas OTF and TTF fonts are handled well).

Using `\usepackage{lmodern}` along with the Math font package `\usepackage{newtxmath}` and a monospaced font such as `\usepackage[ttdefault=true]{AnonymousPro}` should resolve the conversion problem.


# Mac OS Updates & BigBlueButton Media Permissions
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/mac-os-updates-bigbluebutton-media-permissions

After updating to Catalina (or later), you must explicitly give BigBlueButton screen sharing permissions in System Preferences. Mac OS users will...

## After updating to Catalina (or later), you must explicitly give BigBlueButton screen sharing permissions in System Preferences.

Mac OS users will note, after updating to Catalina version 10.15 (or later), they will be prompted to allow all media permissions and in some cases set specific system preferences to make use of sharing **microphone, webcam, or screen.**

**We recommend entering your first BigBlueButton session after this OS update early to ensure adequate time to enable all settings and restart your browser.**

For example, after updating to Catalina, the first time a presenter attempts to use the **screen sharing** they will be prompted by the mac OS to open their **system preferences** to enable screen recording for the current browser.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-09_at_11.32.08_AM.png" />

If the user **denies** the application permissions the screen sharing function will be disabled in the **current** and **any future** session until they enable this permission (they will see an error 1136).

To access the permissions

1. Open your Mac's Security & Privacy preferences.
2. Click the Privacy tab.
3. Click the Lock icon and enter your Mac credentials to make changes.

Here you can make changes for microphone, webcam, and screen recording (shown below).

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-09_at_11.38.18_AM.png" />

When **selecting the checkbox** for the selected browser(s) for screen recording, you will be prompted to restart their browser.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-10-09_at_12.53.17_PM.png" />

Reopen your browser and re-enter your BigBlueButton session - you should now be able to share your screen.

**2022-03-18** - Recently, we received reports that when Google Chrome 98 is updating but not yet restarted, Mac OS X may recognize the ID of the Google Chrome process and deny permission to share the screen.

If this is the case, quit Chrome (this will complete the upgrade), and repeat the above procedure.  If you see that Google Chrome already has a checkbox next to it in the list, **uncheck Google Chrome and recheck it again**.

You should now be able to share your screen again.

**Update:** Google has fixed this issue in Chrome 100.


# PDF that contains scanned content does not display correctly
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/pdf-that-contains-scanned-content-does-not-display-correctly

Most portable document format (PDF) files uploaded to BigBlueButton will be converted and displayed exactly as the original. However, some PDF files...

Most portable document format (PDF) files uploaded to BigBlueButton will be converted and displayed exactly as the original.

However, some PDF files that comprise layers of scanned content don't convert correctly.  For example, consider the following PDF from a scanned notebook

<img alt="mceclip0.png" />

After uploading to BigBlueButton, some of the layers will not display

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

The solution is to use [smallpdf.com/blog/flatten-pdf](https://smallpdf.com/blog/flatten-pdf) to flatten the PDF to JPG images and combine the JPEG images back into a single PDF.

Here's how the flatten PDF from the scanned notebook displays in BigBlueButton.

<img alt="mceclip2.png" />


# Students are not able to see / join their meeting
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/students-are-not-able-to-see-join-their-meeting

In Sakai, when a meeting is created it is accessible only to those registered to the course/class A user who was registered after the conference was...

## In Sakai, when a meeting is created it is accessible only to those registered to the course/class

A user who was registered after the conference was created will not see conferences created previous to their joining the class.

To resolve, edit the meeting and add the participant to the meeting.


# Students are not able to view their concluded meeting recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/students-are-not-able-to-view-their-concluded-meeting-recordings

In Sakai Meetings, when a BigBlueButton conference is recorded it is accessible only to those who were invited to the conference when it was created....

## In Sakai Meetings, when a BigBlueButton conference is recorded it is accessible only to those who were invited to the conference when it was created.

If a meeting is created and recorded without any attendees invited, the recording will only be visible to the creator of the conference (moderator/instructor).

The same will be the case when a student is registered after the conference was created; they will not see the processed recording.

## To share the recording URL

Navigate to the meetings recordings tab then select **video.** The recording will load in a separate browser tab for viewing.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-05_at_11.00.51_AM.png" />

Once the recording has loaded into the browser tab, copy and paste the recording URL directly from the web address bar.

<img alt="copyurl.png" />

This link can be posted to course announcements or sent directly to individuals who were not invited or were not registered to the conference for viewing.


# Troubleshooting Microphone
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/troubleshooting-microphone

Verify and fix microphone input on Windows 10 and macOS for BigBlueButton sessions.

Any user who cannot hear themselves in the echo test can follow these steps to verify their microphone works in the operating system before rejoining a BigBlueButton session. These steps are for the Chrome browser.

To confirm the issue, visit the test server at [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/), join the audio with a microphone, and run the checks below.

## Refresh the client

To reload the client, select the refresh button in your browser. You do not need to log in again — the client reloads automatically and rejoins your session.

## Verify your microphone on Windows 10

To open the sound settings, right-click the audio icon in the task bar and select **Open Sound Settings**.

<img alt="Open Sound Settings from the Windows task bar" />

Windows opens a Settings window showing your current input audio devices.

<img alt="Windows sound input settings" />

Talk into your microphone. The energy bar under **Test your microphone** highlights as you speak.

If there is no energy, select a different microphone under **Choose your input device**.

Once you see energy in the microphone, close the Settings window, then leave and rejoin (or refresh) your BigBlueButton session. When prompted to join the audio, select **Microphone** and listen for yourself in the echo test.

## Verify your microphone on macOS

To open the sound settings, open **System Preferences**, type `sound`, and select **Sound input**.

<img alt="macOS Sound input preferences" />

Tap your microphone. The blue bars on the **Input Level** move as sound is detected.

If the bars do not move, select a different microphone from the list.

<img alt="macOS Input Level meter" />

Once you see energy in the microphone, close the Settings window, then leave and rejoin (or refresh) your BigBlueButton session. When prompted to join the audio, select **Microphone** and listen for yourself in the echo test.

If you still hear nothing, verify that [Chrome has permission to access the microphone](/docs/help/troubleshooting/mac-os-updates-bigbluebutton-media-permissions).


# User is getting disconnected
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/user-is-getting-disconnected



See [minimum bandwidth requirements](/docs/help/faq/what-are-the-minimum-requirements-for-bigbluebutton) for BigBlueButton.

If a user's connection is not sufficient for the BigBlueButton session, the client may take a long time to load or, after a period of time, disconnect (it may look like to users they got kicked out).

The biggest use of bandwidth is webcams.  If a session is sharing lots of a webcams, a user can elect to turn off the webcams on their client to (significantly) reduce the bandwidth requirements.

To turn off webcams, click the **Settings** menu

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

And choose **Data savings** and turn off webcams:

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2022-08-31_at_4.23.15_PM.png" />


# Users unable to share their webcam
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/users-unable-to-share-their-webcam

There are a few reasons that users may be unable to share their webcam. 

**1. Unable to find available webcams**

When the user clicks to share their webcam, the browser will first search for available webcams.

If none are available, you will see **No webcams found. Please make sure there's one connected**

<img alt="Webcam share dialog showing the error &#x22;No webcams found. Please make sure there's one connected&#x22;" />

This error is caused when there are no available webcam sources.  The reasons for this are

* Another application (such as Skype) is using the webcam and won't release it
* You have an older version of ManyCam installed (Windows 10)

First, if you have ManyCam installed, upgrade it to the latest version.

Second, restart your computer.  This clears any access to your webcam so that the browser can access it.

**2. Latest version of Firefox, Chrome, or Edge**

While there are checks in BigBlueButton to warn the user, in general the user should use the latest version of Chrome, Firefox, or Edge (which as of version 18 is based on Chromium).

Users of the older version of Edge will have intermittent success sharing their webcam.

**3. Permission not granted to share webcam**

Before a user can share their webcam, the browser will [ask for permission](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam) to access the user's webcam.  On Mac OS X, the operating system will also ask (one time) [for permission as well](/docs/help/troubleshooting/mac-os-updates-bigbluebutton-media-permissions).

If the user didn't grant permission, there will be a webcam icon on the browser's toolbar with a slash '/' through it.  Clicking that icon will give the user another chance to grant permissions (a refresh of the page may be needed).

**4. Error Establishing Connection (1020)**

If there is an error setting up a network connection with the BigBlueButton server, the user will get "Error 1020: media could not reach the server".  The issue is usually network-related (usually due to a firewall).

Have them visit

[https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/)

and try sharing their webcam within a test session.  This will test on a completely different BigBlueButton server.

If they are unable to share their webcam on the demo server, then the issue might be their network related, in which case try

1. Have them switch between Firefox or Chrome (there are rare cases where one works and the other does not)
2. If possible, have them setup a wireless hot spot with their phone.  This will keep everything the same, but use a different network path.

If it works on the hot spot, but not on their default network, then the issue is very likely network/firewall related.  Explore if there is an option to use an alternative network.

If it does not work on the hotspot -- that is, they have tried two different BigBlueButton servers (from their LMS and my.bigbluebutton.com) and two different network connections (default and hotspot) -- then the issue is likely with their computer.   See if there is a different computer available to them on the same network and then have them test sharing a webcam with [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/).

If this second computer also fails, then there may be a firewall restricting UDP connections in the range 16384 - 32768 somewhere between their local network and the BigBlueButton server (either from their LMS or my.bigbluebutton.com).


# Why do I not see my webcam in the recording?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/troubleshooting/why-do-i-not-see-my-webcam-in-the-recording



If you share your screen, the screen share takes over the entire playback area, as shown below (no webcams are visible).

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

If your entire presentation is screen share, then no webcams will be visible during the playback.

If you intend to share your screen and create a recording, and want users to see your webcam, we recommend starting the recording a few minutes before you start screen sharing.  That way, the webcam will be visible for the first few minutes until screen sharing starts.


# Access the Options Menu
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu

Any user can access additional settings, information, and assistance through the options menu.

Any user can access additional settings, information, and assistance through the options menu in the upper-right corner of the BigBlueButton interface. Use it to set [away status](#away-status), open [settings](#settings), view [about](#about) info, find [help](#help), or see [keyboard shortcuts](#keyboard-shortcuts).

To open the menu, select the three dots (kebab menu) in the upper right-hand corner.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Options menu" />
</Frame>

There are several options available within the Menu:

* [**Away Status \[1\]**](#away-status) — updates user presence
* **Make full screen \[2]** — enables full screen mode
* [**Settings \[3\]**](#settings) — access additional application settings
* [**About \[4\]**](#about) — BigBlueButton copyright and build information
* [**Help \[5\]**](#help) — access tutorial videos
* [**Keyboard shortcuts \[6\]**](#keyboard-shortcuts) — provides a list of hotkeys for quick keyboard navigation

## Away Status

Setting to **away** will (a) pause your webcam, (b) mute your microphone, and (c) let everyone know in the chat you are away - all with a single click.

## Settings

The **Settings** menu houses several features that a user can enable or disable to customize their experience in the BigBlueButton session.

Subsections of the settings menu include the [**applications**](#application-menu) menu and [**data savings**](#data-savings) menu.

### Application menu

<Frame>
  <img alt="Applicationmenu" />
</Frame>

By default, the Application menu is expanded; a user can make changes to the BigBlueButton **Animations \[1]** (enabled by default).

To change the default language, select from the list of available languages found in the **Application Language \[2]** dropdown.

You can also change the application **Font Size \[3]**. To make the font larger, select the **+** and to decrease the font size, select the **-**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Notifications" />
</Frame>

Enable **Audio alerts \[4]**, and **Popup alerts \[5]** to notify you of new incoming chat messages while in the BigBlueButton session and when your chat pane or users list is minimized.

<Note>All alerts are in-browser only and do not behave like desktop push notifications.</Note>

Select **Save** to apply any changes made or **Close** to return to the session.

### Data Savings

Settings found within the Data Savings menu are intended for users who are connecting from a mobile device or those connecting to networks performing under the recommended bandwidth requirements for optimal use of BigBlueButton.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Datasavings" />
</Frame>

By default both the **Webcam \[1]** and **Desktop Sharing \[2]** streams are enabled.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 11 10 PM" />
</Frame>

To conserve bandwidth, toggle **off**. When turned off, any incoming or outgoing webcam or desktop sharing streams stop appearing.

### Dark Mode

To enable dark mode, switch the toggle **on** from the \*\*Application settings \*\*menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 24at8 45 53AM" />
</Frame>

Your interface will appear as displayed:

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 24at8 47 52AM" />
</Frame>

## About

The about section houses the BigBlueButton copyright information and build number.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 3 13 51 PM" />
</Frame>

You may be asked to provide the **Client build number** of the session you are connected to for troubleshooting. It appears under the copyright information.

## Help

The help button redirects you to specific [help articles](https://bigbluebutton.org/tutorials/) that assist with FAQs and other troubleshooting tips.

## Keyboard Shortcuts

The Keyboard shortcuts menu provides a listing of all the shortcut keys that can be used to navigate the BigBlueButton interface.

**Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows**

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="General">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Join audio | Alt + J |
    | Toggle Raise Hand | Alt + R |
    | Leave audio | Alt + L |
    | Hold for Push-to-talk | M |
    | Mute / Unmute | Alt + M |
    | Open actions menu | Alt + A |
    | Open Options | Alt + O |
    | Open leave meeting menu | Alt + X |
    | Toggle UserList | Alt + U |
    | Hide private chat | Alt + H |
    | Open debug window | Alt + K |
    | Close private chat | Alt + G |
    | Toggle Public Chat (User list must be open) | Alt + P |
    | Open custom poll | Ctrl + Alt + P |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Presentation">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Activate Pan tool (Presenter) | Spacebar |
    | Toggle Full-screen (Presenter) | Enter |
    | Next slide (Presenter) | Right Arrow |
    | Previous slide (Presenter) | Left Arrow |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Whiteboard">
    | Function | Combo | Alternative |
    | - | - | - |
    | Select Tool | 1 | V |
    | Pencil | 2 | D, P |
    | Eraser | 3 | E |
    | Rectangle | 4 | R |
    | Ellipse | 5 | O |
    | Triangle | 6 | G |
    | Line | 7 | L |
    | Arrow | 8 | A |
    | Text Tool | 9 | T |
    | Sticky Note | 0 | N, S |
    | Hand | | H |
    | Highlight | | Shift D |
    | Zoom In | Ctrl + | Ctrl M. Wheel up |
    | Zoom Out | Ctrl - | Ctrl M. Wheel down |
    | Reset Zoom | Shift 1 | N/A |
    | Zoom to Selection | Shift 2 | N/A |
    | Flip Horizontal | Shift H | N/A |
    | Flip Vertical | Shift V | N/A |
    | Lock / Unlock | Ctrl Shift L | N/A |
    | Move to Front | Shift ] | N/A |
    | Move Forward | ] | N/A |
    | Move Backward | \[ | N/A |
    | Move to Back | Shift \[ | N/A |
    | Undo | Ctrl Z | N/A |
    | Redo | Ctrl Shift Z | N/A |
    | Cut | Ctrl X | N/A |
    | Copy | Ctrl C | N/A |
    | Paste | Ctrl V | N/A |
    | Select All | Ctrl A | N/A |
    | Delete | Del | Backspace |
    | Duplicate | Ctrl D | N/A |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Gestures">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Undo | 2-finger tap |
    | Redo | 3-finger tap |
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

**Keyboard Shortcuts for Mac**

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="General">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Join audio | Control + Option + J |
    | Toggle Raise Hand | Control + Option + R |
    | Leave audio | Control + Option + L |
    | Hold for Push-to-talk | M |
    | Mute / Unmute | Control + Option + M |
    | Open actions menu | Control + Option + A |
    | Open Options | Control + Option + O |
    | Open leave meeting menu | Control + Option + X |
    | Toggle UserList | Control + Option + U |
    | Hide private chat | Control + Option + H |
    | Open debug window | Control + Option + K |
    | Close private chat | Control + Option + G |
    | Toggle Public Chat (User list must be open) | Control + Option + P |
    | Open custom poll | Control + Option + P |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Presentation">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Activate Pan tool (Presenter) | Spacebar |
    | Toggle Full-screen (Presenter) | Enter |
    | Next slide (Presenter) | Right Arrow |
    | Previous slide (Presenter) | Left Arrow |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Whiteboard">
    | Function | Combo | Alternative |
    | - | - | - |
    | Select Tool | 1 | V |
    | Pencil | 2 | D, P |
    | Eraser | 3 | E |
    | Rectangle | 4 | R |
    | Ellipse | 5 | O |
    | Triangle | 6 | G |
    | Line | 7 | L |
    | Arrow | 8 | A |
    | Text Tool | 9 | T |
    | Sticky Note | 0 | N, S |
    | Hand | | H |
    | Highlight | | Shift D |
    | Zoom In | Cmd + | Cmd M. Wheel up |
    | Zoom Out | Cmd - | Cmd M. Wheel down |
    | Reset Zoom | Shift 1 | N/A |
    | Zoom to Selection | Shift 2 | N/A |
    | Flip Horizontal | Shift H | N/A |
    | Flip Vertical | Shift V | N/A |
    | Lock / Unlock | Cmd Shift L | N/A |
    | Move to Front | Shift ] | N/A |
    | Move Forward | ] | N/A |
    | Move Backward | \[ | N/A |
    | Move to Back | Shift \[ | N/A |
    | Undo | Cmd Z | N/A |
    | Redo | Cmd Shift Z | N/A |
    | Cut | Cmd X | N/A |
    | Copy | Cmd C | N/A |
    | Paste | Cmd V | N/A |
    | Select All | Cmd A | N/A |
    | Delete | Del | Backspace |
    | Duplicate | Cmd D | N/A |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Gestures">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Undo | 2-finger tap |
    | Redo | 3-finger tap |
  </Tab>
</Tabs>


# Close the presentation/enlarge the webcams
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/close-the-presentationenlarge-the-webcams

Any user can close the presentation area to enlarge shared webcams, or disable incoming webcams to save bandwidth.

Any user can [close the presentation](#close-the-presentation) to give shared webcams the full screen — useful for a video chat-style session. You can also [disable incoming webcams](#disable-incoming-webcams) to save bandwidth on a slow connection.

<Note>
  You can only close the presentation when at least one webcam is being shared.
</Note>

## Close the presentation

<img alt="Presentation area with shared webcams" />

To close the presentation, select the **X** in the upper-right corner of the presentation area. The webcam streams expand to fill the full BigBlueButton interface.

<img alt="Webcams enlarged after closing the presentation" />

To restore the presentation, select the **Presentation** icon in the lower-right corner.

<Note>
  There is no hard limit on the number of webcams that can be shared, but bandwidth is the practical limit. With many webcams, some may stop updating.
</Note>

## Disable incoming webcams

To turn off all incoming webcam streams — useful on mobile or low-bandwidth connections — open the **Settings** menu.

<img alt="Options menu showing Settings" />

Select **Data savings**, turn off **Enable other participants webcams**, then select **Save**.

<img alt="Data savings settings with webcams disabled" />


# Join breakout rooms
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/join-breakout-rooms

As a viewer, join, rejoin, and use features within a breakout room.

In BigBlueButton, a moderator may create breakout rooms for small group discussions, collaboration, or team work; only moderators can engage breakout rooms.

If you enter a session after the breakout rooms have been launched, you can inform the moderator and they can resend an invitation for you to join.

## Join a breakout room

When breakout rooms are engaged, you receive a join prompt from BigBlueButton.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Breakoutroominvitation" />
</Frame>

Select **Join** to enter the breakout room; selecting cancel returns you to the main session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Micselect" />
</Frame>

Your audio in the main session disconnects and you are prompted to connect your chosen audio format in the breakout room.

<Tip>
  We recommend joining with a **Microphone** so you can participate in the discussion.
</Tip>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Mainandbreakout" />
</Frame>

The breakout room opens in a secondary tab; you can always return to the main session to communicate with the moderator if necessary.

## Use breakout room features

When you enter the breakout room, the interface looks the same as the main BigBlueButton session; however, there are a couple of important notes:

1. All users are connected to the breakout rooms with limited moderator status.
2. The first user to make a successful connection to the breakout room is allocated the presenter role.

The overall interface and important components remain the same.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Breakoutroomlayout" />
</Frame>

Features in the breakout rooms consist of:

* **Breakout room title and time \[1]:** indicates the current tab is running a breakout room session and the time remaining; the breakout rooms automatically close when this duration is met.
* **Whiteboard annotations \[2]:** accessible by the user with the presenter status; enables annotations to the whiteboard or uploaded document.
* **Presenter actions menu \[3]:** start a poll, upload a presentation, a link from YouTube, or take presenter status from the current presenter.
* **Screen sharing \[4]:** accessible by the individual with presenter status; enables the individual to share their screen.

## Rejoin a breakout room

If you lose the connection or accidentally close the breakout room window, you can rejoin the room you originally connected to.

Return to the main session and navigate to the messages and users list panel.

Expand the **Breakout Rooms \[1]** menu and select **Join Room \[2]** to rejoin the breakout room.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Joinroom" />
</Frame>

If you do not see the breakout room menu, you can request the moderator resend a breakout room invitation to you.


# Join the audio
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/join-the-audio

Learn how to join audio in a BigBlueButton session with a microphone or in listen-only mode.

Anyone with a connected audio device can join audio in a BigBlueButton session. You can join with a [microphone](#join-with-a-mic) or [listen only](#join-listen-only).

When you first join a session, your browser prompts you for permission to access your microphone. Select **Allow**.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Chrome">
    <Frame>
      <img alt="Allow audio in Chrome" />
    </Frame>
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Firefox">
    <Frame>
      <img alt="Allow audio in Firefox" />
    </Frame>
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Safari">
    <Frame>
      <img alt="Allow audio in Safari" />
    </Frame>
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

Next, your **Audio Settings** appear. You can select your microphone input **\[1]**, speaker output **\[2]**, test your audio feedback **\[3]**, and join audio when you are done adjusting your settings **\[4]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Joinaudioprompt" />
</Frame>

You have the option to join the audio with a [mic](#join-with-a-mic) or [listen only](#join-listen-only). You can choose from different microphone and speaker devices in the dropdown menus.

After you confirm your audio settings and select **Join Audio**, a confirmation prompt appears in the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Audioprompt" />
</Frame>

You can always access your audio settings from the arrow icon next to your microphone icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Audioarrowmenu" />
</Frame>

## Join with a mic

If you want others to hear you, select **Microphone**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Micselect" />
</Frame>

After joining audio with a microphone, a microphone icon appears next to your name in the user list, showing either muted or unmuted status.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Miconoff" />
</Frame>

## Join listen only

If you do not intend to talk in the session or if you are in an area that has significant background noise, you can also choose to join with **No microphone**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Micnonselect" />
</Frame>

When you connect in listen-only mode, a headset icon appears next to your name in the user list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Listenonly" />
</Frame>

## No audio

If you are in the session and do not have an indicator next to your icon in the user list, you are not connected to the audio. Try refreshing the browser to engage the audio chooser.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Noaudio" />
</Frame>

If you ever want to disconnect your audio devices during a session, you can select **Leave audio** from the audio settings menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Leaveaudio" />
</Frame>

## Access the audio settings menu

You can quickly change your audio preferences by accessing the audio settings menu in BigBlueButton. Select the **arrow button \[1]** under your microphone icon to access the menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Audiominimenu" />
</Frame>

You can choose to **leave audio \[2]**, access your **audio settings \[3]**, change your **speakers \[4]**, and change the **microphone** **\[5]** that you are using.

## Troubleshoot microphone issues

On Windows or macOS, if you are still unable to hear yourself in the echo test, visit our test server at [my.bigbluebutton.com](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/) and join the audio with a microphone and go through the steps below. These steps are for the Chrome browser.

1. Refresh your browser (you don't need to log in again, the client will automatically reload).
2. Verify you have a working microphone.

**On Windows 10**, right-click on the audio icon in the task bar and choose **Open Sound Settings**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Windows Sound Settings" />
</Frame>

Windows will open a Settings window showing you the settings for your current input audio devices.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Windows microphone input settings" />
</Frame>

Talk into your microphone and you should see the energy bar highlight under **Test your microphone** as you speak. If there is no energy, try choosing a different microphone under **Choose your audio device**.

Once you see energy in the microphone, close the Settings window, and leave and rejoin (or refresh) your session in BigBlueButton. When prompted to join the audio, choose **Microphone** and listen to ensure you hear yourself in the echo test.

On **macOS**, open System Preferences and type in sound. Choose **Sound input**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 16at12 24 32PM" />
</Frame>

As you talk, you need to see blue bars highlight on the **Input Level**. Tap your microphone — you should see the blue energy bars move. If not, select a different microphone from the list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 16at11 36 36AM" />
</Frame>

Once you see energy in the microphone, close the Settings window, and leave and rejoin (or refresh) your session in BigBlueButton. When prompted to join the audio, choose **Microphone** and you should now hear yourself in the echo test. If not, verify on macOS that [Chrome has permission to access the microphone](/docs/help/troubleshooting/mac-os-updates-bigbluebutton-media-permissions).


# Make webcams larger
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/make-webcams-larger

Any user can resize the ratio between the webcam strip and the presentation area in their own view.

Any user can adjust the ratio between webcams and the presentation area (which may also be showing a screen share). The change applies only to your own view — it does not affect what other users see.

To resize, hover over the border between the presentation area and the webcam strip until a resize cursor appears, then drag down to enlarge the webcams and shrink the presentation area.

<img alt="adjustwebcams.gif" />


# Move webcam(s) in a live session
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/move-webcams-in-a-live-session

Any user can drag webcams to a preferred position in their own view of the BigBlueButton interface.

Any user can drag webcams to a preferred position within their own BigBlueButton interface. By default, webcams display at the top or bottom middle of the layout.

<img alt="Webcams positioned in the BigBlueButton interface" />

You can drag and drop a single webcam anywhere on your screen, or snap webcams to the top or bottom of the presentation area.

For a walkthrough, see this [overview video](https://youtu.be/xeLOzKBUdIk?si=yfuJRot4zY-sVz9j\&t=120).

<Note>
  Moving webcams only changes the local view for each user. A moderator cannot push a webcam layout out to everyone.
</Note>


# Raise Hand
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/raise-hand

Any user can raise or lower their hand to signal the presenter without interrupting the session.

Any user can raise their hand to signal the presenter — for example, to ask a question or request to speak. Lowering your hand removes the signal.

To raise your hand, select the hand icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Raisehand" />
</Frame>

A hand emoji appears on your user icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Raisehandlist" />
</Frame>

A prompt also appears in the top-right corner confirming that your hand is raised.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Raisehandprompt" />
</Frame>

When you lower your hand, the emoji disappears from your user icon and another prompt confirms the change.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Lowerhandprompt" />
</Frame>


# Reactions Bar
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/reactions-bar

Any user can send a quick emoji reaction that appears next to their name in the user list for one minute.

Any user can send a quick emoji reaction to respond to the presenter without interrupting. The reaction shows next to your name in the user list for one minute, or until you clear it.

To open the Reactions Bar, select the emoji icon.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 15 52 PM" />
</Frame>

The bar shows five emojis to choose from.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 13 05 PM" />
</Frame>

Select an emoji to display it next to your name in the user list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 7 17 45 PM" />
</Frame>

The emoji clears automatically after one minute, or as soon as you select it again.


# Respond to polls and quizzes
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/respond-to-polls

When a presenter starts a poll or quiz, any user can respond, and the presenter can publish anonymized results to the slide.

When a presenter starts a poll or quiz during the session, any user can respond. The presenter sees incoming responses and can publish the anonymized results to the slide.

## Respond to a poll

When a poll is started, response options appear on your screen.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Pollpop" />
</Frame>

Depending on your device and screen layout (portrait or landscape), the options may appear in the **bottom-right** of the BigBlueButton interface.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Pollprompt" />
</Frame>

Select your answer to lock it in. The available options vary based on the presenter's question.

## Respond to a quiz

A quiz prompt appears the same way as a poll, in the lower-right corner.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Quizpop" />
</Frame>

Select your answer to submit it.

## See published results

Only the presenter sees incoming responses. Once the presenter publishes the anonymized results, they appear on the presentation slide and the response prompt disappears for all users.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Pollresultspres" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Chatpollresults" />
</Frame>


# Send public and private chat messages
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/send-public-and-private-chat-messages

Anyone can send public and private chat messages as well as edit or delete their own chat messages.

Anyone can send chat messages in BigBlueButton; you can send both [public](#send-a-public-chat-message) and [private chat](#send-a-private-chat-message) messages. You can also choose to edit, react, delete and reply to messages in the chat.

## Send a public chat message

To send a public chat message, select **\[1] Public Chat** in the left panel, **\[2]** type a message, then select **Send message**.

<img alt="Image" />

<Accordion title="If the left panel isn't visible">
  Select the **User list toggle** button to open/close it.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Image" />
  </Frame>
</Accordion>

## Send a private chat message

To start a private message to another user, **\[1]** select the user with the mouse, **\[2]** select **Start a private chat**. A new private chat panel appears to the right.

<img alt="Image" />

In the new panel **\[3]** type your message and select **Send message**. Only that user will see your private messages.

<img alt="Image" />

Later, when the user responds, if the panel is not in focus, a count of unread messages will appear next to their name.

<img alt="Image" />

## Chat message options

Moving your cursor over a chat message shows the message options bar with four options.

* Reply to a message
* Add an emoji reaction
* Edit a message
* Delete a message

### Reply to a message

You can reply to a message, which makes a copy of the original with your reply.

To reply to a message, move the cursor over the message and **\[1]** select **Reply to message**. The selected message appears above the message field, then **\[2]** type a reply and select **\[3] Send message**.

<img alt="Image" />

The original message will appear again in the chat with your reply underneath for everyone to see.

<img alt="Image" />

### Add an emoji reaction

To add an emoji to a message, **\[1]** select the React button from the message option menu and **\[2]** select an emoji from the pop-up. **\[3]** The emoji will appear under the message.

<img alt="Image" />

Users can hover over the reaction to see who added it.

<img alt="Image" />

### Edit a message

To edit a message, **\[1]** select **Edit** from the options bar, **\[2]** type in your new message and select **Send message**.

<img alt="Image" />

Your edited message will appear with the label *Edited.*

### Delete a message

To delete your message, select the **Delete message** button in the options bar.

<img alt="Delete message button" />

A prompt will appear to confirm that you want to permanently remove your message from the chat.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Delete confirmation dialog" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Viewers can only edit and delete their own chat messages. Moderators can delete any chat message.
</Note>


# Share a Webcam
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam

Any user can share a built-in or external webcam, adjust brightness, set a virtual background, pin webcams, or share a second webcam.

Any user with a built-in or external webcam can [share their webcam](#share-your-webcam) so others in the session can see them. You can also [adjust webcam brightness](#adjust-webcam-brightness), [set a virtual background](#change-the-webcam-background), [pin a webcam](#pin-a-webcam), and [share multiple webcams](#share-multiple-webcams).

Configure your webcam device and set it as the default in your operating system before joining the session.

## Share your webcam

<Frame>
  <img alt="Webcam icon in the BigBlueButton media bar" />
</Frame>

To start sharing, select the webcam icon in the media bar at the bottom of the BigBlueButton interface.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Sharewebcam" />
</Frame>

Your browser asks for permission to use the webcam. The prompt usually appears in the upper-right corner or the center of the browser. Select **Allow**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Browser webcam permission prompt" />
</Frame>

After allowing access, choose your device and quality settings.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Websettings" />
</Frame>

If you have multiple webcams connected, select the one you want from the **dropdown** **\[1]**. You can also set **Quality** **\[2]**, **Brightness** **\[3]**, and **Whole image** **\[4]**, then select **Share** **\[5]**. To set a virtual background, select **Virtual background** **\[6]** in the next tab before sharing.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Websettings2" />
</Frame>

## Adjust webcam brightness

Use the **Brightness** slider at the bottom of the webcam settings window to change how bright your image appears.

If **Whole image** is selected, the slider adjusts the brightness of the entire image. If it is not selected, only your face is adjusted.

<img alt="2.6_-_Webcam_brightness.gif" />

## Change the webcam background

BigBlueButton includes a set of default virtual backgrounds, and you can also upload your own.

To upload a custom background, select the camera icon, then **Upload**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Upload custom background option" />
</Frame>

Select an image file (`.jpg`, `.png`, or `.webp`) from your computer. The uploaded image appears in the first position on the left in the list of available backgrounds.

<img alt="2.6_-_Custom_Background.gif" />

To delete a custom background, select the **X** in the upper-right corner of the image.

<img alt="mceclip1.png" />

## Pin a webcam

You can pin one or more webcams so they always stay visible — useful when one webcam is showing sign language interpretation, for example.

<img alt="2.6_-_Webcam_Pin.gif" />

## Share multiple webcams

After sharing one webcam, share a second by opening the video options menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Video options menu" />
</Frame>

Select **Open advanced settings**. In the webcam dialog, select a different webcam **\[1]**, then select **Start sharing** **\[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Advanced webcam settings dialog" />
</Frame>

The second webcam appears alongside the first.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Two webcams sharing at once" />
</Frame>

## Troubleshoot Chrome webcam permissions

If you see the message **"The webcam is in use by another application"** in Chrome, check that you have allowed webcam access.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Chrome webcam in use error" />
</Frame>

The browser permission prompt usually appears in the upper-right corner. Select **Allow** and choose the device you want to share.


# Share iPad screen
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/share-i-pad-screen

Share an iPad screen in a BigBlueButton session by mirroring the iPad to a Mac and screen-sharing the QuickTime window.

Safari on iPad cannot share its screen directly into BigBlueButton. To share an iPad screen, mirror the iPad to a Mac using QuickTime Player, then screen-share the QuickTime window from the Mac in your BigBlueButton session.

The result is that other users in the session see your iPad screen as a live view.

## Connect the iPad to your Mac

Connect your iPad to your Mac with a USB-C cable. When the iPad prompts you, select **Allow**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="iPad Allow connection prompt" />
</Frame>

To verify the connection, open **Finder**. Your iPad appears under **Locations** — for example, **iPad Pro (2)** in the screenshot below.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Finder showing connected iPad in Locations" />
</Frame>

## Mirror the iPad with QuickTime Player

Open **QuickTime Player** and select **New Movie Recording**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="QuickTime Player New Movie Recording menu" />
</Frame>

Select the **arrow** next to the red **Record** button to open the source menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="QuickTime source menu next to the Record button" />
</Frame>

In the source menu, choose your iPad by name (for example, **iPad Pro (2)**).

<Frame>
  <img alt="QuickTime source menu with iPad selected" />
</Frame>

You do not need to actually record. The goal is to display your iPad screen on the Mac so it can be screen-shared.

## Screen-share the QuickTime window

In BigBlueButton, select **Share screen** in the media bar. Choose **Window**, then **Movie Recording**, then **Share**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Browser screen-share dialog with Movie Recording window selected" />
</Frame>

BigBlueButton shares the iPad screen to all users in the session. Anything you do on the iPad is visible to everyone live.

<Frame>
  <img alt="iPad screen shared in a BigBlueButton session" />
</Frame>


# Use shared notes
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes

Anyone in a session can contribute to the Shared Notes panel and export the notes to a file.

In addition to public and private chats, anyone in a BigBlueButton session can [contribute to Shared Notes](#contribute-to-shared-notes) and [export the notes](#export-the-notes-to-a-file) to a file. Shared Notes is a common text file that everyone in the session can edit at the same time.

## New Shared Notes Editor

In [March 2026](/docs/hosting-updates#march-2026) we released a modern shared notes editor.  This is a markdown aware editor that provides support for markdown styles and tables.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Shared Notes editor with formatting toolbar" />
</Frame>

You can apply styles to any by highlighting the text and choosing a **Style \[1]** which will show a drop-down menu of available styles.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Text formatting dropdown menu in notes" />
</Frame>

You an apply a style while editing if you enter markdown prefix.  For example, typing ## before text will apply the Heading 2 style.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Text editor toolbar and Heading 2 text" />
</Frame>

### Insert menu '/'

You can also open an insert menu by typing the '/' key.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Note-taking app formatting options menu open" />
</Frame>

### Shared Notes Options

You can **Convert notes to presentation \[1]** which will convert the notes to a PDF and upload them to the presentation area.  Letting you annotate the shared notes with the whiteboard.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Three notes options: presentation, PDF, whiteboard" />
</Frame>

You an **Export notes as PDF \[2]** which will download the notes.  You can also **Pin notes onto whiteboard \[3]** which will move the Shared notes from the panel to the main presentation area.

## Legacy Shared Notes Editor

On some installations, the older shared notes editor may still be available.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Sharednotesuser" />
</Frame>

To open the notes panel, select **Shared Notes** **\[1]** in the left sidebar. **Formatting Options** **\[2]** such as **Bold** and **Italic** appear at the top of the panel. To reveal undo, redo, and download buttons, select the **'+'** **\[3]** button.

When another user edits the notes, an alert appears on the **Shared Notes** icon.

### Export the notes to a file

To download the current notes, select the **Export** **\[4]** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Notesexportstudent" />
</Frame>

A list of available formats appears. Select your preferred format and save the file to your device.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Notesnotification" />
</Frame>


# Using away/available mode
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/user-guide/using-away-available

Toggle between available and away to mute your mic, mask your webcam, and signal your status to others in the session.

Any user can toggle between **available** and **away** to mute their microphone, mask their webcam, and signal their status to the rest of the session.

When you enter a session, your status is set to **available** by default in the right-hand options menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 2 29 06 PM" />
</Frame>

To set yourself as away, toggle the switch.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 2 30 18 PM" />
</Frame>

When you set yourself as away, BigBlueButton:

* Mutes your microphone
* Masks your webcam
* Adds an "away" clock icon to your user avatar
* Posts a note in the chat that you are away

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 2 31 12 PM" />
</Frame>

To return to **available**, toggle the switch back. All four away effects are reversed.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Awaystatusremovednew" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot2026 03 16at2 32 49PM" />
</Frame>


# Tutorial Videos
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/help/videos

Video guides to help you quickly master BigBlueButton

## Student Overview

**Everyone should watch this video first.**  It provides an overview of how to share audio and video, respond to chat and polls, use the whiteboard, and more.  If you are an educator, watch the next video after this.

<iframe title="BigBlueButton Student Overview" />

## Instructor Overview

This video walks you through using BigBlueButton as an educator, showing how to manage your classroom, share content, have students apply themselves, and more.

<iframe title="BigBlueButton Instructor Overview" />

## Feature Tutorials

Short videos covering specific BigBlueButton features.

<div>
  <div>
    <iframe title="Using the Layout Manager" />

    <h3>Using the Layout Manager</h3>
    <p>Customize the classroom layout to focus on speakers or content.</p>
  </div>

  <div>
    <iframe title="Using Breakout Rooms" />

    <h3>Using Breakout Rooms</h3>
    <p>Organize students into collaborative breakout rooms with instructor controls.</p>
  </div>

  <div>
    <iframe title="Using Polls" />

    <h3>Using Polls</h3>
    <p>Get student feedback and verify comprehension, including anonymous polling.</p>
  </div>

  <div>
    <iframe title="Using the Multi-user Whiteboard" />

    <h3>Using the Multi-user Whiteboard</h3>
    <p>Enable simultaneous drawing and writing for a classroom-like experience.</p>
  </div>
</div>


# Latest Updates
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/hosting-updates

Latest updates to Blindside Networks' hosting of BigBlueButton and other products.

<Update label="July 2026" description="Released July 12, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * **Learning Analytics Dashboard**. The Learning Analytics Dashboard is now available as a recording format, giving instructors visibility into student activity after the session is over.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Student activity dashboard with user engagement" />
  </Frame>
</Update>

<Update label="May 2026" description="Released May 29, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * **Breakout room lock settings.** Moderators can now apply and change lock settings directly inside breakout rooms, and choose to have each breakout room inherit the parent meeting's lock settings.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Breakout rooms setup with options and 2 rooms" />
  </Frame>

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.28 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.28).
</Update>

<Update label="March 2026" description="Released May 14, 2026">
  * **New Shared Notes Editor.** A new collaborative editor that is faster, easier to use, and supports tables and other markdown.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Shared notes app with markdown formatting" />
  </Frame>

  ### Fixes

  * When "hide viewer list" lock setting engaged, change of presenter notifications no longer show user's names.
  * Whiteboard area no longer shifts outside presentation area on window resize.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.27 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.27).
</Update>

<Update label="April 2026" description="Released April 27, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * Touch devices no longer trigger pinch-to-zoom for viewers and whiteboard users, preventing accidental zooming during a session.

  ### Fixes

  * When "hide viewer list" lock setting engaged, join and leave notifications are suppressed
  * Loading screen now stays visible during connection retries, with a clear error screen on timeout.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.26 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.26).
</Update>

<Update label="April 2026" description="Released April 17, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * Webcam controls now appear on hover or touch-and-hold instead of always being visible.
  * Mobile notifications are no longer clipped at the edge of the screen.
  * Chat message timestamps now follow the user's locale.

  ### Fixes

  * Whiteboard cursor now appears in the correct position for viewers and stays aligned when zooming.
  * Mouse-wheel zoom is now centered on the pointer.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.25 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.25).
</Update>

<Update label="March 2026" description="Released March 16, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * Webcam backgrounds now carry through into breakout rooms.
  * Moderator-only functionality is properly hidden from viewers inside breakout rooms.

  ### Fixes

  * Whiteboard `Ctrl+D` (duplicate) now works more than once in a row.
  * Users are re-assigned to their previous breakout room when rejoining.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.23 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.23).
</Update>

<Update label="February 2026" description="Released February 11, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * **Live captions.** Captions now handle overlapping speech more gracefully when multiple people speak at once.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.22 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.22).
</Update>

<Update label="January 2026" description="Released January 26, 2026">
  ### Improvements

  * **Dynamic recording layout.** Recordings now use a dynamic video layout for better playback quality — when you minimize the presentation during a session, it will also minimize in the recording.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.20 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.20).
</Update>

<Update label="December 2025" description="Released December 3, 2025">
  ### Fixes

  * **Browser tab sharing on Chrome 143+.** Restored the ability to share a browser tab as a screenshare on Chrome 143 and later.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.18 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.18).
</Update>

<Update label="November 2025" description="Released November 27, 2025">
  ### Improvements

  * **Redesigned raise hand experience.** The raise hand button is clearer, and the list of raised hands now lives in a side panel instead of covering the presenter's view.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.17 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.17).
</Update>

<Update label="September 2025" description="Released September 18, 2025">
  ### New features

  * **Live captions (configurable).** Introduced live captions, with configurable options for languages and providers.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.15 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.15).
</Update>

<Update label="July 2025" description="Released July 17, 2025">
  ### New features

  * **Quiz.** Built-in assessment feature with results piped into the Learning Analytics Dashboard.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.11 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.11).
</Update>

<Update label="February 2025" description="Released February 28, 2025">
  ## BigBlueButton 3.0

  This is a major release of BigBlueButton and contains multiple new and improved features for teachers and students.

  ### New features

  * **Improved chat.** Edit messages, add emojis, and reply with follow-up messages.
  * **Improved whiteboard.** Rebuilt on tldraw 2.0.
  * **Join audio with microphone.** Configurable — no more separate listen-only vs. microphone choice.
  * **Away mode.** One click to set yourself away.
  * **300 users in a room.** Extensive refatoring how supports 300 users in a single room.
  * **Plugin support.** Plugins can now extend the functionality of the core. The Pick Random User capability now implemented as a plugin.

  For the full list of changes, see the [v3.0.0 release on GitHub](https://github.com/bigbluebutton/bigbluebutton/releases/tag/v3.0.0).
</Update>


# How to Create a Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/how-to-create-a-conference

Create a new Schoology Conference from the Conferences panel and set its name, start time, and end time.

To create a Conference in Schoology, you can go to **Conferences \[1]** in the navigation panel and select **Create New Conference \[2]**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Createaconference" />
</Frame>

## Creating a Conference

<Frame>
  <img alt="Createnew" />
</Frame>

You can add the **name of the Conference \[1]** and the **start date and time \[2]** of the conference. You can also add the end time of the conference as an option.

Select **Create \[3]** to add your conference.


# How to Join a Conference as a User
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/how-to-join-a-conference

Join an in-progress Schoology Conference from the Conferences panel to enter the BigBlueButton session.

To join a Conference in Schoology, select the **Conferences \[1]** panel in the navigation menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Joinuserconf" />
</Frame>

Select the **link \[2]** of the Conference in progress to join the session. You will be taken to the BigBlueButton session in a new tab.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 15 At 11 05 20 AM" />
</Frame>


# How to View Past Conferences
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/how-to-view-past-conferences

View completed Schoology Conferences, play recordings, and open the Learning Analytics Dashboard for session statistics.

To view past Conferences, go to the Completed section in the Conferences panel.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 15 At 10 55 26 AM" />
</Frame>

If you did not record your session, there will be no recording or statistic information.

## Viewing past recordings and statistics

<Frame>
  <img alt="Completedconfs" />
</Frame>

To view the recording, select **Play \[1]**. To save the video recording, **right-click** on the video player and select **"Save video as".**

To view the Learning Analytics Dashboard of the session, select **Statistics \[2].**


# Creating and starting a Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/creating-and-starting-a-conference

Canvas has BigBlueButton built into the core, making it easy to start a virtual class, invite students, and manage recordings.

Instructors can create a Conference in a Canvas course to host virtual lectures, run virtual office hours, and meet with student groups. You can [create a new Conference](#create-a-new-conference) and [start a created Conference](#start-a-created-conference).

Creating a Conference is a course permission. If you cannot create a Conference, your institution has restricted this feature; contact your Canvas administrator for more information.

Conference invitations are sent when you create the Conference in Canvas. We recommend creating a course event in the Calendar to alert invitees of an upcoming Conference, then creating the Conference 30 minutes before the host time.

## Create a new Conference

BigBlueButton is available within the course menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Conferences" />
</Frame>

To create a Conference, select **BigBlueButton \[1]** in your course navigation, then select the **Add Conference \[2]** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 18 12 AM" />
</Frame>

The **New Video Conference Setting \[3]** window appears and prompts you to add your Conference details.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Conferencesettings" />
</Frame>

1. **Name:** The title of the Conference you are creating.
2. **Duration in Minutes:** How long students can join after the Conference starts, after which the session closes its doors.
3. **Enable recording for this conference:** Check this to enable start, pause, and stop recording, along with recording recovery.
4. **No time limit:** Keeps the Conference open after starting, so the join option is always visible.
5. **Enable waiting room:** Creates a waiting room so you can admit selected students or everyone when you are ready.
6. **Add to calendar:** Adds the Conference to the course calendar.
7. **Description:** Add details about your Conference.
8. **Create:** Confirms creation of the Conference with these settings.

## Start a created Conference

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 31 31 AM" />
</Frame>

To launch the Conference, select **Start**. Canvas redirects you to your BigBlueButton Conference.


# Deleting a Canvas Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/deleting-a-conference

Instructors can delete new and concluded Conferences in Canvas, which also removes the Conference and its associated recordings from the server.

Instructors can delete both new and concluded Conferences in Canvas. Deleting a concluded Conference also immediately removes the Conference from the server, along with all associated recordings.

## Delete a Conference

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 58 39 AM" />
</Frame>

To delete a Conference, open **BigBlueButton** in your course navigation.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 25 02 AM" />
</Frame>

Locate the Conference you want to delete, select its **Settings** icon, then select **Delete**.

<Warning>
  Deleting a Conference that is in progress ends the meeting and removes it, along with any associated recordings, from the server.
</Warning>


# Ending a Conference in Canvas
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/ending-a-conference-in-canvas

Instructors and moderators can end a Canvas Conference either from the Canvas Conferences page or from within the BigBlueButton meeting interface.

You can end a Conference two ways: [from the Canvas Conferences page](#end-a-conference-from-canvas) or [from the BigBlueButton meeting interface](#end-a-conference-from-bigbluebutton).

When you create a Conference in Canvas, you can give it a time limit, or check **No time limit (for long-running conferences)** to keep it open.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 11 29 AM" />
</Frame>

Either way, the Conference appears under **New Conferences**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 11 42 AM" />
</Frame>

## End a Conference from Canvas

To end a Conference, select **End**. A message appears to confirm you want to end the Conference.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 13 01 AM" />
</Frame>

Selecting **End** removes users' ability to join and ends the live Conference. To confirm, select **Ok**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 08 34 AM" />
</Frame>

The Conference now appears under **Concluded Conferences**, along with any associated recordings.

## End a Conference from BigBlueButton

As a moderator, you can end the Conference when you log out of BigBlueButton.

To open the settings menu, select the three vertical dots in the upper-right corner of the interface.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 13 52 PM" />
</Frame>

Select **Leave**, then select **End session for all**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 14 30 PM" />
</Frame>

When prompted with **Are you sure you want to end this session?**, select **End session for all users**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 16 At 9 15 19 PM" />
</Frame>


# Can I manually add course member to an existing Conference?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-can-i-add-participants-to-an-existing-conference

Yes, if the conference is not yet concluded.

If a Conference has not yet concluded (move to the bottom under Concluded Conferences), you can manually edit the the Attendees list and other course members.  This change will take effect the next time the conference is started.

<note>
  If the conference was created with `Invite all course members` selected (which is the default setting), Canvas will automatically add late course enrollments to Attendees list of the conference.
</note>

To edit the Conference, locate the non-concluded conference you want to update, select the cog wheel icon, then select **Edit**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Edit and Delete dropdown menu options" />
</Frame>

## Add a course member

To add a specific course member, select the **Course Members** and a drop-down list will appear showing all users not yet in the Attendees list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Selecting attendees for a video conference" />
</Frame>

Select **Save** to apply the changes.

## Add all course members

To add all course members, Select the checkbox **Invite all course members** and click **Save**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Invite options for course attendees shown" />
</Frame>

Select **Save** to apply the changes.


# Can we automatically enable all Conferences to be recorded?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-can-we-automatically-enable-all-conferences-to-be-recorded

Canvas administrators can use custom theme JavaScript to force the record option on for every new Conference and prevent instructors from disabling it.

When you create a new Conference, the record option is checked by default.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Record option checked by default on a new Conference" />
</Frame>

At some schools, however, this setting is not checked by default.

If you are a Canvas administrator, you can force the record option on for every instructor at your institution. Canvas lets you apply your own theme with custom CSS and JavaScript, and a small JavaScript snippet sets **Enable recording for this conference** to true and prevents instructors from disabling it.

The following video walks through the setup: [https://youtu.be/7oITHgBU8jg](https://youtu.be/7oITHgBU8jg).

To apply the change, add the JavaScript snippet below to your theme, or append it to any existing JavaScript in your theme.

```text theme={null}
/* Force conferences to be recorded */
$("button.new-conference-btn").live("click",
 function() {
  rec = $("#web_conference_user_settings_record")[0];
  if (rec) { rec.checked = true; rec.disabled = true; }
 }
);
```

After you upload the snippet, the record option is checked and disabled whenever an instructor creates a new Conference.


# How does the Duration value affect user's ability to enter a conference in Canvas?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-how-does-the-duration-value-affect-users-ability-to-enter-a-conference-in-canvas

The Duration value sets a window during which users can enter a Canvas Conference; once it expires the Conference locks, but a running session continues.

In Canvas, the **Duration** value sets a time window that "locks the door" to your Conference once the window expires.

In the example below, **Duration** is set to 60 minutes. After the Conference is created, users can enter it anytime during the next 60 minutes.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Duration field set to 60 minutes" />
</Frame>

## What happens when the Duration expires

When the Duration expires, new participants can no longer join the Conference.

The expired Duration does not affect a session that is already running. The running session continues until one of these conditions is reached.

Within the BigBlueButton session:

* the last person leaves the session,
* a moderator ends the session, or
* the session exceeds the maximum length of 9 hours (540 minutes).

Within Canvas:

* the educator ends the Conference in the Canvas UI.

Think of the Duration as a door to the Conference room. Once the door locks, no one new can enter, but users already inside can stay until their session finishes.

After the Duration expires, the Conference moves to the **Concluded** section the next time you refresh the page in Canvas.


# How long will recordings appear in Canvas?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-how-long-will-recordings-appear-in-canvas

Canvas Conferences BigBlueButton Essentials recordings expire after 7 days by default; you can upgrade to permanent, downloadable recordings.

By default, Canvas Conferences BigBlueButton Essentials recordings expire after 7 days.

To keep recordings past 7 days, contact your Canvas representative to upgrade to permanent and downloadable recordings.


# Integration with Canvas Studio
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-integration-with-canvas-studio

Canvas customers on BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting can have Conferences recordings upload automatically to Studio and share them with the instructor's account.

If you upgrade to BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting for Conferences and use Studio (Canvas's video content management system), we can configure your BigBlueButton Enhanced account to upload recordings into Studio automatically and share them with the instructor's account.

The screenshot below shows recordings from Conferences shared in the instructor's account.

<img alt="Recordings from Conferences shared in Studio" />

## What you need

To configure the upload, we need a Studio account for making API requests. The account must be able to sign in to your `<canvas_sitename>`.instructuremedia.com address (for example, myuniversity.instructuremedia.com) and have privileges to upload videos and share them with other accounts.

## Get started

To set up Studio integration for your BigBlueButton Enhanced account, contact your Blindside Networks Customer Success Manager. We will work with you to configure and test the integration.


# What are Canvas Conferences?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-what-are-conferences

Canvas integrates BigBlueButton as Conferences, letting instructors and students hold virtual lectures, office hours, and student group sessions inside a course.

Canvas by Instructure includes a built-in version of BigBlueButton called **Conferences**, available to all Canvas customers.

Conferences are primarily used for virtual lectures, virtual office hours, and student groups. Instructors can create a conference and invite students, and students can start conferences from within their student groups.

<Note>
  Creating a conference is a course permission. If you cannot create a conference, your institution has restricted this feature.
</Note>


# What are "Protected Recording Links"? 
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-what-are-protected-recording-links

Recording links in BigBlueButton Essentials for Canvas Conferences are protected by default, so they expire, are tied to one viewer, and can only be opened through Canvas.

All recording links in BigBlueButton Essentials for Canvas Conferences are protected by default.

Protected recording links are only accessible through the Canvas Conferences interface. When a recording is ready for viewing, users see it in the list of available recordings.

To view a recording, select the **video** link.

<Frame>
  <img alt="List of available recordings in Canvas Conferences" />
</Frame>

## How protection works

Protected links are generated dynamically, expire after **6 hours**, and are only viewable by **one person**.

Because each link is tied to a single viewer, a user cannot copy the URL from their browser and share it with others.

For example, here is a link to a protected recording:

`https://recordings.reu1.blindsidenetworks.com/maintenance/dc64599ad3f967628e8e28f6c0cc9643a43424c0-1497980855997/capture/`

Opening this link in another browser returns a 404 error that reads "This may be a protected recording."

<Frame>
  <img alt="404 error for a protected recording" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Protected recording links do not prevent a user from recording their screen while watching, or from right-clicking and downloading the video file. They make it harder for users to casually share a recording.
</Note>


# Why has my recording not appeared?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-why-has-my-recording-not-appeared

A Conferences recording only appears in Canvas if recording was enabled before the conference started and a moderator started recording at least once during it.

For a recording to appear in Canvas, two things must happen.

## Enable recording before the conference starts

The conference must start with **Enable recording for this conference** selected. This option is enabled by default.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enable recording for this conference option" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Enable this option *before* the conference starts. Selecting the checkbox while the conference is already running has no effect.
</Note>

## Start recording during the conference

During the conference, a moderator must [select the Start/Resume Recording button to mark the start of recording](/docs/help/moderator-guide/start-and-stop-recording) at least once.

## When the recording appears

If both conditions are met, the recording appears within 24 hours after the conference concludes.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Recording listed in Canvas Conferences" />
</Frame>


# How to add a conference to the Canvas calendar?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/how-to-add-a-conference-to-the-calendar

Instructors can add a BigBlueButton Conference to the Canvas calendar, either through the in-Conference shortcut or by linking a calendar entry directly to the Conference.

When creating a BigBlueButton Conference, you can use an option within the Conference to add it to the calendar. However, this shortcut has two limitations:

1. You must invite everyone to the Conference.
2. You cannot set many calendar entry properties, such as repeating events.

A better approach is to first create the Conference the way you want, such as with specific users, then create the calendar entry and link it directly to the Conference.

The following video walks you through how to do this.

<iframe title="YouTube video player" />


# Inviting  course members to a Conference 
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/inviting-course-members-to-a-conference

The built in access control list gives you full control over who can see the conference

Each conference has a built-in **access control list** that lets you specify exactly who can see the conference, join it, and view subsequent recordings.  By default, all members in the course are invited to the Conference, and any late enrollments automatically add the to conference.

You can change this default when creating a conference by un-selecting **Invite all course members**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Conference attendee invitation methods explained" />
</Frame>

To choose specific members, unselect **Invite all course members** and select individual members.  The options to invite sections, groups, and users then become available.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 30 10 AM" />
</Frame>

When creating a conference and unselecting **Invite all course members**, and Canvas will respect your selection and **not** automatically add late enrollments.

To save your Conference settings, select **Update**.


# Locating & deleting recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/locating-deleting-recordings

Instructors can find and delete recordings of concluded Canvas Conferences, and premium-tier customers can also view recording statistics and notes.

If you enabled recording when you created the Conference and used the start/stop record button during the live session, a recording is available afterward.

To locate a recording, select **BigBlueButton** in the course navigation.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 58 39 AM" />
</Frame>

Under **Concluded Conferences**, locate the Conference activity to view its available recordings.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Confdelete" />
</Frame>

You may need to expand the **Concluded Conference Activity Menu \[1]** to reach the recording **Video Link \[4]**. From here you can also **Delete \[5]** a recording.

If you are a premium tier Canvas Customer you will also have access to recorded meeting **Statistics \[2] and Notes \[3]**. If you are a premium-tier Canvas customer, you also have access to recorded meeting **Statistics \[2]** and **Notes \[3]**.

<Note>
  A recording takes approximately the same amount of time to process as the duration of the live session.
</Note>


# Enabling recording for all Canvas Conferences
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/troubleshooting-enabling-recording-for-all-canvas-conferences

Canvas administrators can add a JavaScript snippet to their theme to force recording on for every Conference and prevent instructors from disabling it.

If your Canvas theme allows custom CSS and JavaScript, you can force recording on for every Conference created at your institution and prevent instructors from disabling it.

To set up forced recording, add the JavaScript snippet below to your Canvas theme. The snippet sets **Enable recording for this conference** to true and disables the checkbox so instructors cannot turn it off.

The following video demonstrates the result:

[https://youtu.be/7oITHgBU8jg](https://youtu.be/7oITHgBU8jg)

Add this snippet to your theme, or append it to any existing JavaScript already in your theme:

```javascript theme={null}
/* Force conferences to be recorded */
$("button.new-conference-btn").live("click",
 function() {
  rec = $("#web_conference_user_settings_record")[0];
  if (rec) { rec.checked = true; rec.disabled = true; }
 }
);
```

<Note>
  This change applies to every Conference created in Canvas. Instructors will see the **Enable recording for this conference** checkbox already selected and greyed out.
</Note>


# How to hide the "Allow Attendees To..." selections
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/troubleshooting-how-to-hide-the-allow-attendees-to-selections

Canvas administrators can add a JavaScript snippet to their theme that hides the "Allow Attendees To..." options so instructors cannot set them incorrectly when creating a Conference.

Canvas administrators can hide the **Allow Attendees To...** selections that appear when creating a BigBlueButton Conference in Canvas. Hiding these options prevents Conferences from being set up with incorrect attendee settings.

The snippet only affects educator and administrator accounts, which keeps the impact on students' browsers to a minimum.

To hide the selections, add the following code to your Canvas theme JavaScript:

```javascript theme={null}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Hide BigBlueButton Conferences "Allow Attendees To..." selections
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

if(windowUrl.includes('/conferences') === true) {
  if(ENV.current_user_roles.indexOf('teacher') > 0 || ENV.current_user_roles.indexOf('admin') > 0) {
    $(document).click(function() {
      setTimeout(function() {
        $("span").each(function() {
          var text = $(this).text();
          if(text === 'Allow Attendees To...') {
            $(this).parent().parent().hide()
          }
        });
      }, 10);
    });
  }
}
```

The **Allow Attendees To...** selections appear before you add the code:

Screenshot of Allow Attendees To... prior to implementing code.

After you add the code, the selections no longer appear:

Screenshot of Allow Attendees To... post to implementing code.


# Record-enabled conference not appearing for viewing
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/troubleshooting-record-enabled-conference-not-appearing-for-viewing

Moderators must select the Start/Stop recording button in a live Canvas Conference for it to record, even when the Conference was created with recording enabled.

When a Canvas Conference is enabled for recording, the moderator must still select the **Start/Stop recording** button in the live session to capture a recording.

If a Conference is enabled for recording when it is created, the moderator sees the **Start/Stop recording** button in the upper-right corner of the BigBlueButton interface.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 44 37 AM" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Enabling recording does not capture the session automatically. The moderator must select the **Start/Stop recording** button to begin capturing.
</Note>

To start recording, select the **Start/Stop recording** button. A prompt appears to confirm you want to begin recording.

Once recording starts, the button changes to **light blue** with a **red** indicator, and a counter shows the number of minutes recorded from the session.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 49 30 AM" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 24 At 10 45 53 AM" />
</Frame>

## Enable recording on an existing conference

If you do not see the **Start/Stop recording** button, recording was not enabled when the Conference was created in Canvas.

To enable recording, log out of the current session before editing the Conference settings.

<Warning>
  Edits applied to a live session do not take effect until all attendees leave and the session restarts.
</Warning>

For help creating and editing your Canvas Conferences, see [Creating and starting a Conference](/docs/integrations/canvas/creating-and-starting-a-conference).


# Students are not able to see/join their Canvas Conferences
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/troubleshooting-students-are-not-able-to-seejoin-their-canvas-conferences

Every conference has a built-in access control list

By default, when you create a conference, all course members automaticall have access to the conference.  They can see the conference, join it, and view the subsequent recordings.  Also, any subsequent late joiners will be added to the conference Course Members.

## Conference with a specific membership

If when a conference was created and **Invite all course members** was unchecked, only specific students manually added to the Course Members will be able to see/join the conference.

You can edit the membership of such conferences by selecting the gear icon and choosing **Edit**.

For such conferences, once they are ended from within Canvas, they move to the bottom of the screen under **Concluded Conferences**

<Frame>
  <img alt="List of concluded online conferences" />
</Frame>

Once concluded, they are not longer editable.

<Warning>
  Once a Conference is concluded, you can no longer edit its **Members** list.
</Warning>

If you are on BigBlueButton Enhanced hosting (a hosting subscription with Blindside Networks), depending on your account settings, you may be able to give late joiners access to a concluded recording by first viewing the recoding and sharing its direct link.

To obtain the link, as the instructor, open the video playback, copy the recording URL, and share it with the students.


# Students are not able to view their Concluded Conference Recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/troubleshooting-students-are-not-able-to-view-their-concluded-conference-recordings

You can sometimes share a direct recording link with students.

## Share the recording URL

To share a recording with someone who was not invited, copy its URL from the playback page and send it to them directly.

To open the recording, locate the Conference recording and select **View**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 9 43 24 AM" />
</Frame>

Once the recording loads in the browser tab, copy the recording URL from the web address bar.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 10 15 AM" />
</Frame>

Post this link to your course announcements, or send it directly to anyone who was not invited to or not registered for the Conference.


# Using BigBlueButton with Appointments
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/using-bigbluebutton-with-appointments

Instructors can link Canvas appointment time slots to a BigBlueButton Conference so students who sign up can join the session with a single click.

Canvas has a calendar feature called [Appointment Group](https://community.canvaslms.com/t5/Canvas-Basics-Guide/How-do-I-add-an-appointment-group-in-a-course-calendar/ta-p/617602), which lets you set a range of time slots where students can sign up.

You can link these time slots directly to a BigBlueButton Conference, so students who sign up for an appointment join you in a BigBlueButton session with a single click.

## Create the Conference

First, create a BigBlueButton Conference in your course. Select **No time limit** so you can re-use the Conference, and select **Enable waiting room** so students cannot join unless you are present.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 20 08 PM" />
</Frame>

Select **Create** to create the Conference. You can also use an existing Conference.

## Copy the join link

Once the Conference is created, copy the URL that students use to start or join it. To copy it to the clipboard, point at the **Start/Join** link, right-click, and choose **Copy Link address**.

<img alt="Right-click context menu on the Start/Join link with Copy Link address highlighted" />

The copied URL looks like this:

[https://blindside.instructure.com/courses/9/conferences/1009/join](https://blindside.instructure.com/courses/9/conferences/1009/join)

This is a static join URL. Whenever a student selects the **Join** button, Canvas opens this URL to join this specific Conference.

## Add the link to an appointment group

Next, create an **Appointment Group** in your course calendar. The example below adds two appointments, at 9:00 AM and 9:30 AM.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 31 03 PM" />
</Frame>

In the screenshot above, the copied join link is pasted into the **Details** field. Select **Publish**.

Now, whenever students sign up for an Office Hours appointment, they see a clickable link to join. Canvas turns the pasted link into a clickable link automatically.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 28 21 PM" />
</Frame>

## Admit students with the waiting room

When you start the BigBlueButton Conference at the appointment time, use the **guest policy** to enable BigBlueButton's built-in waiting room. The waiting room lets you manage students as they join.

To set up the waiting room, select the gear icon and choose **Guest policy**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 35 18 PM" />
</Frame>

Select **Ask Moderator**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 01 At 1 35 25 PM" />
</Frame>

Now, when a student wants to join, you hear a sound and BigBlueButton shows the student in the **Waiting Users** panel.

You can message waiting users, then select the **(+)** button when you want them to join.

<img alt="Waiting Users panel showing students requesting to join, with a (+) button to admit them" />

The waiting room helps when you are running a few moments late with the previous student. Once you finish, you can admit the next waiting student.


# Viewing Recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/canvas/viewing-recordings

In Canvas BigBlueButton Conferences, anyone with access can expand a Conference to find its recordings and play them in a new window.

In Canvas BigBlueButton Conferences, a Conference that has a recording shows a small triangle to the left of its title.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 55 54 AM" />
</Frame>

To list the available recordings, select the triangle to expand the Conference.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 03 31 At 8 53 32 AM" />
</Frame>

To watch a recording, select **video**. The recording opens and plays in a new window.

<Note>
  Your instance of Canvas may offer different recording formats.
</Note>


# LTI
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/lti

Manage a BigBlueButton room launched from your LMS, edit room settings, and handle session recordings.

LTI integrations let instructors and students join BigBlueButton sessions directly from their learning management system. This page describes the room overview, room settings, and recording controls available after launching a room.

## View the room overview

When you open a room, you see how long the current session has been running and the controls for joining, ending, or editing the room.

<img alt="Room overview showing session running time, Join Session, End Session, and Edit Room buttons" />

* **\[1]** Session running time and the number of participants currently in the session.
* **\[2]** **Join Session** opens the running session.
* **\[3]** **End Session** ends the session for everyone (moderators only).
* **\[4]** **Edit Room** opens the room settings (moderators only).

If a session is not running, only **Join Session** is visible to attendees. If a session is running, attendees see the running time and **Join Session**, while moderators also see **End Session** and **Edit Room**.

## Edit a room

To rename the room, add a description, set a welcome message, or adjust lock and room settings, select **Edit Room**.

<img alt="Edit Room interface for naming the room and configuring lock and room settings" />

### Lock settings

Lock settings restrict what viewers can do during a session.

* **Disable cameras**
* **Disable microphones**
* **Disable private chat**
* **Disable public chat**
* **Disable shared notes**

### Room settings

Room settings control how participants enter the session.

* **Wait for moderator** holds viewers until a moderator joins.
* **All moderators** promotes every participant to moderator on join.

## Manage recordings

To review session content or change recording visibility, use the recording management panel.

<img alt="Recording management panel with controls for viewing presentations, statistics, recordings, and modifying recordings" />

* **\[1]** **View presentation** opens the presentation from the session.
* **\[2]** **View statistics** shows session attendance and engagement data.
* **\[3]** **View recordings** plays back the recorded session.
* **\[4]** **Modify recording** opens controls to publish, unpublish, delete, protect, or unprotect the recording.


# Activity completion
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion

Enable activity completion for BigBlueButton in Moodle using live event callbacks from the BigBlueButton server.

BigBlueButton can participate in Moodle activity completion.

<img alt="Activity completion overview in the BigBlueButton plugin" />

## Requirement

Activity completion depends on the BigBlueButton server sending live events back to Moodle, and on Moodle being configured to receive them.

## Enable it

1. Log in as an administrator.
2. Open the BigBlueButton plugin settings.
3. Enable **Register live events** or the equivalent site option.
4. Save the setting.

<img alt="Enable register live events in plugin settings" />

## Test it

If your Moodle server is behind a restrictive firewall, the callback might not reach Moodle correctly.

A simple test is:

1. enable live events
2. create a test recording
3. set a very low attendance threshold
4. confirm that the completion signal is received and processed


# Global settings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/global-settings

Review the main administrator-controlled settings that affect BigBlueButton behavior across a Moodle site.

Administrators can control how BigBlueButton behaves site-wide through the plugin settings.

## Common global settings

These often include:

* server URL and shared secret
* default welcome message behavior
* recording defaults
* recording refresh behavior
* wait for moderator defaults
* guest access availability
* participant defaults
* presentation availability

## Why they matter

These settings determine:

* which teacher-facing controls are visible
* the default values used for new activities
* which advanced features are available on your site

## Related pages

* [Recording defaults](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/recording-defaults)
* [Activity completion](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion)
* [Subplugins](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/subplugins)


# Install and configure
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/install-and-configure

Install the BigBlueButton Moodle activity and configure the BigBlueButton server URL and shared secret.

Administrators install BigBlueButton as a Moodle activity module and then configure the connection to the BigBlueButton server.

## Core setup steps

1. Install or upgrade the plugin through Moodle’s normal plugin workflow.
2. Open the BigBlueButton plugin settings in Moodle.
3. Enter the BigBlueButton server URL.
4. Enter the shared secret.
5. Save the settings.
6. Test by creating a sample activity and joining a room.

## Common configuration items

* BigBlueButton server URL
* Shared secret
* Checksum or signing options if available on your site
* Polling and recording refresh behavior

## After setup

Once the connection is working, instructors can begin creating activities in their courses.


# Language customization
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/language-customization

Update or customize BigBlueButton language strings in Moodle using language packs and the language customization workflow.

The BigBlueButton Moodle plugin follows Moodle’s standard localization model.

## Automatic update

If you use standard language packs without customization:

1. Go to **Site administration → Language → Language packs**
2. Install or update the relevant language pack
3. Use **Update all installed language packs** when needed

<img alt="Install language packs in Moodle" />

<img alt="Update all installed language packs" />

If translations exist in Moodle’s AMOS repository, they will be added to your Moodle server when the language pack is updated.

## Customized update

If your site customizes language strings:

1. Go to **Site administration → Language → Language customization**
2. Choose the language you want to edit
3. Open the language pack for editing
4. Filter to the BigBlueButton module strings
5. Update the strings you want to customize
6. Save the changes

<img alt="Open the Language customization area" />

<img alt="Choose the language pack to customize" />

<img alt="Open the selected language pack for editing" />

<img alt="Filter down to the BigBlueButton language strings" />

<img alt="Edit and save customized strings" />

## Why use customization

This is useful when:

* your organization wants friendlier language for learners
* you need a region-specific dialect
* the translated strings need to reflect local terminology

## Contributing back

If you create useful translations, consider contributing them to the Moodle AMOS translation workflow so future updates are easier for your team and others.


# Recording defaults
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/recording-defaults

Set the default recording behavior for BigBlueButton activities on your Moodle site.

BigBlueButton activities can be enabled to provide recording during live sessions. Administrators can control the defaults that teachers see when they create new activities.

## Common defaults

Recording defaults may include:

* whether sessions can be recorded by default
* how recordings are displayed in the activity
* whether recordings from deleted activities are included
* whether imported recordings are shown

## Why this matters

These defaults shape the teacher experience and reduce the need to configure the same recording behavior repeatedly in every course.

## Related pages

* [Global settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/global-settings)
* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)


# Roles and capabilities
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/roles-and-capabilities

Understand which Moodle roles and permissions affect who can create, join, manage, and administer BigBlueButton activities.

BigBlueButton behavior in Moodle depends on both the plugin’s own capabilities and the broader Moodle role model.

## Role-sensitive areas

Permissions affect who can:

* create activities
* join rooms
* join as moderator
* manage recordings
* see hidden activities
* change advanced activity settings

## Practical admin guidance

Review capabilities carefully for:

* managers
* editing teachers
* non-editing teachers
* students
* guests

If teachers report missing controls, this page is one of the first places to audit.


# Scheduled tasks
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/scheduled-tasks

Monitor the scheduled tasks BigBlueButton uses in Moodle for recording synchronization and background maintenance.

BigBlueButton uses Moodle scheduled tasks and background processing for maintenance work.

## Common examples

These tasks often handle:

* pending recording synchronization
* retrying recordings that were not found or were dismissed
* background recording maintenance
* notification processing

## Why admins should care

If recordings are delayed or missing, scheduled tasks are one of the first places to inspect.

Use Moodle’s scheduled task administration screens to confirm:

* tasks are enabled
* cron is running
* failures are not accumulating


# Subplugins
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/subplugins

Understand how BigBlueButton extension subplugins are surfaced in Moodle and how they can expand the integration.

Some Moodle sites include BigBlueButton extension subplugins that add extra features on top of the core activity.

## What subplugins can change

Depending on the site, subplugins may add:

* extra room settings
* enhanced recording workflows
* analytics and reporting
* guest approval flows
* presentation enhancements
* custom integrations

## Admin responsibility

Administrators should document which extensions are installed on their site because they can change both the teacher workflow and the user interface.

## Best practice

When troubleshooting, always confirm whether a behavior comes from:

* the core BigBlueButton Moodle activity
* a site-specific extension or subplugin


# BigBlueButton activity view with BNX
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view

Understand the enhanced BigBlueButton activity page in Moodle when the BNX extension is installed and enabled.

When BNX (BigBlueButton BN Experience) is installed and enabled, the BigBlueButton activity page in Moodle provides a modernised experience compared to the default Moodle core interface. The improvements focus on usability, accessibility, and more efficient management of recordings and session content.

BNX is available as a Moodle plugin at [moodle.org/plugins/bbbext\_bnx](https://moodle.org/plugins/bbbext_bnx). For a marketing-oriented overview of BNX and its sidecars, see [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview).

## What BNX changes

BNX does not replace the standard Moodle course navigation or activity structure. It builds on it, introducing targeted improvements across the activity header, recordings table, and navigation elements.

Key improvements introduced by BNX:

* Modernised recordings table layout with improved readability and spacing
* Inline editing controls for recording metadata
* Recording search functionality
* Cleaner pagination controls
* Better toolbar organisation
* Improved navigation presentation
* AI Features menu when AI providers are configured

## Activity header

The header shows the activity name, type label, scheduled dates, and course breadcrumb navigation.

**Navigation tabs** such as **BigBlueButton**, **Settings**, **Validate completion**, and a **More** menu appear based on the user's role and activity configuration. Depending on the installed BNX sidecars and Moodle version, additional indicators or integration options may appear here.

## AI features menu

When Moodle AI providers are configured and enabled, an **AI features** menu appears in the activity header. Available actions depend on the AI providers installed and user permissions. Examples include:

* recording summarisation
* transcript analysis
* content indexing
* AI-generated insights
* learning assistance tools

Whether this menu appears depends on the Moodle AI subsystem configuration, installed providers, and user permissions.

## Session status and join button

The activity page shows a status message that reflects whether the room is open, scheduled, or waiting for a moderator. When the session is ready, the **Join session** button launches the virtual classroom in a new tab.

BNX replaces the traditional Wait for Moderator experience with [PreSession Lobby access](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework#presession-lobby-access). Participants can enter a moderated lobby and wait for moderator approval rather than being blocked from the session.

Teachers typically join as moderators and students as viewers, following the role mappings configured in the activity settings.

## Enhanced recordings management

The recordings table is one of the most visible improvements BNX introduces. It adds a searchable interface, improved pagination, a cleaner column layout, and inline editing — making it more practical for activities with large recording collections.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Modernised recordings table in BNX" />
</Frame>

### Recordings table columns

| Column | Description |
| - | - |
| **Playback** | Links to available playback formats |
| **Name** | Recording title, editable inline |
| **Description** | Short description, editable inline |
| **Preview** | Thumbnail or visual preview |
| **Date** | Recording date |
| **Duration** | Length of the recording |
| **Toolbar** | Action buttons for each recording |

### Playback formats

Recordings may be available in more than one format. Common formats include:

* **Presentation** — slides with audio and video from the session
* **Video** — full video recording
* **Podcast** — audio-only playback
* **Transcript** — text transcript, when available

Available formats depend on the BigBlueButton server configuration and recording processing.

### Inline editing

Teachers can rename a recording or update its description directly in the table without navigating to a separate form. Select the field to activate the inline editor, enter the new value, and confirm.

### Search and pagination

BNX adds a search field above the recordings table. Use it to filter recordings by name or other metadata. Pagination controls let you move between pages and set the number of rows visible at once. These controls are particularly useful for activities with large recording collections.

### Toolbar actions

The toolbar column shows actions available for each recording. Depending on permissions, actions may include viewing, editing, publishing, unpublishing, and deleting. See [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings) for the full workflow.

### Import recording links

Some sites show an **Import recording links** button above the table. This lets teachers link external recordings into the activity, which is useful for migrated or externally hosted content. See [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links).

## Overall UX improvements

Compared to Moodle core, BNX reduces visual clutter and makes the recordings experience faster and more scalable. Benefits include:

* better scalability for activities with many recordings
* faster editing and management workflows
* improved discoverability of recordings and actions
* more consistent usability across Moodle versions

<Note>
  The exact features, tabs, and actions visible on the activity page depend on the Moodle version, installed BNX sidecars, user permissions, configured AI integrations, active theme, and BigBlueButton server capabilities.
</Note>

## Related pages

* [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview)
* [Join your first session](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/join-your-first-session)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)
* [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links)
* [BNX framework and feature enhancements](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework)


# BNX DataHub
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub

Expose BigBlueButton session and recording data from Moodle to reporting, analytics, and integration tools through a secure interface.

**BNX DataHub** is a sidecar built on the [BNX framework](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework) that exposes BigBlueButton session and recording data from Moodle to downstream tools, such as reporting dashboards, analytics platforms, and other integrations, without requiring anyone to wire directly into Moodle core.

<Frame>
  <img alt="BNX DataHub session and attendance data" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  BNX DataHub is a complementary component offered by Blindside Networks alongside the free, open-source [BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview) plugin. Contact [Blindside Networks](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact-us/) for availability and licensing.
</Note>

## What problem it solves

Session and recording activity data lives inside Moodle and the BigBlueButton server, but institutions increasingly need that data elsewhere: institutional reporting warehouses, engagement dashboards, or custom automation. Building and maintaining a direct integration against Moodle internals for every downstream tool is fragile and duplicates effort across deployments.

DataHub provides a single, clean, secure interface for accessing this data, so downstream tools don't need to understand Moodle internals or the BigBlueButton API directly.

## Key capabilities

* **Structured access to session data** — exposes session metadata (schedule, participation, duration) in a consistent format for downstream consumption.
* **Structured access to recording data** — exposes recording metadata and availability so reporting and analytics tools can track recording activity across courses.
* **Secure interface** — designed so external tools integrate through a controlled access layer rather than querying Moodle or BigBlueButton internals directly.
* **Built on the BNX sidecar architecture** — installs alongside BNX and other sidecars without modifying Moodle core or the core BigBlueButton activity.

## Common use cases

* Feeding session and recording activity into institutional reporting or business intelligence tools
* Powering custom engagement or usage dashboards outside Moodle
* Automating workflows that react to session or recording events (for example, notifying other systems when a recording becomes available)

## How it fits with BNX

DataHub depends on the [BNX framework](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework) being installed and enabled. BNX provides the shared extension points and infrastructure that DataHub uses to read session and recording data safely, alongside the usability improvements described in [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view).

## Who it's for

DataHub is aimed at institutions that need to integrate BigBlueButton activity into existing reporting, analytics, or automation pipelines, without building and maintaining bespoke integrations against Moodle or BigBlueButton internals.

## Related pages

* [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview)
* [BNX framework and feature enhancements](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework)
* [BNX Insights](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/insights)


# BNX framework and feature enhancements
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework

Understand the BNX platform capabilities, extensibility architecture, feature evolution, and release history.

BNX (BigBlueButton BN Experience) is a foundational enhancement framework for BigBlueButton in Moodle. Rather than modifying Moodle core, BNX provides a layered extension architecture that improves usability, supports workflow customisation, and enables future innovation through a shared ecosystem of sidecars.

BNX is available as a Moodle plugin at [moodle.org/plugins/bbbext\_bnx](https://moodle.org/plugins/bbbext_bnx). For a marketing-oriented overview of BNX and its sidecars, see [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview).

BNX provides:

* shared UX improvements across the activity interface
* an extensible enhancement architecture via sidecars
* advanced session management capabilities
* workflow customisation without intrusive core modifications
* shared infrastructure powering the BNX extension ecosystem

For the end-user activity interface changes introduced by BNX, see [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view).

## PreSession lobby access

BNX replaces the traditional **Wait for Moderator** behaviour with a moderated PreSession Lobby. Instead of being blocked at the join page, participants can enter the lobby and wait for a moderator to approve access.

<Frame>
  <img alt="PreSession Lobby in BNX" />
</Frame>

Key aspects of the PreSession Lobby:

* participants are admitted to a waiting state rather than refused entry
* moderators review and approve access from within the session
* the workflow improves session readiness and coordination
* it removes the confusion caused by hard rejections in the core wait-for-moderator flow

## Enhanced recording experience

BNX replaces the legacy recordings table implementation with a modernised interface that scales better for activities with large recording collections.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Modernised recordings table in BNX" />
</Frame>

Improvements include:

* searchable recordings table
* improved pagination and row-count controls
* inline editing for recording names and descriptions
* consistent playback format presentation
* better toolbar organisation and action clarity

For a full description of the recording interface, see [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view#enhanced-recordings-management).

## Integrated reminder management

Starting with BNX 1.1, the reminder functionality previously provided by the BN Reminders sidecar was consolidated into BNX. This gives administrators a single place to manage all reminder-related configuration.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Email Reminders in BNX" />
</Frame>

Capabilities include:

* reminder scheduling tied to session dates
* email content customisation
* consolidated administration in the BNX activity settings

## Integrated lock settings controls

BNX 1.1 also absorbed the lock settings functionality previously managed by the `bnx_locksettings` sidecar.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Lock Settings in BNX" />
</Frame>

Lock controls available through BNX include:

* webcam restrictions
* microphone restrictions
* chat controls
* shared notes restrictions
* lock-on-join behaviour

## Improved guest access workflow

BNX 1.0.1 introduced a dedicated guest access endpoint that replaces the Moodle core guest page in BNX contexts.

Improvements include:

* a dedicated `guest.php` endpoint with its own join form
* a custom URL builder for guest links
* improved logout and redirect handling after the session ends
* a cleaner guest experience consistent with the rest of the BNX activity presentation

## Smarter default configuration handling

BNX 1.0.1 added support for auto-applied defaults that are managed centrally rather than depending on individual sidecar configurations.

Benefits include:

* reduced repetitive manual configuration when creating activities
* consistent defaults applied across courses
* defaults managed independently of sidecar installation state

## Developer and extensibility improvements

BNX provides a shared foundation for sidecar development within the BNX extension ecosystem.

Developer-facing capabilities include:

* shared debug helpers for BNX sidecars
* reusable form customisation helpers for consistent mod form overrides
* sidecar architecture support enabling modular capability extensions
* improved maintainability through shared abstractions

## BNX sidecars

BNX also serves as the foundation for additional sidecars offered by Blindside Networks, including [BNX Insights](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/insights) and [BNX DataHub](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub). See [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview) for details.

## Release history

### BNX 1.1 — May 1, 2026

* Migrated BN Reminders functionality and reminder data into BNX, consolidating reminder settings and email customisation into the core BNX experience (MD-90, MD-104).
* Migrated lock settings controls from `bnx_locksettings` into BNX and absorbed the legacy sidecar configuration into BNX defaults (MD-107).
* Refactored mod form header label overrides into a reusable helper to simplify BNX-driven form customisations (MD-100).
* Added a shared developer debug helper for BNX sidecars.

### BNX 1.0.1 — April 1, 2026

* Added a BNX-specific guest access endpoint (`guest.php`) with its own join form, URL builder, and logout redirect flow, replacing the core guest page in BNX contexts (GIT-1).
* Hides BBB server setup instructions in the activity settings when credentials are pre-configured (MD-98).
* Improved recordings table UX (MD-94).
* Added support for auto-set default settings decoupled from sidecars (MD-95, MD-97).

### BNX 1.0 — March 11, 2026

* First stable open-source release of `bbbext_bnx`.
* Introduced the BNX Framework: BigBlueButton BN Experience is a foundational UX enhancement extension for BigBlueButton in Moodle, featuring moderator approval workflows and shared capabilities that power the BNX extension family.
* Added PreSession Lobby access, replacing the Wait for Moderator flow.
* Delivered an enhanced recording experience by improving the room recordings table and ensuring recording features work end-to-end.


# BNX Insights
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/insights

Bring Moodle course context into the BigBlueButton session, so teachers see who's expected and what matters, in real time.

**BNX Insights** is a sidecar built on the [BNX framework](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework) that connects the Moodle course context to the live BigBlueButton session. Instead of a teacher only seeing who has joined, Insights surfaces who was expected, based on the Moodle course roster, along with relevant course context as in-session alerts.

<Note>
  BNX Insights is a complementary component offered by Blindside Networks alongside the free, open-source [BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview) plugin. Contact [Blindside Networks](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact-us/) for availability and licensing.
</Note>

## What problem it solves

By default, a teacher running a BigBlueButton session only sees the participants who actually joined. There's no easy way to tell, in the moment, whether a student is late, absent, or was never enrolled to begin with, and no way to surface Moodle-side context (grades, group membership, prior attendance) without leaving the session to check Moodle.

Insights closes that gap by bringing course roster data and relevant Moodle context directly into the session.

## Key capabilities

* **Expected attendee roster** — passes the Moodle course roster into the BigBlueButton session so moderators can see who is enrolled, not just who has joined.
* **Missing participant visibility** — highlights enrolled students who haven't joined, making it easy to spot absences as the session runs.
* **In-session contextual alerts** — surfaces relevant Moodle context (such as group membership or course events) as alerts inside the BigBlueButton session, so teachers don't have to switch tabs to find it.
* **Built on the BNX sidecar architecture** — installs alongside BNX and other sidecars without requiring changes to Moodle core or the core BigBlueButton activity.

## How it fits with BNX

Insights depends on the [BNX framework](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework) being installed and enabled. BNX provides the shared extension points, and Insights plugs into them to add roster awareness and contextual alerts to the session experience described in [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view).

## Who it's for

Insights is aimed at institutions that want better real-time visibility into attendance and engagement during live sessions, particularly larger deployments where teachers manage many students across multiple courses and can't rely on manually cross-checking Moodle rosters.

## Related pages

* [BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview)
* [BNX framework and feature enhancements](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework)
* [BNX DataHub](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub)


# BNX: BigBlueButton BN Experience
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/overview

Discover BNX, the extension layer that upgrades BigBlueButton in Moodle beyond core, and its DataHub and Insights sidecars.

BigBlueButton became part of Moodle core in 2021, giving every Moodle teacher a virtual classroom out of the box. That's a solid foundation, but core moves at the pace of a stable, broadly-used product. **BNX (BigBlueButton BN Experience)** is how Blindside Networks keeps pushing the experience forward, without forking or patching Moodle core.

BNX is a free Moodle subplugin (`bbbext_bnx`) available on the [Moodle Plugins directory](https://marketplace.moodle.com/plugins/bbbext_bnx). Install it alongside the core BigBlueButton activity and it upgrades the experience immediately, no migration, no fork, no risk to your existing setup.

## What BNX gives you today

BNX ships concrete, visible improvements to the day-to-day BigBlueButton experience in Moodle:

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="PreSession Lobby" icon="door-open" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework#presession-lobby-access">
    Replaces the confusing "Wait for Moderator" screen with a proper lobby, so participants always know where they stand.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Modernised recordings view" icon="table" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view#enhanced-recordings-management">
    A responsive, searchable, sortable recordings table with inline editing, replacing the legacy YUI datatable.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Integrated reminders and lock settings" icon="lock" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework#integrated-reminder-management">
    Consolidated administration for session reminders and BigBlueButton lock controls, in one place.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Improved group session handling" icon="users" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework">
    Targeted fixes for reliability in courses that lean heavily on Moodle groups and groupings.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

For the full breakdown of what changed, see [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view) and [BNX framework and feature enhancements](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework).

## Why BNX exists

Once BigBlueButton lived in Moodle core, every customer-driven enhancement had three uncomfortable options: fork core and lose upstream compatibility, patch core upstream and wait through a long, high-bar release cycle, or ship one-off plugins that don't scale once there are several of them competing for the same hooks.

BNX is the fourth option: **one safe place to extend and override core BigBlueButton behavior**, designed from day one to host additional capabilities on top of it. Moodle core stays clean, administrators get predictable upgrades, and new functionality plugs in as a **sidecar** — added, swapped, or scoped to a specific deployment without disturbing anything else.

## A framework, not just a feature pack

BNX is deliberately built as an extensible foundation. Anything shipped in BNX today, the PreSession Lobby, the recordings view, reminders, lock settings, is also a proof point for the same extend-don't-replace pattern that powers everything after it.

That extensibility is what unlocks the wider BNX family of **sidecars**, optional subplugins that build on the BNX framework to add capabilities Blindside Networks builds for customers who need to go further than usability polish, into analytics, reporting, and integrations.

## The BNX sidecar ecosystem

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="BNX Insights" icon="chart-line" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/insights">
    Brings the Moodle course roster into the BigBlueButton session and surfaces relevant Moodle context as in-session alerts, so teachers see who's expected, not just who showed up.
  </Card>

  <Card title="BNX DataHub" icon="database" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub">
    Exposes session and recording data to downstream tools such as reporting, analytics, and other integrations, through a clean, secure interface.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

Sidecars are offered by Blindside Networks as complementary components for organizations that want more than the free, open-source BNX base plugin provides. Each sidecar has its own installation and licensing, and installs cleanly alongside BNX without affecting other sidecars or Moodle core.

## Get BNX

BNX is available now on the Moodle Plugins directory at [marketplace.moodle.com/plugins/bbbext\_bnx](https://marketplace.moodle.com/plugins/bbbext_bnx). Requirements: Moodle 5.1+ recommended, BigBlueButtonBN ≥ 2025100600.

<Note>
  BNX Insights and BNX DataHub are complementary components provided by Blindside Networks for organizations that want expanded analytics and integration capabilities. Contact [Blindside Networks](https://blindsidenetworks.com/contact-us/) to learn more about availability and licensing.
</Note>

## Related pages

* [BigBlueButton activity view with BNX](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/activity-view)
* [BNX framework and feature enhancements](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework)
* [BNX Insights](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/insights)
* [BNX DataHub](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub)


# Moodle FAQ
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/faq

Quick answers to common Moodle integration questions, with links to the main BigBlueButton Moodle documentation pages.

This page preserves the question-driven entry points from the older Moodle documentation while keeping the new role-based structure as the main navigation.

## Activity setup

### How do I create a BigBlueButton activity?

See [Create your first activity](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity).

### How do I configure room settings?

See [Room settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/room-settings).

### How do I schedule a session?

See [Schedule a session](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/schedule-session).

### How do participants and roles work?

See [Participants and roles](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/participants-and-roles).

### How does grouping work?

See [Groups and grouping](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/groups-and-grouping).

## Presentations and recordings

### Can I add a presentation or document ahead of time?

See [Presentations](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/presentations).

### Where do I find recordings?

See [Find and play recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/find-and-play-recordings).

### How do I control visibility and access to recordings?

See [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings).

### How do I edit recording names and descriptions?

See [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings).

### How do I import recording links?

See [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links).

## Administration

### How do I enable activity completion?

See [Activity completion](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion).

### How do I customize language strings?

See [Language customization](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/language-customization).

## Troubleshooting

### I upgraded and the recording list is missing. What changed?

See [Missing recordings after upgrade](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade).

### How do I recover a deleted recording row?

See [Recovering a recording missing from Moodle](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/recovering-a-deleted-recording).

### How do I show recordings from deleted activities?

See [Deleted activity recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings).

### How do I downgrade the plugin?

See [Downgrading the plugin](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/downgrading-plugin).


# Create your first activity
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity

Create your first BigBlueButton activity in Moodle and configure the core options needed to launch a live session.

Use BigBlueButton activities to host virtual lectures, hold office hours, and coordinate student groups from inside Moodle.

## Before you begin

Make sure:

* your Moodle administrator has installed and configured the BigBlueButton activity module
* you have permission to add activities to the course

If you cannot create a BigBlueButton activity, your institution has likely restricted that feature. Contact your Moodle administrator.

## Create the activity

1. Open the Moodle course where you want to add the activity.
2. Turn editing on.
3. Select **Add an activity or resource** in the topic or week where you want the room.
4. Choose **BigBlueButton**.
5. Enter a room name.
6. Optionally add a description that appears on the course page.
7. Review any room, recording, participant, and schedule settings you want to change.
8. Save the activity.

<Frame>
  <img alt="2026 05 08 15 23" />
</Frame>

<img alt="2026 05 08 15 33" />

<Frame>
  <img alt="2026 05 08 15 34" />
</Frame>

## What to configure first

For a good first setup, review these areas:

* [Room settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/room-settings)
* [Schedule a session](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/schedule-session)
* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)
* [Participants and roles](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/participants-and-roles)

## General setup fields

The activity form usually starts with:

* an **Instance Type** selector
* a room or activity name
* optional description and notification settings

<img alt="General settings for the BigBlueButton activity" />

<img alt="Instance type options" />

<img alt="Expanded activity settings with description and notification options" />

## Save options

When you finish, you can usually choose:

* **Save and return to course**
* **Save and display**

If you save and display, Moodle takes you directly to the activity page where you can launch the session.

<img alt="Save the activity and return to the course or display it" />


# Find and play recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/find-and-play-recordings

Find processed BigBlueButton recordings in Moodle and play them back using the available recording formats.

If recording is enabled for a BigBlueButton activity, processed recordings appear below the activity after the session concludes.

## Find recordings

1. Open the course.
2. Select the BigBlueButton activity.
3. Scroll to the recordings section below the room details.

Recordings normally appear in chronological order.

<img alt="Processed recordings appear below the activity" />

<img alt="Open the activity to access its recordings" />

## Play a recording

Look in the playback column and choose one of the available formats, such as:

* **Presentation**
* **Video**

The recording opens in a separate browser tab.

<img alt="Choose a playback format such as Presentation or Video" />

<img alt="Recording playback opens in a separate tab" />

## Download behavior

Some playback formats may also allow download or saving through the browser, depending on the format and the user’s permissions.

## Next steps

* Want to control who can view a recording? See [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings).
* Want to import a recording link from another course? See [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links).


# Join your first session
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/join-your-first-session

Open a BigBlueButton activity in Moodle and understand what students and teachers see before joining a live session.

Once a BigBlueButton activity has been added to a course, joining the live room is simple.

## Join a session

1. Open the course.
2. Select the BigBlueButton activity.
3. Review the session status on the activity page.
4. Select **Join session** when it becomes available.

The session opens in a separate browser tab or window.

<img alt="Select Join Session from the activity page" />

<img alt="Active session overview showing participants and roles" />

## What you may see before joining

Depending on the settings, Moodle may show that:

* the room is ready
* the session has not started yet
* you are waiting for a moderator
* the session is closed
* the session is full

If the activity is scheduled, the join option may not appear until the session opens.

## When groups are enabled

If the course uses groups, the join flow can behave differently:

* some users will be sent directly to their group room
* some users will be able to choose from one or more rooms
* teachers may see more room options than students

See [Groups and grouping](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/groups-and-grouping).


# BigBlueButton for Moodle
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/overview

Use BigBlueButton in Moodle to create live classes, schedule sessions, share presentations, and manage recordings.

BigBlueButton for Moodle lets instructors create live virtual classrooms directly inside a Moodle course. You can use it to host lectures, office hours, group discussions, and recorded sessions without leaving the LMS.

## What you can do

* Create a BigBlueButton activity inside a course
* Configure room behaviour such as recording and waiting for moderators
* Schedule sessions with open and close times
* Upload presentations ahead of time
* Manage recordings after the session ends
* Control access with groups, roles, and guest settings

## Choose your path

* New to the Moodle integration? Start with [Create your first activity](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity).
* Managing live classes? Go to the [Teachers](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/create-and-edit-activity) section.
* Configuring the integration for a site? Go to the [Admins](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/install-and-configure) section.
* Solving a specific issue? Check [Troubleshooting](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade).

## Key concepts

### Activity types

BigBlueButton activities can be configured in different ways depending on how recording is set up:

* **Room only** — a live session with no recordings section
* **Room with recordings** — the activity page hosts both a join button for the live session and a table of published recordings
* **Recordings only** — displays past recordings without offering a live room

The most common setup is **Room with recordings**, which makes the activity page the central place for both attending and reviewing sessions.

### The activity page

When using the **Room with recordings** type, users land on the activity page to join the live session or open a recording. Here is what the page typically includes.

**Header and navigation**

The header shows the activity name, type label, scheduled dates, and course breadcrumb. Tabs such as **BigBlueButton**, **Settings**, and **Validate completion** appear based on the user's role and site configuration. Some installations also show an **AI features** menu when AI providers are enabled.

**Session status and join button**

A status message reflects whether the room is open, scheduled, or waiting for a moderator. When the session is ready, a **Join session** button launches the virtual classroom in a new tab. Teachers typically join as moderators and students as viewers.

**Recordings table**

Published recordings appear in a table below the room area. Common columns include **Playback**, **Name**, **Date**, **Duration**, and a toolbar for managing each entry. Recordings may be available in multiple formats such as **Presentation**, **Video**, or **Podcast**, depending on server configuration. If the activity has many recordings, pagination controls help navigate the list.

Depending on permissions, users can view, rename, edit the description, or delete a recording. Some sites also show an **Import recording links** button for linking external recordings. See [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links).

<Note>
  The exact tabs, buttons, and features visible on the activity page vary by Moodle version, installed theme, plugin version, and any active extensions or subplugins.
</Note>

For the full recording workflow, see [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings). For the step-by-step join flow, see [Join your first session](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/join-your-first-session).

### Groups

When Moodle groups are enabled, BigBlueButton can create a separate room experience per group. That changes how the join flow works for both students and teachers.


# Activity settings reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/activity-settings-reference

Comprehensive reference for all major settings available when adding or editing a BigBlueButton activity in Moodle.

Use this page as a technical reference for the full set of options you may see when adding or editing a BigBlueButton activity in a Moodle course.

The exact form can vary by Moodle version, BigBlueButton version, and installed subplugins.

<Note>This page focuses on the core BigBlueButton activity settings provided by Moodle. Subplugins and site-specific extensions can add, remove, or override additional options.</Note>

## General

### Instance type

The **Instance type** determines how the activity behaves for live sessions and recordings.

* **Room with recordings**: standard mode for running live sessions and publishing their recordings.
* **Room only**: live room without recording playback management in the activity.
* **Recordings only**: no new live room launch, but previously created/imported recordings remain accessible.

Use this setting when you need to convert a live room into a recordings portal, or when you want to disable live usage after delivery.

### Room name

The room name is the activity title shown in the course and on the activity page. Use a descriptive name (for example, week/topic + class type) so students can quickly identify the correct room.

### Show more...

Expanding **Show more...** in the General section exposes additional Moodle fields.

* **Description**: rich text editor for instructional context, joining notes, or policy reminders.
* **Display description on course page**: shows the description directly on the course page under the activity link.

Use this when you want students to see joining instructions without opening the activity first.

## Room settings

These settings control default room behavior for each live session.

* **Welcome message**: pre-populated message posted when users enter the room. Useful for agenda, etiquette, and first-step instructions.
* **Wait for moderator**: blocks viewer entry until a moderator joins. Useful for managed starts and exam supervision.
* **The session may be recorded**: enables recording controls in-session. Disable for privacy-sensitive meetings.

For operational guidance, see [Room settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/room-settings).

## Recording view

* **Show only imported links**: filters the recording list to imported recording links only. Useful when you curate a subset of recordings for learners.

For broader recording workflows, see [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings).

## Lock settings

Lock settings define default participant restrictions when a session starts.

* **Disable webcams**
* **Disable microphones**
* **Disable private chat**
* **Disable public chat**
* **Disable shared notes**
* **Hide user list**

Use these defaults to enforce classroom format (lecture-style, assessment mode, or moderated discussion). Moderators can typically adjust locks during the live session if permissions allow.

## Presentation content

The **Presentation content** area controls what files are available at session start.

* **Pre-uploaded presentations**: define default slides/content before users join.
* **Drag-and-drop uploads**: quick file drop directly in the form.
* **File picker integration**: choose content from Moodle repositories.

Common file picker sources include:

* **Upload a file**
* **URL downloader**
* **Private files**
* **Content bank**
* **Server files**
* **Recent files**
* **Wikimedia integration**

Use repository sources to standardize content reuse across courses and reduce duplicate uploads.

For step-by-step instructions, see [Presentations](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/presentations).

## Role assigned during live session

Role assignment maps Moodle identity context to BigBlueButton join roles.

### Role mapping between Moodle and BBB

Each mapping row has:

* an **assignee type** (who the rule applies to)
* a **BigBlueButton role** (how they enter)

### Assignee types

* **All users enrolled**: baseline rule for all enrolled participants.
* **Moodle role**: applies to selected Moodle roles (for example, Teacher, Non-editing teacher, Student).
* **User**: applies to a specific enrolled user.

### BBB roles

* **Viewer**: participant role with standard learner permissions.
* **Moderator**: facilitator role with management controls.

Use explicit mappings for co-teaching, teaching assistants, and role-exception handling.

For practical mapping examples, see [Participants and roles](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/participants-and-roles).

## Guest access

* **Allow guest access**: permits users outside enrolled participants to join through the guest workflow.
* **Guests joining must be admitted by a moderator**: enables moderated lobby/admission behavior for guests.

Use these options for guest speakers, observers, or external evaluators while preserving class control.

## Session timing

Session timing controls the activity join window.

* **Open time**: earliest time users can join.
* **Close time**: time after which joining is blocked.

Use timing with or without **Wait for moderator** depending on whether you need strict calendar control, moderated entry, or both.

For scheduling patterns, see [Schedule a session](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/schedule-session).

## Grade

The **Grade** section integrates the activity with Moodle gradebook workflows. Depending on site configuration, this can include grade type/scale behavior and completion-by-grade usage.

Use this when BigBlueButton participation should contribute to assessed outcomes.

## Common module settings

These are standard Moodle controls that still affect BigBlueButton activities.

* **Availability**: show/hide activity on course page.
* **ID number**: unique identifier for reporting/integration use cases.
* **Force language**: override language for this activity context.
* **Group mode**:
  * **No groups**
  * **Visible groups**
  * **Separate groups**
* **Grouping**: restrict activity context to selected group collection.
* **Group/grouping access restrictions**: combine with access rules to control who can view/join.

For detailed Moodle behavior, see [Common module settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/common-module-settings).

## Restrict access

Use **Restrict access** for conditional availability.

* **Conditional availability** (overall rule container)
* **Date restrictions**
* **Grade restrictions**
* **Group restrictions**
* **Activity completion restrictions**

Combine rules to control visibility and entry based on progression policies.

## Completion conditions

Moodle completion determines how the activity is marked complete for each learner.

* **No completion tracking**
* **Manual completion**
* **Automatic completion**

BigBlueButton-specific automatic criteria can include:

* **View activity**
* **Attendance minutes**
* **Chat participation**
* **Talk participation**
* **Raised hand**
* **Poll votes**
* **Emojis**
* **Receive a grade**

You may also see **Timeline reminders** related to completion deadlines and learner notifications.

For administrator-level setup context, see [Activity completion](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion) and [Completion rules reference](/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/completion-rules-reference).

## Tags

Moodle **Tags** allow activity-level tagging for organization, search, and reporting workflows.

Use tags to standardize categorization across courses (for example, webinar, office-hours, assessment).

## Competencies

If competency frameworks are enabled, the **Competencies** section links the activity to institutional competency outcomes.

Use this when BigBlueButton sessions support tracked skills or program outcomes.

## Standard Moodle controls

At the bottom of the form, Moodle provides standard save/cancel actions:

* **Save and return to course**
* **Save and display**
* **Cancel**

Choose **Save and display** when you want to verify room behavior immediately after saving.

## Additional guidance

Expect differences between sites. The exact options shown can depend on:

* Moodle version
* BigBlueButton version
* installed subplugins/extensions

Additional enterprise or BNX-related settings may appear depending on your deployment and licensing profile.

If you need task-based walkthroughs, start with [Create and edit activity](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/create-and-edit-activity) and the pages in the Moodle Teachers section.


# Completion rules reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/completion-rules-reference

Reference page for the BigBlueButton activity completion model in Moodle.

BigBlueButton activity completion in Moodle depends on event callback data from the BigBlueButton server.

## Common completion models

Sites may use completion rules based on:

* attendance duration
* live participation
* other configured Moodle completion conditions

For setup guidance, see [Activity completion](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion).


# Moodle module settings reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/moodle-module-settings-reference

Reference page for standard Moodle module settings that still affect BigBlueButton activities.

BigBlueButton inherits several standard Moodle module settings.

## Common items

* availability
* ID number
* group mode
* grouping

For a task-oriented explanation, see [Common module settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/common-module-settings).


# Recording settings reference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/recording-settings-reference

Reference guide to the recording-related settings available in Moodle for BigBlueButton activities.

Recording-related settings can appear in both administrator and teacher workflows.

## Site-wide recording topics

* recording enabled by default
* display defaults for recording tables
* deleted-activity recording visibility
* imported recording visibility

## Activity-level recording topics

* whether the session can be recorded
* imported recording filters
* display options for the recordings table

For walkthroughs, see:

* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)


# Common module settings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/common-module-settings

Understand the standard Moodle module settings that still affect BigBlueButton activities, including availability, ID number, groups, and grouping.

BigBlueButton activities in Moodle also use the standard **Common module settings** section.

## What you can configure

* activity availability
* ID number
* group mode
* grouping

## Availability

If the activity is set to **show on course page**, students can access it subject to any other access restrictions.

If it is set to **hide from students**, the activity is available only to users who can view hidden activities.

<img alt="Common module settings section in Moodle" />

<img alt="Activity availability options" />

## ID number

An ID number can help identify the activity for grading, reporting, or custom workflows.

<img alt="ID number field in common module settings" />

## Group mode

Group mode is defined at the course level by default, but the activity can also define its own mode unless the course forces a single setting.

Available modes include:

* **No groups**
* **Separate groups**
* **Visible groups**

<img alt="Group mode options in Moodle" />

## Grouping

Grouping is a collection of groups within a course. When grouping is enabled, students assigned to groups inside that grouping can work together within the configured activity scope.

## Related page

* [Groups and grouping](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/groups-and-grouping)


# Create and edit activity
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/create-and-edit-activity

Create a BigBlueButton activity in Moodle and understand the main areas available when editing it.

When you create or edit a BigBlueButton activity, Moodle shows the main settings page for the room.

## Main areas you may see

* General activity details
* Room settings
* Recording settings
* Participant and role settings
* Presentation content
* Schedule settings
* Common Moodle module settings

## Typical edit flow

1. Open the course.
2. Turn editing on.
3. Create a new BigBlueButton activity or edit an existing one.
4. Review the settings that match your teaching workflow.
5. Save the changes.

If you are starting from scratch, see [Create your first activity](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity).


# Groups and grouping
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/groups-and-grouping

Learn how Moodle group modes affect BigBlueButton room behavior and why users may join different rooms in the same activity.

Groups work much the same way in BigBlueButton as they do in the rest of Moodle, but BigBlueButton adds one important behavior: there can be a unique room per group.

That means the **Join** button can send a user to:

* the room for the group they belong to
* a room they choose from a group selector
* a general room in some teacher-facing cases

## Group options

The main group mode options are:

* **Separate groups**
* **Visible groups**

## Separate groups

This is the most restrictive option.

In many cases:

* students only see the group they belong to
* users who belong to multiple allowed groups may choose from a limited list
* educators can choose from a wider set of rooms

Teachers may need to move between rooms to meet with students who have joined each group room.

<img alt="Groups configuration in Moodle" />

<img alt="Separate groups view for users assigned to a group" />

<img alt="Room selector limited to groups the user belongs to" />

<img alt="Teacher room selector with multiple room choices" />

## Visible groups

This is more permissive.

Users can choose the room they want to join from a list that shows all groups available in the course, subject to site and role configuration.

<img alt="Visible groups room selector" />

## Learn more

For more background on Moodle groups in general, see the official Moodle documentation on groups.


# Guest access
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/guest-access

Allow external guests to join a BigBlueButton activity in Moodle using a guest link and password.

Some Moodle sites allow BigBlueButton activities to be opened to external guests.

## How it works

When guest access is enabled:

* the activity can generate a guest link
* a guest password can be shared
* guests can join without a Moodle account

Depending on the configuration, guests may also need moderator approval before they fully enter the room.

## Typical teacher workflow

1. Edit the activity.
2. Enable guest access if your site allows it.
3. Copy the guest link and password.
4. Share them with the external participants.

<img alt="Guest user setup" />

## What guests experience

Guests usually:

1. open the guest link
2. enter a display name
3. enter the password
4. wait for the meeting to start, and sometimes wait for moderator approval

If the meeting has not started yet, guests will not be able to join the live room immediately.

<img alt="Guest user access" />


# Import recording links
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links

Import processed recording links from other Moodle courses into a BigBlueButton activity.

Administrators or activity owners can import recording links from other courses into a specific BigBlueButton activity.

> This feature is usually hidden unless it has been enabled by an administrator.

## Import links

1. Open the BigBlueButton activity where you want the recordings to appear.
2. Go to the recordings area.
3. Select **Import recording links**.
4. Choose the source course.
5. Select one or more available recordings.
6. Confirm the import.

Imported links appear in the destination activity’s recordings table.

<img alt="Import recording links button in the activity" />

<img alt="Choose the course you want to import recordings from" />

<img alt="Course selector showing importable source courses" />

<img alt="Select recordings to import" />

<img alt="Confirm the import action" />

## Important note

Only courses and recordings that your site allows for import will appear in the selection flow.

## Related pages

* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)
* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)


# Participants and roles
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/participants-and-roles

Customize which users enter a BigBlueButton activity and whether they join as viewers or moderators.

BigBlueButton activities in Moodle let you customize the participant list beyond the default behavior.

## Default behavior

By default:

* all enrolled course users enter as **viewers**
* the owner of the activity enters as a **moderator**

<img alt="Default participant mapping for a BigBlueButton activity" />

## Add participants

You can add participants based on:

* a Moodle role
* an individual enrolled user

When adding users manually, only users enrolled in the course will appear in the list.

<img alt="Choose role-based participants from the participant controls" />

<img alt="Select a specific Moodle role and add it to the mapping" />

## Change entry role

For each participant mapping, you can choose whether the user or role enters as:

* **Viewer**
* **Moderator**

Moderators have more controls in the live BigBlueButton session than viewers.

<img alt="Participants appear in the mapping list after being added" />

<img alt="Choose whether a participant enters as viewer or moderator" />

## Remove participants

To remove an added participant mapping, use the delete or trash icon in the participant list.

## Important note

Role-based behavior still depends on how Moodle roles and permissions are configured on your site.


# Presentations
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/presentations

Upload a presentation or document ahead of time so it is available inside the BigBlueButton session and from the Moodle activity page.

You can upload a presentation or document ahead of time when creating or editing a BigBlueButton activity.

## Upload a presentation

1. Open the activity settings.
2. Find the **Presentation content** section.
3. Drag and drop the file into the uploader, or use the file picker.
4. Save the activity.

The file picker options may vary depending on your Moodle site configuration.

<img alt="Presentation content area in the activity settings" />

<img alt="Upload a file into the presentation content area" />

<img alt="Moodle file picker used to upload a presentation" />

## How it is used

When the live session starts, the uploaded content appears as the default presentation inside BigBlueButton.

After the conference ends, the uploaded presentation may also remain available for download from the Moodle activity page.

<img alt="Uploaded presentation shown as the default presentation in the live room" />

## Related pages

* [Room settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/room-settings)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)


# Recording settings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings

Adjust activity-level recording settings such as table format, deleted-activity recordings, and imported recording visibility.

Some recording settings can be changed at the activity level by the owner or administrator of the BigBlueButton activity.

> These settings may be hidden unless an administrator has enabled them site-wide.

## Common recording settings

These settings may include:

* how the recordings table is displayed
* whether recordings from deleted activities are included
* whether only imported recording links are shown

## Recording table format

Some Moodle sites allow the recordings table to be displayed in a simpler HTML layout or a richer filtered view.

If you have many recordings tied to one activity, the richer table can be easier to search and scan.

<img alt="Advanced recording settings area" />

<img alt="Option for changing the recordings table display format" />

<img alt="Example of the enhanced recordings table layout" />

## Deleted-activity recordings

When enabled, recordings that were created under activities later deleted from the course can still appear in the interface.

<img alt="Option to include recordings from deleted activities" />

## Imported recording links only

When enabled, the table can be filtered to show only imported recording links instead of every available recording for the activity.

<img alt="Option to show only imported recording links" />

## Related pages

* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)
* [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links)


# Manage recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings

View, play, edit, protect, publish, unpublish, delete, and control access to BigBlueButton recordings in Moodle.

Once a recording has processed, it becomes available in the recordings table under the BigBlueButton activity.

## What you can do

Depending on your permissions, you can:

* play a recording
* edit the recording name
* edit the recording description
* make a recording private
* publish or unpublish the recording link
* delete the recording

## Edit recording names and descriptions

To edit the displayed name or description:

1. Find the recording in the recordings table.
2. Select the edit or pencil control next to the field you want to update.
3. Enter the new value.
4. Confirm the change.

<img alt="Select the edit controls for a recording name or description" />

<img alt="Enter a new recording name or description" />

<img alt="Updated recording name and description in the table" />

## Control visibility and access

Teachers or administrators can often control who can access a recording.

Common actions include:

* **Private / protected**: the recording remains visible only through Moodle
* **Published / unpublished**: the recording link is either available for viewing or turned off

If a recording is unpublished, bookmarked direct links should no longer allow playback.

<img alt="Recording action toolbar" />

<img alt="Lock a recording to keep it private to Moodle users" />

<img alt="Publish or unpublish recording access" />

## Delete a recording

Deleting a recording removes the recording link and related reporting data exposed through the Moodle interface.

## Related pages

* [Find and play recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/find-and-play-recordings)
* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)
* [Import recording links](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/import-recording-links)


# Room settings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/room-settings

Configure room-specific settings such as the welcome message, wait for moderator, and whether the session can be recorded.

Once you have created a BigBlueButton activity, you can access additional room settings.

## Common room settings

These settings commonly include:

* a custom welcome message
* **Wait for moderator**
* whether the session can be recorded

## Custom welcome message

Adding a welcome message replaces the default message shown in the room chat when users enter.

<img alt="Welcome message field in room settings" />

We recommend:

* avoiding pasted content directly from word processors like Microsoft Word
* using plain text or a simple text editor if formatting issues appear
* being careful with special characters if your site has had HTML formatting issues in this field

## Wait for moderator

When **Wait for moderator** is enabled, viewers cannot enter the room until a moderator joins.

That means students will see a waiting message until the teacher or another moderator opens the room.

<img alt="Wait for moderator setting" />

<img alt="Viewer waiting screen shown before a moderator joins" />

## Session recording

When the room is configured to be recorded, moderators can use the recording controls during the live session.

If the **Session can be recorded** option is disabled, the Start/Stop Recording button does not appear and the server will not record the session.

<img alt="Session can be recorded setting" />

## Related pages

* [Recording settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recording-settings)
* [Schedule a session](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/schedule-session)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)


# Schedule a session
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/schedule-session

Schedule a BigBlueButton session in Moodle using open and close times so learners can only join during a specific window.

Moodle lets you schedule a BigBlueButton activity with specific open and close times.

## What scheduling does

Scheduling effectively controls when users can enter the room.

This is different from **Wait for moderator**:

* **Wait for moderator** delays entry until a moderator arrives
* scheduling can block entry before the room opens or after it closes

## Configure schedule settings

1. Open the activity settings.
2. Expand the schedule section.
3. Enable the schedule options you want.
4. Set a start time, an end time, or both.
5. Save the activity.

<img alt="Open the schedule section for the activity" />

<img alt="Schedule configuration options in Moodle" />

## Common patterns

You can configure:

* a start time only
* an end time only
* both a start and end time

## What users see

Before the room opens, enrolled users will not see the join button. Instead, Moodle shows that the conference has not started yet.

Once the room is open, invited users can join until the close time. After that, the join option is no longer available.

<img alt="Scheduled session shown in the Moodle calendar" />

<img alt="Users see the session has not started yet before opening time" />

<img alt="Users can join once the session is open" />

## Calendar behavior

When a session is scheduled, it can also appear in the course calendar view.


# Moodle is not receiving analytics callbacks
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/analytics-callbacks-not-received

Diagnose missing BigBlueButton completion and DataHub data, and identify when hosting support must forward the Authorization header.

BigBlueButton sends analytics callbacks to Moodle after a live meeting. Moodle uses these events for activity completion and for integrations such as BNX DataHub. If the callback is not delivered or Moodle cannot authenticate it, completion may not be processed and session or attendance data may be missing.

This page helps Moodle administrators identify the failure and collect evidence. Web-server changes usually require the hosting or infrastructure administrator.

## Signs of a callback problem

* BigBlueButton activity completion is not awarded after a qualifying meeting.
* Session or attendee data is missing from DataHub reports or another callback-dependent integration.
* A new meeting has ended, but Moodle has no corresponding callback or event data.

Check a new, completed test meeting. Existing sessions cannot confirm whether the current callback configuration is working.

## Check Moodle settings

1. Go to **Site administration → Plugins → Activity modules → BigBlueButton → Experimental features** and enable **Register live sessions**. Some plugin versions label this **Register live events**.
2. If you use BNX DataHub, confirm that BNX and DataHub are installed, enabled, and configured.

Moodle's standard UI does not display the generated `analytics-callback-url` sent to BBB. Confirming that URL is present in a meeting's configuration requires access to the BBB-side meeting request or metadata, or relevant BBB server logs. A Moodle administrator without that access can still verify the setting above and run the connectivity test below, then escalate with the results.

## Test from the BigBlueButton server

Run this test on the BBB server that sends the callback, or inside the container that sends it. The request uses an intentionally invalid token, so it can test connectivity and header forwarding without processing an event.

The deliberately invalid token cannot process an event:

```bash theme={null}
curl --http1.1 -sS -i --connect-timeout 10 --max-time 20 \
  -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
  -H 'Authorization: Bearer invalid' \
  --data '{}' \
  'https://moodle.example.edu/mod/bigbluebuttonbn/bbb_broker.php?action=meeting_events&bigbluebuttonbn=30'
```

Replace the example Moodle base URL with your site's base URL, including any subpath (for example, `https://moodle.example.edu/moodle35`), and replace `30` with the activity's BigBlueButton instance ID. To find that ID without SQL, hover over the activity's **Join** button and read the link preview. In a URL such as `bbb_view.php?action=join&id=32&bn=30`, use `bn` (`30`), not `id` (`32`); `id` is the course-module ID. If your browser does not show a link preview, right-click **Join** and copy its link address. Keep the callback URL quoted so the shell does not interpret the ampersands.

### Interpret the response

Run the same command before and after the hosting change. The `invalid` token is deliberate, so the successful result for this test is still an HTTP 400; the response text should change when PHP starts receiving the header.

| Result | What it indicates |
| - | - |
| `400 Bad Request. Authorization failed` | The request reached Moodle, but PHP did not receive the `Authorization` header. This is the failing result; ask hosting support to check header forwarding. |
| `400 Bad Request. Caught exception: Wrong number of segments` | The header reached Moodle and JWT parsing ran. This is the expected result for the deliberately invalid token after header forwarding is fixed. Other JWT parsing or validation errors also indicate the header arrived. |
| `200` or `202` from a real callback | Moodle accepted the callback. `200` indicates it was processed; `202` indicates it was already processed. |
| `404` or `410` | Check the callback path and activity instance ID. `410` can mean the activity no longer exists. |
| `403`, timeout, DNS, TLS, or connection error | Investigate access controls, routing, DNS, or certificates between BBB and Moodle. |

A request from a laptop only tests the laptop-to-Moodle path. It does not prove that BBB can reach Moodle, and the dummy-token test does not verify the shared secret or event payload.

## Escalate to hosting support

If the BBB-host test returns `Authorization failed`, send hosting support:

* the UTC time of the test and the source IP of the BBB server
* the Moodle callback path and activity instance ID
* the HTTP status and response text
* the note that Moodle's callback handler reports a missing or unusable Authorization header

Ask them to verify that the `Authorization` request header is preserved through every proxy and passed from the web server to PHP. Do not send or log the real JWT or BigBlueButton shared secret.

### Apache with CGI or FastCGI

Apache may need to pass the incoming authorization header to the PHP handler. The hosting administrator should check the active virtual host and PHP handler. Depending on the setup, `CGIPassAuth On` may be appropriate in the Moodle directory configuration, or the following rewrite workaround can expose the header to PHP:

```apache theme={null}
RewriteEngine On
RewriteCond %{HTTP:Authorization} ^(.*)
RewriteRule .* - [E=HTTP_AUTHORIZATION:%1]
```

If using `.htaccess`, Apache must allow the relevant rewrite directives there. Scope the change to the Moodle site and have the administrator validate the configuration before reloading Apache.

### Nginx with PHP-FPM

In the PHP location block, the administrator should confirm the authorization header is passed to FastCGI:

```nginx theme={null}
fastcgi_param HTTP_AUTHORIZATION $http_authorization;
```

Check the include order so another FastCGI parameter file does not override it. If a load balancer or reverse proxy sits in front of Nginx or Apache, it must also preserve the `Authorization` header.

## If the header reaches Moodle

If the dummy-token test changes from `Authorization failed` to `Caught exception: Wrong number of segments` (or another JWT parsing error) after the hosting change, header forwarding is working. This does not validate a real callback's token or payload. If real callbacks still fail, ask the Moodle and BBB administrators to verify that both sides use the same shared secret, that the callback token is valid and unexpired, and that BBB is sending the expected JSON event payload.

For older BBB deployments, event retention and post-event processing may require additional BBB configuration. The required setup depends on the BBB version; the BBB administrator should verify that analytics events are enabled and that the callback worker is running.

After a real callback succeeds, check Moodle's BigBlueButton callback logs and then verify completion or DataHub data. If Moodle accepts the callback but downstream data is still missing, investigate the relevant completion rules, DataHub configuration, and scheduled processing separately.

## Related pages

* [Activity completion](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/activity-completion)
* [BNX DataHub](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/datahub)
* [BNX framework](/docs/integrations/moodle/bnx/framework)
* [BigBlueButton activity settings](/docs/integrations/moodle/reference/activity-settings-reference)
* [Original activity-completion background](https://jffederico.medium.com/bigbluebutton-activity-completion-in-moodle-b3269adf4c34)


# Deleted activity recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings

Troubleshoot access to recordings that were created under activities later deleted from a Moodle course.

If a BigBlueButton activity has been deleted, the references to the recordings may still exist in the Moodle database while the plugin remains installed.

## What controls visibility

An administrator can enable settings that allow recordings from deleted activities to appear in the interface.

Depending on the site:

* new activities may include those recordings by default
* existing activities may require the teacher to enable the option manually

## When this is useful

This is especially helpful when a course needs to recover access to recordings even though the original activity was removed.

## Related pages

* [Recovering a recording missing from Moodle](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/recovering-a-deleted-recording)
* [Missing recordings after upgrade](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade)


# Dismissed recordings in Moodle
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/dismissed-recordings

Understand why recordings can be marked as DISMISSED, what MDL-76339 changed, and how to recover using scheduled tasks or CLI.

## Overview

In BigBlueButton for Moodle, a recording row can be marked with status `DISMISSED` when Moodle cannot fetch that recording metadata from the BigBlueButton server during synchronization.

In many sites, this happens as expected when the recording no longer exists on the BigBlueButton server, such as trial environments with short recording retention windows.

It can also appear as an edge case when the recording still exists, but Moodle temporarily cannot retrieve it.

## Historical issue: MDL-76339

[MDL-76339](https://moodle.atlassian.net/browse/MDL-76339) documented a historical issue where recordings could become `DISMISSED` when they were temporarily unreachable from the BigBlueButton API.

The key improvement was adding a recovery path that rechecks dismissed recordings and restores them to a visible status when metadata becomes available again.

## Possible cases that can lead to DISMISSED

### Expected case: recording no longer exists on BBB

* recording retention expired on the BigBlueButton hosting side
* recording was permanently deleted on the BigBlueButton server
* recording was removed by hosting lifecycle policy

In this case, `DISMISSED` is expected behavior.

### Temporary fetch failures

* transient network issues between Moodle and BigBlueButton
* temporary BigBlueButton API unavailability
* intermittent proxy or infrastructure failures

If metadata cannot be fetched at that moment, the recording can be classified as dismissed.

### Partial or inconsistent API results (edge case)

A less common case is when the API call succeeds, but the expected recording is missing from the response at that moment. This can happen during backend propagation delays, brief storage inconsistencies, or other transient server-side conditions.

### Mixed state around restores and deletions

If a recording is restored, moved, or reprocessed on the BigBlueButton side while Moodle is synchronizing, Moodle may observe a temporary missing state and set the local row to `DISMISSED` before the next successful refresh.

## Automatic recovery via scheduled task

Moodle can recover dismissed recordings automatically through the scheduled task:

* **Check for recordings that haven't been found yet**

This task rechecks dismissed recordings against the BigBlueButton server and updates them when metadata is found.

## Important limitation of task-based recovery

Automatic recovery is not immediate in every environment.

* it depends on your cron schedule and task timing
* it only processes dismissed rows within the configured 30-day window
* rows older than that window are not rechecked automatically by the dismissed-recordings task
* if metadata is still unavailable when the task runs, recovery is deferred

Because of these limits, a dismissed recording can remain hidden for some time even when it later becomes available on BigBlueButton.

If a dismissed row is older than 30 days, use the CLI script for a manual recheck.

## Manual recovery with CLI script

When faster intervention is required, an administrator can run the CLI script directly:

```bash theme={null}
php mod/bigbluebuttonbn/cli/update_dismissed_recordings.php --run=1
```

Useful scoped examples:

```bash theme={null}
php mod/bigbluebuttonbn/cli/update_dismissed_recordings.php --courseid=123 --run=1
php mod/bigbluebuttonbn/cli/update_dismissed_recordings.php --bigbluebuttoncmid=456 --run=1
```

Dry-run mode (report only):

```bash theme={null}
php mod/bigbluebuttonbn/cli/update_dismissed_recordings.php --courseid=123 --run=0
```

## Suggested triage flow

1. Confirm whether the recording still exists on the BigBlueButton server.
2. Check the Moodle row in `mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings` and verify `status`.
3. Run the dismissed-recording task or wait for cron.
4. If recovery is urgent, run the CLI script with `--run=1`.
5. Recheck the recording list in the activity.

## Related pages

* [Recovering a recording missing from Moodle](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/recovering-a-deleted-recording)
* [Missing recordings after upgrade](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade)
* [Deleted activity recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings)


# Downgrading the plugin
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/downgrading-plugin

Understand the risks and high-level process involved in downgrading the BigBlueButton Moodle plugin.

Downgrading the Moodle plugin is possible, but it is risky and should be done carefully.

## Before you downgrade

At minimum:

* back up the plugin code
* back up the plugin database tables
* confirm the exact plugin version you want to return to
* understand that data created after the upgrade may be lost during a rollback

## Typical downgrade model

The older guidance for downgrading relied on:

1. restoring the older plugin code
2. updating stored plugin version values
3. restoring backed-up database tables
4. letting Moodle reconcile the database again

## Strong recommendation

Do not attempt a downgrade first in production. Test the full rollback path in a staging environment before changing a live Moodle site.


# Language strings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/language-strings

Troubleshoot or update BigBlueButton language strings in Moodle using the standard language pack and language customization workflows.

If your site is missing translated BigBlueButton strings or uses outdated wording, the fix usually follows Moodle’s normal localization workflow.

## Start here

* for standard language packs, go to [Language customization](/docs/integrations/moodle/admins/language-customization)
* for custom wording, use Moodle’s language customization tools

## Typical problems

* the language pack has not been updated
* the site installed new BigBlueButton strings after the language pack was last refreshed
* local customizations are overriding expected wording


# Missing recordings after upgrade
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade

Troubleshoot cases where course recording lists change or disappear after upgrading older BigBlueButton Moodle components.

In older Moodle deployments, a separate RecordingsBN plugin was sometimes used to show all recordings in a course. After upgrading to newer BigBlueButton Moodle releases, that workflow changed.

## What changed

Newer versions of BigBlueButton for Moodle can use BigBlueButton activities themselves to surface recordings, including **Recordings only** style activity patterns in older guidance.

<img alt="Legacy notice after upgrading older recording workflows" />

## Two common solutions

### Add a dedicated activity for recordings

An editing teacher can add a new BigBlueButton activity configured specifically to surface recordings for the course.

<img alt="Add a BigBlueButton activity configured for recordings" />

### Migrate older RecordingsBN instances

If your site still has legacy RecordingsBN instances, an administrator may need to migrate them and then retire the old plugin.

## Good checks

* confirm the current plugin version
* confirm the current activity type options available on your site
* verify scheduled tasks and recording sync behavior
* verify whether the site still depends on any legacy plugin workflow

## Related pages

* [Recovering a recording missing from Moodle](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/recovering-a-deleted-recording)
* [Deleted activity recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings)


# Recovering a deleted recording
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/recovering-a-deleted-recording



title: "Recovering a recording missing from Moodle"
description: "Recover a BigBlueButton recording in Moodle when the recording still exists on the server but Moodle has no matching database row."

## Overview

This procedure covers the cases where the recording still exists on the BigBlueButton server, but Moodle has no matching row for it in `mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings`. That can happen either because the Moodle row was deleted and the recording was later restored on the server, or because Moodle never created the row after a meeting creation or synchronization interruption.

Moodle displays recordings from the records stored in its database. If that row is deleted, Moodle no longer knows the recording exists, even if the recording has been recovered or undeleted on the BigBlueButton server.

Recreating the missing database row allows Moodle to rediscover the recording during the next recording synchronization run.

<Warning>
  This is an advanced recovery procedure. Make a database backup first, use administrator-level access, and only apply these steps when normal recording recovery is not enough.
</Warning>

## When to use this procedure

Use this procedure only when Moodle does not have a row for the recording, but the recording still exists on the BigBlueButton server.

This page applies when all of the following are true:

* A recording was deleted from Moodle, intentionally or accidentally, using the Moodle recording delete action.
* The recording was later recovered or undeleted on the BigBlueButton server by the hosting provider.
* Moodle no longer shows the recording because the corresponding row in `mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings` no longer exists.
* You have both the `recordID` and the `meetingID`.
* The recording still exists on the BigBlueButton server and can be returned by the BigBlueButton API.

### Missing row after meeting creation interruption (MDL-88775)

This page also applies to the missing-row scenario described in [MDL-88775](https://moodle.atlassian.net/browse/MDL-88775): Moodle created the BigBlueButton meeting successfully, but a communication failure or interruption during creation or synchronization meant the expected recording row was never inserted in Moodle.

In both cases, the important condition is the same: Moodle has no row for the recording, but BigBlueButton still has the recording.

## When not to use this procedure

Do not use this procedure when Moodle already has a row for the recording. Stop before inserting a new row if any of the following are true:

* The recording row already exists in `mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings`.
* The recording exists in Moodle but is hidden because its status is `DISMISSED`.
* The recording disappeared due to the older dismissed-recording issue fixed by [MDL-76339](https://moodle.atlassian.net/browse/MDL-76339).
* The recording is hidden because of publication, visibility, import, group, or activity settings.
* The BigBlueButton server no longer has the recording.
* The Moodle activity itself was deleted and you are trying to recover all recordings associated with a deleted activity.

For these cases, do not insert another recording row. Instead, inspect the existing recording row, Moodle scheduled task output, the BigBlueButton API response, and the related troubleshooting pages.

### Missing Moodle row

Use this page when the recording exists on the BigBlueButton server, but Moodle has no row for it in `mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings`.

The fix is to recreate the missing Moodle row and let Moodle synchronize the recording metadata.

### Existing Moodle row with hidden status

Do not use this page when the recording row exists in Moodle, but the recording is not shown because its status or metadata prevents it from appearing. This includes the historical `DISMISSED` status problem fixed by [MDL-76339](https://moodle.atlassian.net/browse/MDL-76339).

The fix is not to insert a new row. Inspect and correct the existing row, or follow the dedicated documentation for dismissed recordings.

## Prerequisites

Before you begin, obtain both of the following values:

* `recordID`
* `meetingID`

Example values:

* `recordID`: `4e3527b0bd6b213b47a6a923fb5a67909d59a5e4-1780494335460`
* `meetingID`: `16ae3bfa7bdffe133fd93ee4afc40727db0a4045-202-198[0]`

You can usually get these values from:

* BigBlueButton API responses
* recording metadata
* hosting provider support staff

## Step 1: Identify the Moodle Activity

Use the meeting ID to find the Moodle activity that owns the recording.

```sql theme={null}
SELECT
    b.id AS bigbluebuttonbnid,
    b.course AS courseid,
    c.fullname AS coursename,
    b.name AS activityname
FROM mdl_bigbluebuttonbn b
JOIN mdl_course c ON c.id = b.course
WHERE b.meetingid = 'PUT_MEETING_ID_HERE';
```

Expected output:

* one row for the matching BigBlueButton activity
* the course ID and course name that own the activity
* the activity name that Moodle will use when it redisplays the recording

If no rows are returned, the meeting ID does not match a current Moodle activity.

## Step 2: Verify the Recording Does Not Already Exist

This is the decisive check. Before inserting anything, confirm that Moodle does not already have a row for the recording ID.

```sql theme={null}
SELECT *
FROM mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings
WHERE recordingid = 'PUT_RECORDING_ID_HERE';
```

If this query returns a row, stop here. Do not continue with the insert.

Inspect the existing row and check:

* `status`
* `imported`
* `headless`
* `courseid`
* `bigbluebuttonbnid`
* `groupid`
* `timecreated`
* `timemodified`

If a row already exists, the issue is not a missing-row recovery case. Inserting a duplicate row can make the situation worse.

Continue only if no rows are returned.

## Step 3: Recreate the Missing Recording Entry

The recording ID usually ends with a Unix timestamp in milliseconds. Extract that timestamp from the recording ID and convert it to seconds for Moodle's `timecreated` value. Do not use the millisecond value directly.

For example, if the recording ID is `4e3527b0bd6b213b47a6a923fb5a67909d59a5e4-1780494335460`, the trailing value `1780494335460` is the millisecond timestamp. The corresponding `timecreated` value is `1780494335`.

You can also derive the value in SQL with:

```sql theme={null}
SELECT FLOOR(CAST(SUBSTRING_INDEX('4e3527b0bd6b213b47a6a923fb5a67909d59a5e4-1780494335460', '-', -1) AS UNSIGNED) / 1000);
```

Use the matching course ID and BigBlueButton activity ID from Step 1, then insert the missing row.

```sql theme={null}
INSERT INTO mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings
(
    courseid,
    bigbluebuttonbnid,
    groupid,
    recordingid,
    headless,
    imported,
    status,
    importeddata,
    timecreated,
    timemodified,
    usermodified
)
VALUES
(
    PUT_COURSE_ID_HERE,
    PUT_BIGBLUEBUTTONBN_ID_HERE,
    0,
    'PUT_RECORDING_ID_HERE',
    0,
    0,
    0,
    NULL,
    PUT_TIMECREATED_HERE,
    UNIX_TIMESTAMP(),
    (SELECT id FROM mdl_user WHERE username = 'admin' LIMIT 1)
);
```

Replace `mdl_` with your site's database prefix if it is different.

## Step 4: Trigger Recording Synchronization

After you recreate the database row, Moodle must run its recording synchronization task.

### Run from Moodle

1. Go to **Site administration** → **Server** → **Scheduled tasks**.
2. Locate **Check for pending recordings**.
3. Click **Run now**.

### Or wait for Moodle cron

If you prefer, let Moodle process the recording during the next scheduled cron run.

## Step 5: Verify Recovery

When synchronization runs, Moodle contacts BigBlueButton, fetches the recording metadata, and makes the recording visible in the activity.

Use this query to confirm that Moodle now has the recording row:

```sql theme={null}
SELECT recordingid, status, timecreated, timemodified
FROM mdl_bigbluebuttonbn_recordings
WHERE recordingid = 'PUT_RECORDING_ID_HERE';
```

If the row exists and synchronization completed successfully, the recording should appear in the activity recordings list.

## Troubleshooting

### Activity cannot be located using the meeting ID

Likely causes:

* the meeting ID belongs to a deleted or migrated activity
* the recording came from a different Moodle site or database prefix
* the meeting ID was copied incorrectly

Next steps:

* verify the meeting ID with the hosting provider or API response
* search for the activity in the Moodle database using other known fields, such as the room name or course
* confirm that you are working in the correct Moodle site

### Recording already exists in Moodle

If Moodle already has a row for the recording ID, this is not a missing-row recovery case.

Do not insert another row. Inspect the existing row and determine why Moodle is not displaying it.

Check:

* `status`
* `imported`
* `headless`
* `courseid`
* `bigbluebuttonbnid`
* `groupid`
* `timecreated`
* `timemodified`

Also review Moodle scheduled task output and the BigBlueButton API response.

### Recording exists but status is DISMISSED

This is a different recovery path. Do not use the deleted-recording recovery procedure for this case.

The older dismissed-recording issue fixed by [MDL-76339](https://moodle.atlassian.net/browse/MDL-76339) could hide recordings by setting them to `DISMISSED` after a temporary communication failure with the BigBlueButton server.

If the recording row exists and its status is `DISMISSED`, do not insert a duplicate row. Inspect and correct the existing row, or follow the dedicated documentation for dismissed recordings.

### Recording does not exist on the BigBlueButton server

Recreating the Moodle database row is not enough if BigBlueButton cannot return the recording metadata.

The recording must first be available on the BigBlueButton server. Confirm that the BigBlueButton API can return the recording for the `recordID` or `meetingID` before inserting a Moodle row.

### Recording still does not appear after synchronization

Likely causes:

* Moodle cron has not run yet
* the scheduled task failed
* the recording ID does not match the metadata returned by BigBlueButton
* the recording is still not available from the BigBlueButton server

Next steps:

* rerun **Check for pending recordings** and review the task output
* confirm that BigBlueButton can return metadata for the recording ID
* check the server logs and Moodle scheduled task history
* compare this recovery flow with [Missing recordings after upgrade](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade) and [Deleted activity recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings) if the problem is actually a visibility or legacy-plugin issue

## Related pages

* [Find and play recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/find-and-play-recordings)
* [Manage recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/teachers/recordings)
* [Dismissed recordings in Moodle](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/dismissed-recordings)
* [Missing recordings after upgrade](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/missing-recordings-after-upgrade)
* [Deleted activity recordings](/docs/integrations/moodle/troubleshooting/deleted-activity-recordings)


# Commercial Hosting
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/openedx/commercial



Beyond the free tier and a basic self-hosted LTI connection, [commercial BigBlueButton providers](https://bigbluebutton.com/) offer a deeper, more polished integration with Open edX, aimed at programs that want production-grade virtual classrooms with less manual setup. [Blindside Networks](https://blindsidenetworks.com/open-edx-integration/), working with its Open edX integration partner Abstract Technology, offers this kind of enhanced integration. Typical capabilities include:

* **Effortless configuration.** Instructors and course authors configure BigBlueButton directly through Studio settings in a few clicks, rather than managing LTI credentials by hand.
* **Preloaded content.** Presentations can be uploaded ahead of time so a session is ready to go the moment class starts, saving instructor prep time.
* **Recording management inside Open edX.** Recordings are handled entirely within the platform — no separate application is needed. Instructors can set recording visibility and import recordings from other sessions.
* **Flexible recording reuse.** Class recordings can be uploaded directly into the Open edX platform, into compatible video modules, or into third-party content libraries for reuse across courses.
* **Automated session reminders.** The platform can send automatic notifications — by email or in-app message — to remind learners about upcoming virtual classes, helping boost attendance and preparedness.
* **Attendance and engagement analytics.** BigBlueButton session metrics such as join time, active participation, and session frequency can feed into Open edX's analytics tools, giving instructors and administrators a fuller picture of learner engagement without manual roll call or separate reporting.

This tier is best suited to institutions running Open edX at scale who want compliance-grade reporting, less administrative overhead for instructors, and virtual classrooms that feel like a native part of the platform rather than a bolted-on tool. Programs interested in this level of integration should reach out directly to a [commercial BigBlueButton provider](https://bigbluebutton.com/) or Open edX hosting partner to discuss deployment options.


# Free Tier
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/openedx/freetier



A no-cost hosted BigBlueButton service is available for edX and Open edX courses, provided by Blindside Networks. To use it, select "Free" from the "Select a plan" dropdown in the Live app configuration and click Save — no further setup is required.

The free tier has these limits:

* sessions run up to 60 minutes
* up to 25 concurrent users per session
* recordings expire after 7 days and cannot be downloaded
* student webcams are visible only to the moderator.

[BigBlueButton](https://bigbluebutton.com/#features) is a full-featured virtual classroom designed for online learning.  You have many options for upgrading BigBlueButton.


# BigBlueButton for Open edX
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/openedx/overview



Use BigBlueButton in Open edX to create live classes, schedule sessions, share presentations, and manage recordings.

[BigBlueButton](https://bigbluebutton.com/) for Open edX lets instructors run live virtual classrooms directly inside a course, through the platform's built-in Live app. You can use it to host lectures, office hours, group discussions, and recorded sessions without leaving the LMS.

## What you can do

* Enable BigBlueButton as an [LTI provider](https://docs.bigbluebutton.org/administration/lti/) for a course through the Live app
* Schedule and start meetings that appear in the course's "Live" tab in course navigation
* Let students join scheduled sessions to attend classes, office hours, or study groups
* Pre-load presentations so content is ready when class begins
* Manage and reuse recordings from within the platform
* Integrate session activity (join time, participation) into Open edX's analytics
* Choose between a free hosted tier, a commercial provider, or your own self-hosted server

## Choose your path

* New to BigBlueButton in Open edX? Start below with enabling the Live app, then pick a provider tier.
* Just want to try it out with no setup? Go to [Free Tier](/docs/integrations/open).
* Want a managed, production-grade integration with less admin overhead? Go to [Commercial](/docs/integrations/lti).
* Prefer to run and control your own server? Go to [Self-hosted](/docs/integrations/openedx/selfhost).

## Enable the Live app

BigBlueButton connects to a course through the [Live app](https://docs.openedx.org/en/open-release-sumac.master/educators/how-tos/course_development/add_course_live.html), an LTI integration that also supports other video conferencing tools like Zoom. Once enabled and configured, it appears as a "Live" tab in course navigation.

1. Go to the course's "Pages & Resources" page in Studio and click the gear icon on the "Live" configuration card.
2. Turn on the toggle in the top right to enable the app.
3. Select BigBlueButton as the LTI provider.
4. Choose a plan (see below) and add credentials if needed.
5. Click Save.

## Choosing a plan

BigBlueButton can be configured for a course in one of three ways. Each option is covered in detail on its own page — this is a quick comparison to help you decide which one to set up.

**Free tier.** A no-cost hosted BigBlueButton service for edX and Open edX courses, provided by Blindside Networks. Good for trying things out or light use, with limits on session length, participants, and recording retention. No credentials to manage — select "Free" and save. See [Free Tier](/docs/integrations/openedx/freetier) for setup and limits.

**Commercial.** A managed, paid integration from a commercial BigBlueButton provider, offering deeper Studio configuration, recording management, automated reminders, and analytics with little admin overhead. Best for institutions running at scale who want a polished, supported experience. See [Commercial](/docs/integrations/openedx/commercial) for details and setup.

**Self-hosted.** Run your own BigBlueButton server and connect it to Open edX via LTI. Gives you full control over capacity, data, and recordings, but requires server administration. Best if you have the infrastructure capacity and want no session or participant limits. See [Self-hosted](/docs/integrations/openedx/selfhost) for installation and configuration steps.

## Using BigBlueButton in a course

Once a provider is configured, instructors and students both work from the "Live" tab in course navigation.

Instructors use the Live tab to schedule and start sessions, and can upload presentation content ahead of time so it's ready the moment a session begins. Students use the same tab to see upcoming or in-progress sessions and join with one click to attend lectures, office hours, or study groups.

After a session ends, its recording becomes available from within the platform — no separate application needed. Depending on your plan, recordings can be managed, reused across courses, and reflected in Open edX's engagement analytics.


# Self-hosted
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/openedx/selfhost



If you'd rather run your own BigBlueButton server than use the free tier or a commercial provider, you [install BigBlueButton](https://docs.bigbluebutton.org/administration/lti/) separately and then point Open edX at it as a self-hosted LTI provider. This gives you full control over capacity, data residency, and recording retention, at the cost of running and maintaining the server yourself.

**1. Provision a server.** BigBlueButton is installed on a clean, dedicated Ubuntu 22.04 64-bit server. For production, the recommended minimums are 16 GB memory, 8 CPU cores with strong single-thread performance, 500 GB free disk space (less if recordings are disabled), a public hostname for an SSL certificate, and TCP ports 80/443 plus a UDP range open for media traffic. Smaller specs (4 cores/8 GB) are fine for development or small pilots. The server must not run another web server or reverse proxy on ports 80/443, since BigBlueButton needs a valid SSL certificate for browsers to allow webcam and microphone access.

**2. Install BigBlueButton.** Run the official `bbb-install.sh` script from the BigBlueButton project, which installs the core BigBlueButton components (and optionally Greenlight, a front end, and the LTI tools) in one pass. After installation, `sudo bbb-conf --check` and `sudo bbb-conf --status` confirm the server and its services are healthy. `sudo bbb-conf --secret` returns the server URL and shared secret you'll need for the Open edX side.

**3. Install the LTI components.** BigBlueButton connects to Open edX (and other LTI-compliant platforms like Desire2Learn or Blackboard) through two additional components: `bbb-lti-broker`, which handles incoming LTI launch requests, and `bbb-apps-room`, which renders the classroom interface for instructors and students. Passing the `-t <key>:<secret>` option to `bbb-install.sh` installs both and registers an LTI consumer key/secret pair in one step. Once installed, the LTI launch URL is available at `https://<your-hostname>/lti`, and you can verify it with a tool like the TSUGI LTI test page before connecting it to a course.

**4. Connect it to Open edX.** In Studio, enable the Live app for your course (see "The Live app" above), select "Commercial/self-hosted" from the "Select a plan" dropdown for BigBlueButton, and enter the LTI launch URL, key, and secret from your server. Save, and BigBlueButton will appear in the course's "Live" tab.

**5. Maintain the server.** Ongoing responsibilities include applying BigBlueButton updates by re-running `bbb-install.sh`, monitoring disk space for recordings, configuring a firewall and, if needed, a TURN server for users behind restrictive networks, and renewing your SSL certificate. Larger deployments serving many courses or a full institution often move to an Ansible-based or Scalelite cluster setup rather than a single server, for easier scaling and consistent configuration across machines.

Self-hosting is a good fit if you have the systems administration capacity to run and patch a dedicated server, need full control over recordings and data, or expect usage beyond what the free tier's 60-minute/25-participant limits allow. If you'd rather not manage a server, a commercial hosting provider or your Open edX hosting partner can typically deploy and maintain BigBlueButton for you on the same LTI connection.


# Integrations
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/overview

Connect BigBlueButton with your Learning Management System

## LMS Integrations

BigBlueButton integrates seamlessly with popular Learning Management Systems. Choose your platform below to get started.

<Columns>
  <Card title="Canvas LMS" icon="chalkboard" href="/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-what-are-conferences">
    Use BigBlueButton Conferences within Canvas for virtual classrooms and online meetings
  </Card>

  <Card title="Moodle LMS" icon="graduation-cap" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity">
    Add BigBlueButton activities to your Moodle courses for live sessions and recordings
  </Card>
</Columns>


# Creating a BigBlueButton meeting
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/sakai/creating-a-bigbluebutton-meeting

You can use BigBlueButton meetings to host one-on-one tutoring, virtual lectures, and hold online office hours. Once successfully installed,...

## You can use BigBlueButton meetings to host one-on-one tutoring, virtual lectures, and hold online office hours.

Once successfully installed, instructors and their students will have full access to BigBlueButton’s capabilities from within their Sakai interface.

## To create a new conference

Navigate to the course you wish to add a meeting to.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-11-21_at_2.53.06_PM.png" />

Select **meetings** from the menu options available

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-11-21_at_2.53.14_PM.png" />

Then choose **create meeting.**

Once created, the meeting's settings page will display the different configuration options that can be applied or edited to create your preferred virtual classroom setting.

## Meeting information

Under the meeting information settings you can add a name and description to the virtual classroom, enable recording, engage the wait for moderator setting, and pre-upload a presentation.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-11-21_at_3.04.16_PM.png" />

The meeting \*\*title \[1]\*\*and \*\*description \[2]\*\*are displayed when users join the session. We recommend assigning a unique meeting title to each new meeting created.

When \*\*recording \[3]\*\*is enabled, the start/stop record button in the live session will be available for a moderator to engage to generate a viewable, shareable recording link.

It is important to note that the recording option must be enabled for recording recovery in the event the moderator does not engage the start/stop during the live session.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-11-21_at_3.04.24_PM.png" />Checking the **wait for moderator** **\[4]** box restricts a viewer's ability to enter a session until a moderator joins.

When this setting is enabled, any viewer attempting to join your session will see the message **"\*\*\*\*waiting for moderator to join"**. Once you (or the moderator) have joined, those users will automatically join the meeting.

The \*\*pre-upload presentation \[5]\*\*option enables you to load a document that will be available in the live BigBlueButton session.

## Participants

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_1.51.08_PM.png" />

By default, meeting participants are set to the above configuration; where all users enrolled in the course are set to enter as **viewers** and the owner or Sakai Administrator is set to enter as a **moderator.**

Participants can be added to the room/activity based on their assigned **roles** or by individual enrolled **user**.

Be sure to save any changes made to your activity.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.04.28_PM.png" />

To **save** your meeting settings, scroll to the very bottom of the page and select **save.**

## To join the meeting

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.09.49_PM.png" />

Navigate back to the meetings tab to display the created meeting. Select the meeting you would like to enter from the list of available meetings.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.10.29_PM.png" />

Select **Join Session** to enter your BigBlueButton meeting.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.17.52_PM.png" />

When active, the meeting home page will provide an overview of the conference in progress including the start time and number of current participants, including their roles.


# Sakai default recording settings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/sakai/default-recording-settings

BigBlueButton meetings can be enabled to provide a recording option during a live virtual session. When enabled, the meeting will allow the moderator...

## BigBlueButton meetings can be enabled to provide a recording option during a live virtual session.

When enabled, the meeting will allow the moderator to engage the start/stop record button in the live session to generate a viewable, shareable recording link.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.24.02_PM.png" />

By default, BigBlueButton meetings are enabled to be recorded.

## \*Important to note that this is not an auto capture feature\*

In order to produce a recording of a meeting the moderator or instructor has to enable the start/stop record option by selecting the \*\*recording button,\*\*which is located in the upper middle of the BigBlueButton interface.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2019-11-05_at_1.45.13_PM.png" />

When the session is being recorded the icon will change from greyscale to **blue with a red indicator**, and a count up of active recorded minutes will show.

## Locating processed recordings

Recordings are tied to the meeting activity they were created under. Processed recording links and their statistics reports will appear under meeting's **recordings**tab.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_3.01.48_PM.png" />

All available recordings will appear in the recordings table in chronological order.

## Recording Playback

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-12-04_at_2.59.22_PM.png" />

To view a recording, under the playback column, select  the **Video**option. Your recording will load in a separate tab for viewing.

<img alt="Screen_Shot_2018-10-10_at_12.13.59_PM.png" />

The video file format can be saved as an mp4 when right clicking anywhere in the recording playback and choosing "save as" to save to a desired location on your local system.


# How long will recordings appear
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/sakai/faq-how-long-will-recordings-appear

By default, Sakai Meetings BigBlueButton Essentials recordings expire after 7 days. If you would like access to your recordings past 7 days, you can upgrade to...

## By default, Sakai Meetings BigBlueButton Essentials recordings expire after 7 days.

If you would like access to your recordings past 7 days, you can upgrade to permanent and downloadable recordings by contacting Blindside Networks or your Sakai Administrator.


# What are Meetings?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/integrations/sakai/faq-what-are-meetings

Sakai has the ability to integrate BigBlueButton as Sakai Meetings. It has a version of BigBlueButton that is available to Sakai customers who choose...

## Sakai has the ability to integrate BigBlueButton as Sakai Meetings.

It has a version of BigBlueButton that is available to Sakai customers who choose to install BigBlueButton Essentials or who choose to upgrade to BigBlueButton Enhanced.

Meetings are primarily used for virtual lectures, virtual office hours, and student groups. Instructors can easily create conferences and invite students, and students can use conferences from within student groups.

### **\*\***&#x43;reating a meeting is a course permission. If you cannot create a BigBlueButton meeting, your institution has restricted this feature\*\*


# Create Engaging Content
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/prepare/create-engaging-content

Prepare presentations, Smart Slides for polling, and other content before your session.

Prepare your content ahead of time so you can focus on teaching during the session.

## Upload Presentations

BigBlueButton supports PDF and office document uploads. Upload your slides before or during the session:

* Supported formats: **PDF** (recommended), PowerPoint, Word, and other office documents
* PDFs render most reliably — convert your slides to PDF for best results
* You can upload multiple presentations and switch between them during the session
* Optionally enable presentation download for participants

See [Upload a Presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download) for step-by-step instructions.

<Tip>
  Upload your presentation **before** the session starts. This saves class time and lets you verify that all slides render correctly.
</Tip>

## Smart Slides for One-Click Polling

Design your slides with built-in poll questions that BigBlueButton automatically detects:

* Add poll-formatted text to your slides (e.g., "A) Option 1 / B) Option 2")
* BigBlueButton recognizes the format and creates a one-click poll button
* No need to manually configure polls during class — just click to launch

See [Using Smart Slides for One-Click Polling](/docs/help/moderator-guide/using-smart-slides-for-one-click-polling) for formatting guidelines and examples.

## Content Preparation Tips

<AccordionGroup>
  <Accordion title="Test with yourself first">
    Join your own room before class to verify:

    * All slides render correctly
    * Embedded content (images, diagrams) displays properly
    * Smart Slide polls are detected
    * Screen share works with your intended application
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Optimize your slides">
    * Use **large fonts** (24pt minimum) for readability on small screens
    * Avoid dense text — use visuals and key points
    * Number your slides for easy reference during discussion
    * Include clear poll questions on slides if using Smart Slides
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Prepare supplementary content">
    * Have external video links ready if you plan to share YouTube or other media. See [Share External Video](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-an-external-audiovideo-link).
    * Prepare shared notes templates for collaborative activities. See [Use Shared Notes](/docs/help/user-guide/use-shared-notes).
    * Set up whiteboard slides for collaborative drawing exercises. See [Multi-user whiteboard](/docs/help/releases/how-do-i-use-the-multi-user-whiteboard).
  </Accordion>
</AccordionGroup>

## What's Next?

Once your content is ready:

<CardGroup>
  <Card icon="door-open" href="/docs/prepare/prepare-for-your-class" title="Set Up Your Room">
    Configure room settings, locks, and guest policy.
  </Card>

  <Card icon="presentation-screen" href="/docs/educate/teach/deliver-content" title="Deliver Content">
    Learn how to present your content effectively during the session.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>


# Prepare for your Class
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/prepare/prepare-for-your-class

Let's make sure your first classes go well!

If you've not done so, watch [watch the first two tutorial videos](/docs/help/videos).

## Check your computer and browser

Never used BigBlueButton before, verify your setup meets the minimum requirements:

* **Browser**: Latest version of Chrome, Firefox, Edge, or Safari
* **Internet**: Stable broadband connection (minimum 1 Mbps up/down; 5 Mbps recommended for webcam)
* **Audio**: Headset with microphone recommended (reduces echo)
* **Webcam**: Built-in or external USB webcam

For full details, see [Minimum Requirements](/docs/help/faq/what-are-the-minimum-requirements-for-bigbluebutton).

<Tip>For the best experience, use **Google Chrome** or **Microsoft Edge** on a desktop or laptop computer.</Tip>

To check your browser's bandwidth, connectivity, and media sharing, visit the self-test page at [https://test.bigbluebutton.com/](https://test.bigbluebutton.com/)

## Run through this First-Day Checklist

The best way to learn is by doing.  Follow the script below using a two browsers (so you can be both teacher and student) or, even better, invite a friend to join you do the steps together to ensure everything works.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Start a session at my.bigbluebutton.com">
    Create a BigBlueButton session at [https://my.bigbluebutton.com/](https://my.bigbluebutton.com/).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Test your audio">
    Join a session and complete the audio echo test. Confirm you can hear yourself and that your microphone is working.  See [Join the Audio](/docs/help/user-guide/join-the-audio).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Test your webcam">
    Enable your webcam and verify the preview looks correct. Adjust lighting so your face is clearly visible. See [Share a Webcam](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Upload a test presentation">
    Upload a PDF or slide deck to make sure it renders correctly. Check that all pages appear and text is readable. See [Upload a Presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Try screen sharing">
    Share your screen or a specific application window. Verify participants would see what you intend. See [Share My Screen](/docs/help/presenter-guide/share-my-screen).
  </Step>

  <Step title="Explore the interface">
    Familiarize yourself with the toolbar, chat panel, user list, and presentation area. See [Interface Overview](/docs/getting-started/interface-overview).
  </Step>
</Steps>

<Note>If you run into issues during testing, check the [Troubleshooting](/docs/reference/troubleshooting) guide.</Note>

## Get familar with your front-end

You are likely using a learning management system (LMS) for teaching with BigBlueButton.  The BigBlueButton integration is built-into the core of Canvas, Moodle, and Sakai.

<Columns>
  <Card title="Canvas" icon="graduation-cap" href="/docs/integrations/canvas/faq-what-are-conferences">
    Set up BigBlueButton conferences in Canvas.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Moodle" icon="book-open" href="/docs/integrations/moodle/get-started/create-your-first-activity">
    Create BigBlueButton activities in Moodle.
  </Card>

  <Card title="Sakai" icon="school" href="/docs/integrations/sakai/faq-what-are-meetings">
    Use BigBlueButton meetings in Sakai.
  </Card>
</Columns>

If you have hosting with [Blindside Networks](help/about-us), you may also have Personal Rooms setup to use BigBlueButton outside of your LMS.

<CardGroup>
  <Card icon="door-open" href="/docs/help/personal-rooms/how-do-i-create-my-own-rooms" title="Personal Rooms">
    Create standalone rooms with custom names and settings — no LMS required.
  </Card>
</CardGroup>

<Note>If you run into issues during testing, check the [Troubleshooting](/docs/reference/troubleshooting) guide.</Note>

# LMS integrations

The guides above organize BigBlueButton according to the flow of teaching. For a quick lookup of individual features, see the [Educator Quick Reference](/docs/getting-started/educator-quick-reference).


# Keyboard Shortcuts
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/reference/keyboard-shortcuts

Complete list of BigBlueButton keyboard shortcuts for Windows, Mac, and Linux.

BigBlueButton supports keyboard shortcuts for quick access to common actions. These shortcuts help you navigate the interface without a mouse.

## Finding Keyboard Shortcuts

You can view the full list of available keyboard shortcuts within BigBlueButton at any time:

* Open the **Options menu** (three dots icon)
* Select **Keyboard shortcuts**
* A dialog will show all available shortcuts

See Keyboard Shortcuts in [Access the options menu ](/docs/help/user-guide/access-the-options-menu)for more details.

## Keyboard Shortcuts

**Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows**

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="General">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Join audio | Alt + J |
    | Toggle Raise Hand | Alt + R |
    | Leave audio | Alt + L |
    | Hold for Push-to-talk | M |
    | Mute / Unmute | Alt + M |
    | Open actions menu | Alt + A |
    | Open Options | Alt + O |
    | Open leave meeting menu | Alt + X |
    | Toggle UserList | Alt + U |
    | Hide private chat | Alt + H |
    | Open debug window | Alt + K |
    | Close private chat | Alt + G |
    | Toggle Public Chat (User list must be open) | Alt + P |
    | Open custom poll | Ctrl + Alt + P |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Presentation">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Activate Pan tool (Presenter) | Spacebar |
    | Toggle Full-screen (Presenter) | Enter |
    | Next slide (Presenter) | Right Arrow |
    | Previous slide (Presenter) | Left Arrow |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Whiteboard">
    | Function | Combo | Alternative |
    | - | - | - |
    | Select Tool | 1 | V |
    | Pencil | 2 | D, P |
    | Eraser | 3 | E |
    | Rectangle | 4 | R |
    | Ellipse | 5 | O |
    | Triangle | 6 | G |
    | Line | 7 | L |
    | Arrow | 8 | A |
    | Text Tool | 9 | T |
    | Sticky Note | 0 | N, S |
    | Hand | | H |
    | Highlight | | Shift D |
    | Zoom In | Ctrl + | Ctrl M. Wheel up |
    | Zoom Out | Ctrl - | Ctrl M. Wheel down |
    | Reset Zoom | Shift 1 | N/A |
    | Zoom to Selection | Shift 2 | N/A |
    | Flip Horizontal | Shift H | N/A |
    | Flip Vertical | Shift V | N/A |
    | Lock / Unlock | Ctrl Shift L | N/A |
    | Move to Front | Shift ] | N/A |
    | Move Forward | ] | N/A |
    | Move Backward | \[ | N/A |
    | Move to Back | Shift \[ | N/A |
    | Undo | Ctrl Z | N/A |
    | Redo | Ctrl Shift Z | N/A |
    | Cut | Ctrl X | N/A |
    | Copy | Ctrl C | N/A |
    | Paste | Ctrl V | N/A |
    | Select All | Ctrl A | N/A |
    | Delete | Del | Backspace |
    | Duplicate | Ctrl D | N/A |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Gestures">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Undo | 2-finger tap |
    | Redo | 3-finger tap |
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

**Keyboard Shortcuts for Mac**

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="General">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Join audio | Control + Option + J |
    | Toggle Raise Hand | Control + Option + R |
    | Leave audio | Control + Option + L |
    | Hold for Push-to-talk | M |
    | Mute / Unmute | Control + Option + M |
    | Open actions menu | Control + Option + A |
    | Open Options | Control + Option + O |
    | Open leave meeting menu | Control + Option + X |
    | Toggle UserList | Control + Option + U |
    | Hide private chat | Control + Option + H |
    | Open debug window | Control + Option + K |
    | Close private chat | Control + Option + G |
    | Toggle Public Chat (User list must be open) | Control + Option + P |
    | Open custom poll | Control + Option + P |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Presentation">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Activate Pan tool (Presenter) | Spacebar |
    | Toggle Full-screen (Presenter) | Enter |
    | Next slide (Presenter) | Right Arrow |
    | Previous slide (Presenter) | Left Arrow |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Whiteboard">
    | Function | Combo | Alternative |
    | - | - | - |
    | Select Tool | 1 | V |
    | Pencil | 2 | D, P |
    | Eraser | 3 | E |
    | Rectangle | 4 | R |
    | Ellipse | 5 | O |
    | Triangle | 6 | G |
    | Line | 7 | L |
    | Arrow | 8 | A |
    | Text Tool | 9 | T |
    | Sticky Note | 0 | N, S |
    | Hand | | H |
    | Highlight | | Shift D |
    | Zoom In | Cmd + | Cmd M. Wheel up |
    | Zoom Out | Cmd - | Cmd M. Wheel down |
    | Reset Zoom | Shift 1 | N/A |
    | Zoom to Selection | Shift 2 | N/A |
    | Flip Horizontal | Shift H | N/A |
    | Flip Vertical | Shift V | N/A |
    | Lock / Unlock | Cmd Shift L | N/A |
    | Move to Front | Shift ] | N/A |
    | Move Forward | ] | N/A |
    | Move Backward | \[ | N/A |
    | Move to Back | Shift \[ | N/A |
    | Undo | Cmd Z | N/A |
    | Redo | Cmd Shift Z | N/A |
    | Cut | Cmd X | N/A |
    | Copy | Cmd C | N/A |
    | Paste | Cmd V | N/A |
    | Select All | Cmd A | N/A |
    | Delete | Del | Backspace |
    | Duplicate | Cmd D | N/A |
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Gestures">
    | Function | Combo |
    | - | - |
    | Undo | 2-finger tap |
    | Redo | 3-finger tap |
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<Note>
  Exact shortcuts may vary by BigBlueButton version and browser. Always check the in-app shortcut list for the most current bindings.
</Note>

## Accessibility Navigation

Keyboard shortcuts are essential for users who navigate without a mouse:

* **Tab** — move between interface elements
* **Enter/Space** — activate buttons and controls
* **Escape** — close dialogs and menus
* **Arrow keys** — navigate within lists and menus

For more accessibility features, see [Accessibility](/docs/getting-started/accessibility).


# Practical Tips
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/reference/practical-tips

Power-user tips for chat, whiteboard, webcams, presentations, and audio in BigBlueButton.

Quick tips organized by area to help you get the most out of BigBlueButton.

## Audio

* **Use a headset** to avoid echo and feedback
* **Mute when not speaking** — especially in large sessions
* **Test audio before class** using the echo test
* **Close other audio apps** (Spotify, etc.) to avoid interference
* Join via **microphone** (not listen-only) if you plan to speak

## Chat

* **Save important chat messages** before the session ends — chat is not preserved after the meeting
* Use **private chat** for individual student support without disrupting the class
* **Pin important messages** by referencing them verbally so students can scroll back
* Moderators can **clear public chat** if it becomes too noisy

## Webcams

* **Good lighting** matters more than camera quality — face a window or desk lamp
* **Blur your background** for privacy. See [Change Webcam Background](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam)
* **Disable self-view** if your own video is distracting. See [Disable Self-View](/docs/help/releases/disable-self-view-of-webcam)
* **Pin important webcams** to keep them visible. See [Pin a Webcam](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam#how-do-i-pin-my-webcam)
* **Adjust brightness** if your webcam image is too dark. See [Adjust Brightness](/docs/help/user-guide/share-a-webcam#how-do-i-adjust-my-webcams-brightness)

## Presentations

* **Convert to PDF** before uploading for the most reliable rendering
* **Use large fonts** (24pt+) — small text is hard to read on student screens
* **Upload before class** to save time and verify rendering
* **Enable download** if students need the slides for reference. See [Download Original Presentation](/docs/help/presenter-guide/upload-a-presentation-enable-for-download)

## Whiteboard

* **Use different colors** when multiple people annotate to tell contributions apart
* **Clear annotations** between slides to avoid clutter
* The **multi-user whiteboard** is great for collaborative work but can get chaotic — set clear instructions
* **Export whiteboard annotations** from breakout rooms before closing them

## Screen Sharing

* **Close unnecessary tabs** and notifications before sharing
* **Share a specific window** instead of your entire screen to maintain privacy
* **Use Chrome or Edge** for the best screen sharing experience
* Sharing **iPad/iPhone screens** requires AirPlay or QuickTime mirroring

## Breakout Rooms

* **Give clear instructions** before opening breakout rooms
* **Set a timer** so groups know how much time they have
* **Visit rooms briefly** to check progress
* **Export shared notes and whiteboard** before closing rooms
* Allow **1–2 minutes** for transition time in your session plan


# Troubleshooting
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/reference/troubleshooting

Find solutions to common audio, video, connectivity, and client issues in BigBlueButton.

If you're experiencing issues with BigBlueButton, find your problem area below and follow the linked guide.

## Known Issues

For a list of currently known issues and workarounds, see [Known Issues](/docs/help/troubleshooting/known-issues).

## Audio Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| Can't join audio / no sound | [Join the Audio](/docs/help/user-guide/join-the-audio) |
| Audio works on Mac but fails after OS update | [Mac OS Media Permissions](/docs/help/troubleshooting/mac-os-updates-bigbluebutton-media-permissions) |
| Still no audio after allowing browser permissions on Mac | [Mac OS Audio Troubleshooting](/docs/help/troubleshooting/after-allowing-the-browser-permissions-on-mac-os-i-am-still-unable-to-join-my-audio-in-bigbluebutton) |

## Video Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| Can't share webcam | [Users Unable to Share Webcam](/docs/help/troubleshooting/users-unable-to-share-their-webcam) |
| Webcam not appearing in recording | [Webcam Not in Recording](/docs/help/troubleshooting/why-do-i-not-see-my-webcam-in-the-recording) |

## Connectivity Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| Getting disconnected | [User Is Getting Disconnected](/docs/help/troubleshooting/user-is-getting-disconnected) |
| Periodic disconnects/reconnects | [Client Periodically Disconnects](/docs/help/troubleshooting/client-periodically-disconnectsreconnects) |
| IPv6 causing issues | [How to Disable IPv6](/docs/help/troubleshooting/how-to-disable-ipv6) |
| Firewall blocking connections | [Whitelisting for Firewall](/docs/help/faq/whitelisting-bigbluebutton-servers-for-the-firewall) |
| Network status page | [Network Status Page](/docs/help/troubleshooting/blindside-networks-status-page) |
| Connection status | [Connection Status](/docs/help/faq/connection-status) |

## Client Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| HTML5 client information | [HTML5 Client Info](/docs/help/troubleshooting/important-information-for-users-of-the-bigbluebutton-html5-client) |
| Antivirus causing issues | [Antivirus Issues](/docs/help/faq/antivirus-software-causes-issues-while-connecting-to-a-bigbluebutton-session) |
| Capturing browser console logs | [Browser Console Logs](/docs/help/faq/how-do-i-capture-the-browsers-console) |

## Student Access Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| Students can't see or join meetings | [Students Can't Join](/docs/help/troubleshooting/students-are-not-able-to-see-join-their-meeting) |
| Students can't view recordings | [Students Can't View Recordings](/docs/help/troubleshooting/students-are-not-able-to-view-their-concluded-meeting-recordings) |

## Presentation Issues

| Problem | Guide |
| - | - |
| Scanned PDF not displaying correctly | [Scanned PDF Issues](/docs/help/troubleshooting/pdf-that-contains-scanned-content-does-not-display-correctly) |
| LaTeX documents not converting | [LaTeX Conversion Issues](/docs/help/troubleshooting/latex-documents-not-converting-correctly) |
| Playing video via screen sharing | [Video via Screen Share](/docs/help/faq/can-i-play-a-video-using-screen-sharing) |
| YouTube playback errors | [YouTube Playback Error](/docs/help/faq/common-youtube-external-video-playback-error) |

<Note>If your issue isn't listed here, check the [FAQ](/docs/help/faq/what-are-the-minimum-requirements-for-bigbluebutton) or contact support.</Note>


# Recordings
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/reflect/recordings

Record sessions, manage recording formats, and control download and access settings.

BigBlueButton can record your sessions for later review by students or for your own reflection.

## Start and Stop Recording

Moderators control when recording is active:

* Click the **Record** button to start capturing the session
* Click again to pause recording
* You can start and stop multiple times — they'll be combined into one recording
* A visual indicator shows all participants when recording is active

See [Start and Stop Recording](/docs/help/moderator-guide/start-and-stop-recording).

<Note>Recording only captures content when actively recording. Paused segments are not included.</Note>

## Recording Formats

BigBlueButton recordings are available in different formats:

| Format | Content | Best For |
| - | - | - |
| **Presentation** | Slides + audio + chat + shared notes | Reviewing lectures |
| **Video** | Full video recording with webcams | Visual review |
| **Statistics** | Engagement data and participation metrics | Analytics and reflection |

## Processing Time

Recordings are not available immediately after a session ends:

* Processing time varies based on session length and server load
* Typical processing: minutes to hours depending on duration
* You'll receive access once processing completes

See [How Long Until My Recording Is Available?](/docs/help/premium/how-long-until-my-recording-is-available-for-viewing).

## Download Recordings

Premium users can download recordings for offline viewing or archival:

See [Download a Recording](/docs/help/premium/how-do-i-download-a-recording).

## Recording Security

Control who can access and download your recordings:

* **Prevent downloads** — restrict recordings to online viewing only. See [Prevent Users from Downloading a Recording](/docs/help/premium/can-i-prevent-users-from-downloading-a-recording).
* **Access control** — recordings inherit the access settings of your room or LMS course

## Tips for Better Recordings

<Tip>
  * **Start recording early** — don't forget to click Record at the start of class
  * **Pause during breaks** — stop recording during non-instructional time
  * **Announce recording** — let participants know when recording is active
  * **Review your recordings** — watch your own recordings to improve your teaching
</Tip>


# Review Your Class
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/reflect/review-your-class

Use statistic recordings, the Learning Analytics Dashboard, and Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard.

## Learning Analytics Dashboard (Post-Session)

When you end your class, the Learning Analytics Dashboard will remain available for about five minutes:

* **Activity scores** — which students were most and least engaged
* **Timeline data** — when engagement dropped (may indicate confusing content)
* **Poll/quiz results** — which questions students struggled with
* **CSV export** — download data for detailed analysis

See [Learning Analytics Dashboard](/docs/help/moderator-guide/learning-analytics-dashboard).

## Reflection Questions

Use these questions to guide your post-session review:

* **Engagement**: Did participation drop at any point? What was happening in the session at that time?
* **Polls**: Were there questions where many students answered incorrectly? Do you need to revisit that topic?
* **Chat**: Were there unanswered questions in the chat?
* **Breakout rooms**: Did all groups use their full time, or did some finish early?
* **Pacing**: Was the session too long, too short, or well-timed?

## Learning Analytics Dashboard (Recording format)

When using BigBlueButton Enhanced, you will see the LAD as the statistic recording format within Canvas and Moodle.  This captures the last state of the LAD so you can review anytime after your class.

<Note>
  The ability to review the Learning Analytics Dashboard as a recording format is part of [BigBlueButton Enhanced](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features) from Blindside Networks.
</Note>

## Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard (Administrators)

When using BigBlueButton Enhanced, Blindside Networks can provide administrators access the [Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard](/docs/analytics/overview) to give you visibility of LAD data across all sessions.

<Note>
  The Enterprise Learning Analytics Dashboard is part of [BigBlueButton Enhanced](/docs/help/premium/overview-of-premium-features) from Blindside Networks.
</Note>


# Starting and Editing a Conference
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/starting-and-editing-a-conference

Start a Schoology Conference to launch the BigBlueButton session, or use the gear icon to edit its details.

## Starting and Editing a Conference

<Frame>
  <img alt="Startconference" />
</Frame>

After creating a Conference, you can select **Start Conference \[1]** to begin the BigBlueButton session. This will automatically make you join the session in a new tab.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Screenshot 2026 04 15 At 11 05 20 AM" />
</Frame>

By selecting the gear icon next to the conference of your choosing, you can **edit \[2]** or **delete \[3]** your conference before starting it.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Editconference" />
</Frame>

You can edit the title, start and end time details of the conference.

## Rejoining a Conference

When a conference is started, you can join by selecting the link of the conference that is in progress.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Joinconference" />
</Frame>

Conferences that can be joined will be located in the active panel by default.


# What are Schoology Conferences?
Source: https://bigbluebutton.com/docs/what-are-conferences

Schoology Conferences is a built-in BigBlueButton integration for virtual lectures, office hours, and student groups.

## Schoology by Powerschool has integrated BigBlueButton as Schoology Conferences.

It has a built-in version of BigBlueButton that is available to all Schoology customers.

Conferences are primarily used for virtual lectures, virtual office hours, and student groups. Instructors can easily create conferences and invite students, and students can use conferences from within student groups.

### **\*\***&#x43;reating a conference is a course permission. If you cannot create a conference, your institution has restricted this feature\*\*